Changelog

ISPadmin 4.35 Stable

  • Newsletter subscription option for individual users (administrators)
  • Bug fix: Invoice preview (Invoice groups)
  • Bug fix: Address used in text (SMS) messages from Scheduling

 

ISPadmin 4.35 beta1

  • Reported bugs fixed

 

 

ISPadmin 4.34 Stable

 

MikroTik ROS 6.x update

 

* No DNS changes are made on routers. It is necessary to ensure that ISPadmin can access the Internet.
* More information on errors is provided by the system.
* If you are updating from one of the older versions of ROS (for example, 6.15), to the latest version, you might encounter problems with HostKey (MikroTik log: "Corrupt host's key, regenerating it! Reboot required!"). If that happens, it is necessary to regenerate the key on a given MikroTik router: /ip ssh regenerate-host-key . And then: /system reboot .

 

ISPadmin 4.33 Stable

 

MikroTik ROS update

 

As a consequence of problems related to a well-known MikroTik ROS vulnerability (Winbox port vulnerability, more information to be found here: https://blog.mikrotik.com), we have decided to integrate into ISPadmin an update utility that will make the entire OS update process much easier.

In Hardware / Routers / Router status / Routers, you can check which MikroTik devices are running the latest stable version of MikroTik ROS and which are not. There is a new column Version status in the table. In it, one of the following icons can appear:

* Red Cross icon: Router not active.

* Exclamation Point icon: OS not up to date. Checked every hour. When you click on this icon, the corresponding router is added to the update queue and a Clock icon appears.

* Clock icon: Ready for update. When you click on this icon, the corresponding router is removed from the update queue and the Exclamation Point icon appears. Update is launched from the ISPadmin server console ("root" user). More information can be found below.

* Thumb Up icon: Software downloaded. Waiting for installation.

* Green Check Mark icon: Latest stable version of OS.

Routers can be added to or removed from the queue in bulk using the checkboxes in the first column and the select box in the lower-left corner.

Update itself is launched using the following script: /usr/local/script/ispadmin/updateMikrotikSW.pl

You can use an optional parameter that allows you to set a time in minutes after which reboot and OS installation ensue. Example: /usr/local/script/ispadmin/updateMikrotikSW.pl 450

With the help of this parameter, you can thus schedule the bulk reboot of all MikroTik routers for a convenient time when there is little traffic.

The time is measured from the moment the script was launched. If you use the delayed start feature, it is necessary to bear in mind the fact that OS download may take some time, which is why you should make allowance for that.

If you do not use it, the script will immediately start connecting to one device after another and perform OS installation. The script checks whether the next device in the queue is available (ping – 3 times). You can skip this step by pressing any key, which causes the script to move to the next device.

If you launch the script again, you can set a different time. Routers that are already up to date are not updated again.

You can watch the entire process unfold in the server console.

!!! To be able to perform OS updates, you need to allow outgoing traffic to the Internet. The script checks the DNS settings. If necessary, the system defaults to 8.8.8.8. The script does not check the firewall and NAT settings. It is up to the network administrator to make any changes to the relevant settings.

!!! First of all, try updating just one single MikroTik device. If the API works all right after update (see changelog here: https://mikrotik.com/download/changelogs), it is possible to update the rest of the MikroTik devices in bulk. Bulk update at your own risk.


* All the changes from the preceding beta versions included

* Reported bugs fixed

* Root certificates updated


ISPadmin 4.33 beta2

 

  • Bug fix: Email sending - Two or more email addresses separated by a special character
  • Bug fix: Duplicate payments displayed in the Client card
  • Bug fix: Discount - Invoices covering only a certain part of a month
  • Bug fixes: Other reported issues

 

 

ISPadmin 4.33 beta1

 

  • Bug fix: Invoice sending - System variables
  • Bug fix: Reminders - System variables
  • Bug fix: Contract generation
  • Bug fix: Edit Internet service - End device port
  • Bug fix: Overview of VoIP imports
  • Bug fix: List of VoIP services
  • Bug fix: Service suspension
  • Bug fix: Service removal after the end of the notice period
  • Bug fix: Invoice copy (HU localization)
  • Bug fix: Dealer - Add payment
  • Bug fix: Edit Internet service - Router update
  • Bug fix: Automatic reminder creation date
  • Bug fix: "Marked period" change - Bulk invoice generation

 

 

ISPadmin 4.32 Stable

  • All the changes from the preceding beta versions included
  • It is not possible to issue or edit invoices with a VAT amount of 100,000 HUF or more. (HU localization)

 

ISPadmin 4.32 beta4

  • GDPR – Data deletion

    • In the Client Card, there is a new option that allows you to delete a client completely from the system (Delete button). All the client data – with the exception of invoicing data – is deleted from the database and disk.

    • The Deactivate button merely moves a given client to Statistics Deactiv. clients. There you can delete the client as well.

  • GDPR – Consent

    • Settings Code lists GDPR Personal data: A list of personal data + default consent expiration times for individual items (in months from the contract end date).

    • Settings Code lists GDPR Types

    • Settings Code lists GDPR Templates: Consent templates can be created here. Only the default type Consent to personal data processing allows you to select individual items of personal data from the relevant code list. All types allow you to upload RTF, DOC and DOCX files with system variables.

    • Other Bulk GDPR: Here you can bulk generate consent documents for groups of clients. No matter whether such a document has been generated individually or as part of bulk generation, the file will be available in the Client Portal. A client can consent to the contents of this document or withdraw consent.

    • Client Card / GDPR Client consent management and history

    • Clients Contacts – Filter Client Detail GDPR consent filter option

  • An Invoicing Forecast feature has been added to the system. With its help, you can generate an invoicing forecast covering future months. First, it is necessary to update the data using the Update button. Then, it is possible to generate a forecast for individual invoice groups covering a particular period (up to a certain date).

  • The Scheduled Suspension of Service (FROM – TO) feature has been fixed.

  • The suspension settings have been split into two parts. In the first part, you can manually suspend a service with immediate effect. This part also serves as an indicator of automatic suspension (for instance, in the case of non-payers). The second part is totally independent of the first one. Here you can set the scheduled suspension of service and invoicing.

  • Reminder issues have been fixed.

  • A new IPEX REST API has been incorporated into the system. If you want to use it, you will have to set the ipex_rest_api_password and ipex_rest_api_username items in the system settings and delete the old SOAP access details.

 

ISPadmin 4.32 beta3

  • Note: This update takes longer due to update of database fields. Please be patient.
  • Bug fix - Bulk invoice generation: An invoice was issued with an invoicing period longer than one month (e.g. 1 year). Then, a credit note was issued for this invoice and the invoicing period was changed to 1 month. During the next bulk invoice generation, no invoice was issued for the given service.
  • Bug fix - Sending of emails to more than one email address
  • Uncritical bugs fixed

 

 

ISPadmin 4.32 beta2

Clients

  • FUP check script fixed

 

Settings

  • Settings Syst. settings General: New item added - check_hw_ip_duplicity. With its help, you can disable the duplicate IP address check for routers and switches.

 

Statistics

  • Statistics Wifi list: Coordinates added (Latitude and Longitude, DMS)

 

Scheduling

  • Holidays entered into the system were not displayed correctly (except for the CZ localization).

 

Inventory

  • Inventory items: Last transfer time added. Sorting issues fixed.

 

 

ISPadmin 4.32 beta1

CLIENTS

  • Client card / Active services: There is a new button Copy, which allows you to prefill the Add new service form. That is useful if you want to create an *almost* identical service with a different ID. In the list of deleted services, there is a new button New service, which allows you to create a new service based on one of the deleted services.
  • Client card / Invoicing: Table Payments renamed to Matched payments
  • Issue invoice copy rewritten
  • Script for automatic assignment of MAC addresses from cable modems to particular services (CMTS) rewritten
  • FUP check script rewritten

 

HARDWARE

  • Hardware Routers All: New button added - Update selected routers
  • Radius data synchronization script rewritten
  • Bug fix - BW test start time

 

SETTINGS

  • Settings Syst. settings General: New item added - sms_UDH_Support. With its help, you can activate so-called Concatenated SMS messages. It is necessary to first check whether your GSM gateway supports UDH. Default status: OFF.
  • Settings Administrators Dealers rewritten: Please check the permission settings.
  • SNMP template fix

 

STATISTICS

  • Resend SMS script rewritten
  • Scripts handling tariff statistics rewritten

 

SCHEDULING

  • Script handling the sending of SMS messages from Scheduling rewritten

 

INVOICING

  • PDF file creator script rewritten (reminders, invoices, ...). Minor modifications made. We recommend that you check whether everything is all right.
  • Manual and automatically generated reminders + reminder templates rewritten
  • Bank email import script rewritten
  • Send invoice(s) by email page rewritten
  • RLB60 export rewritten (HU localization)
  • New type of the OC31 postal money order - FM version (HU localization)

 

OTHER

  • Bug fix - In some parts of the world, the map showed the wrong location for routers.

 

INVENTORY

  • Layout changes in Inventory

 

 

 

ISPadmin 4.31 Stable

 

  • All the changes from the preceding beta versions included

 

ISPadmin 4.31 beta3

  • Bug fix - Sending of invoices via email (when more than one IPTV service appeared on a single invoice)
  • Bug fix - Nagios notifications
  • Bug fix - Service cancellation form
  • Bug fix - VAT on cancelled invoices in the RLB export (HU localization)
  • Bug fix - Inventory view
  • Bug fix - Selection of the first IP address from a static range intended for Radius
  • Radius services: Duplicate IP address check added 

 

 

ISPadmin 4.31 beta2

  • Bug fix - SSH connection - MikroTik devices with RouterOS 4.x or lower

 

 

ISPadmin 4.31 beta1

CLIENTS

  • The Client card / Invoicing / Invoice - detail / Credit note cancellation page has been rewritten.
  • The script used to suspend clients' services has been rewritten. The way it works has been modified: The system suspends only the service for which the now overdue invoice has been issued. The other services are left intact.
  • Bug fix - Restore VoIP service script

 

HARDWARE

  • The Hardware Routers All > Test connection page has been rewritten.
  • The Hardware CMTS Detail > Ping page has been rewritten.
  • The Hardware Routers Router status WIFi Links page has been rewritten.
  • MikroTik - Settings - /radius: The src-address parameter is now automatically sent to the relevant MikroTik device. It works only via API.
  • Net::SSH::Perl upgraded to 2.14

 

SETTINGS

  • The Settings Syst. settings Syslog page has been rewritten.
  • The Settings Other SNMP OID page has been rewritten.

 

STATISTICS

  • Statistics History History: Unsent emails are highlighted.
  • Bug fix - Contract expiry emails are properly recorded in the history.

 

INVOICING

  • Invoicing Settings General: A new setting has been added to the system - invoicing_period. With its help, you can set on the basis of which invoices are to be categorized into individual periods. Two options are available: Date of taxable supply or Invoiced month.
  • Invoicing Settings General: A new settings has been added to the system - reminder_active. With its help, you can globally deactivate reminders.
  • Invoicing Settings General: A new settings has been added to the system - export_abo_vs_data. Define what you want to appear in the VS field in the ABO export: 0 - VS retrieved from payment details, 1 - client number.
  • Invoicing Cash book Cash book: The total amount can now be seen above the table. The number of entries displayed on a page has been increased. The filter preset bug has been fixed.
  • Invoicing Overviews Debts Debts: A new filter has been added here - Within due date/Past due date.
  • Invoicing Invoices Time period By invoices: A month/year filter has been added.
  • Bug fix - Omega Kros invoice export
  • Bug fix - RLB export (HU localization)
  • Bug fix - System variable $CELKEM_S_DPH$ - IPTV services

 

OTHER

  • The Other Import VoIP import page has been rewritten.
  • The Other Backups System page has been rewritten.
  • Bug fix - Other Bulk E-mail - A server error occurred when the template was removed.

 

INVENTORY

  • Inventory has been rewritten.
  • In the process, new permission settings have been added.
  • Please go to Settings Administrators Administrators, check the settings, and make the necessary changes:

    • Global (system-wide) settings - Table Inventory on the left:
      • Display sale prices
      • Display purchase prices
      • Manage only assigned items

       

    • Rights for the individual parts of the system:
      • Client card / Items from Inventory
      • Hardware Routers All > Assigned goods
      • Settings Syst. settings Inventory
      • Settings Code lists Inventory
      • Inventory

       

  • New: Column Quantity > Total. You can now see here the total quantity of a certain type of item after you have filtered out the rest.
  • One-way conversion of inventory history to a new format

 

ISPadmin 4.30 Stable

 

  • All the changes from the preceding beta versions included

 

ISPadmin 4.30 beta2

  • Minor CSS modifications

 

CLIENTS

  • Clients Home: Information about the localization used has been added to the page.
  • The DVBC Set Top Box page in the Client card has been rewritten.
  • The Delete client page in the Client card has been rewritten.
  • Internet service cancellation form: The length of notice period is now entered in days.
  • Bug fix - The credit note form has been fixed.

 

HARDWARE

  • The Update the router configuration function in Hardware Routers All has been rewritten.
  • Bug fix - The Master router drop-down menu is displayed only when Mikrotik - redundant is chosen from the Router type menu.
  • Bug fix - The duplicate IP address check has been modified. Now it is possible to assign the same IP address to a switch and a router. Also, the duplicate RADIUS and CMTS services check has been fixed.

 

SETTINGS

  • You can now enter notice periods either in days or in months. You can find the relevant setting in Settings Syst. settings General: withdrawal_date_type. 0 - months, 1 - days. If you want to bulk edit the notice periods for all Internet services, you may use the Bulk edit notice periods tool in Other Tools.  
  • Bug fix - The system variables $CLI_TOTAL_INCL_VAT$ and $CLI_TOTAL_EXCL_VAT$ include the price for an IPTV service.

 

STATISTICS

  • Bug fix - The Statistics Servers stats SMS page has been fixed.

 

SCHEDULING

  • Bug fix - Work report in PDF: The times spent on individual tasks are displayed correctly.

 

INVOICING

  • Bug fix - A check for duplicate SMS notifications of payment received
  • Bug fix - VAT table on multi-page invoices
  • Bug fix - Emails from Raiffeisenbank: Both the old and the new version of emails are supported (CZ localization).
  • Bug fix - Invoicing of pending items with Billing from = last day of the month
  • Bug fix - Date of Taxable Supply is editable (HU localization).

 

OTHER

  • Other Backups Routers: You can now full-text search for a particular IP address.
  • Bug fix - Clients were not displayed on the map if the details of any one of them contained a non-printable character.

 

ISPadmin 4.30 beta1

CLIENTS

  • Clients Internet --> Column SSID: The way an access point is determined has been modified. The system first tries to find the access point name based on the configuration of a given Internet service. If there is no SSID, the system retrieves the requested information from a relevant MikroTik device based on MAC address.
  • Clients Internet --> Column HW end device - modification: CPE is displayed here, not a client's end device (their own router).
  • Clients Internet --> Click on a particular amplifier --> Statistics of the amplifier: Clients' addresses and direct links to the Client card have been added.
  • Individual invoice creation --> Other items on invoice (cena_dph_typ = 1): The way the price excl. VAT is calculated has been modified. CZ localization x other localizations.
  • Individual invoice creation --> Other items on invoice (cena_dph_typ = 1): The way the calculated price excl. VAT is rounded has been modified.
  • The Add/Edit Internet service page has been modified: If you did not select any location, you were not able to choose any of the tariffs with a set location.
  • The page Client card / Invoicing --> Invoice details --> Edit date on invoice has been rewritten.
  • The page Client card / Invoicing --> Invoice details --> Cancelled invoice recovery has been rewritten.
  • Client card / Internet statistic: In the case of SNMP unavailability, the Modem online function could slow the system down. As a result, a timeout limit has been set for this function.

 

HARDWARE

  • Hardware Routers All --> Network interface --> WiFi scan: The scan tool has been rewritten.
  • Hardware Routers Router status WiFi scan: The scan tool has been rewritten.
  • Hardware Routers All --> Device connected to router: If the installation address is not filled out, the Show on map button is disabled.
  • A duplicate IP address check has been introduced for active routers and switches. If you need to add a device with a duplicate IP address, the device status must be set to inactive.

 

SETTINGS

  • Settings Syst. settings Mikrotik - reading_dynamic_routes: To speed up the retrieval of data from MikroTik devices, the following modifications have been made:
    • Option 0: Only static routes. Some local routes will not be retrieved. You will see warning messages in the list of routed networks ("This network is not configured on the router"). Such messages do not affect the way the system works. In case of need, please try changing the setting to 1 or 2.
    • Option 1: Local + static + PPP + PPPoE.
    • Option 3: An option #3 has been added - retrieval of data from routing tables deactivated. This option is suitable for specific situations: for example, for situations where the BGP protocol is used and the routing table has 360 000 rows. ISPadmin tries to retrieve static and local routes, but it takes too long. The process execution time exceeds the set limit, and the process is thus terminated. As a result, data is not retrieved and the requested update is not performed.
  • SMS failure notifications: A new function has been added that checks how long SMS message have been in the queue. If a set limit (sms_failure_notify in Settings Syst. settings General) is exceeded, a notification is sent to the email address of the system administrator.
  • If your license covers the Netflow module, but you do not use it (it is inactive), a message appears informing you of the fact that Netflow is not active. You can disable this feature using the netflow_button item in Settings Syst. settings General.
  • The page Settings Syst. settings Security has been rewritten.

 

SCHEDULING

  • Bug fix - Scheduling Report: Data in PDF files are now correct (complete).

 

INVOICING

  • Invoicing Settings Cash book Category: The settings Invoicing group, Income/Expense and Amount have been removed. These items are to be set in the settings of a relevant group. Thus, they are unnecessary here.
  • Invoicing Cash book Cash book: When adding a new entry, you can (again) choose any one of the invoicing groups offered.
  • Invoicing Overviews Accounting: The Rounding column has been added. A bug affecting cancelled invoices has been fixed (HU localization).
  • Bug fix - Bulk invoice generation: If a proforma invoice is settled by an overpayment, an email with a corresponding tax invoice is sent to a given client.
  • Bug fix - Bulk invoice generation: Invoice date and Date of taxable supply are now set to the current date (HU localization).
  • Bug fix - VoIP service invoicing: An issue with VoIP services with more than 78 numbers.
  • Bug fix - Mobile service invoicing: Wrong invoicing periods appeared on invoices containing call charges if the invoices had not been issued for the current month.
  • Bug fix - VAT in pending items
  • Bug fix - Proforma invoices in a locked period can now be cancelled.
  • Bug fix - SEPA payment import: In certain cases, some payments could not be imported.
  • Bug fix - Download of bank emails via IMAP: Occassional problems have been resolved.

 

OTHER

  • Other Bulk E-mail: A new filter has been added to the form - Access point.
  • Other Free SMS: Now you can enter more than one phone number into the field provided. Numbers must be separated by commas or semicolons.
  • The Overdue payment tool in Other Tools has been removed: Overdue invoices can be viewed in Invoicing Overviews Debts Debts.
  • The E-mail history tool in Other Tools has been removed: Emails can now be deleted in Statistics History Settings.

 

 

 

ISPadmin 4.29

Bug fixes

In version 4.28 in global settings in the menu "Invoicing / Settings / Invoice group" where it is possible to tick off checkbox "Issue a pro-forma invoice" for whole particular invocing group, the system had ignored this setting and it caused that generated pro-forma invoices displayed incorrect text in printed PDF files. Invoice number line was not affected but it is necessary to correct this issue and send invoices to your customers again.

Please proceed with following steps for automatic correction:

1) Typing command "ispadmin_update stable" in command line on your server update the system to the latest version which will automatically make corrections on incorrectly displayed pro-forma invoices.

2) Send again all invoices to your customers in the menu tab "Invoicing / Invoices / Invoices" (for currently generated invoices) by clicking on the option "Send invoices by e-mail" located on the right side of the last generated period. It is necessary to mark checkbox "Send each invoice" for assurance that all of your customers will get correct pro-forma invoice.


During development process optimalization of invoice "Issue date" has been released in version 4.28.

There are now two settings for mass generated invoices for particular period:

A) While generating invoices in the menu tab "Invoicing / Invoices" there is possible to set up "Issue date" for all invoice which you are going to generate (default value is the 1st day of month the invoices are generated for)

B) In Client card in the left side menu tab "Information" there is possible to mark checkbox "Set Invoice issue date according to Invoice date:" and set up "Invocing date" by filling up the value, what means the Issue date which will be displayed on generated invoice for particular customer. If the value is set and the checkbox is marked, system will ignore settings while generating invoices (point A) but will use this settings for particular customer as superior for their invoices.

If you wish to generate invoices for all customers in particular invoicing group with the same date as described in point A, it is necessary to check issued invoices if there is any superior settings applicated from Client card as described in point B.

ISPadmin 4.28 Stable

 

  • All the changes from the preceding beta versions included
  • Reported bugs fixed

 

ISPadmin 4.28 beta3

Clients

  • The Cancel invoice function has been rewritten.

 

Hardware

  • The structure of firewall rules in the NAT section has been optimized. This modification resolves a problem that could, in some specific cases, result in NAT 1:1 not working. It also resolves a problem with the redirection of incoming Internet traffic to the info page in the case of suspended services. For example, even though a client's Internet service was suspended, they could still access their CCTV and generate traffic.
  • It is now possible to disable backups in the configurations of individual routers.

 

Settings

  • In Settings Syst. settings Scheduling, you can set the subjects of emails used for sending daily technicians' plans and unfulfilled tasks.

 

Statistics

  • There is a new column Total (January - June) in the table on the Statistics Client stat. By connection page.

 

Invoicing

  • In Invoicing Overviews Payments, it is now possible to select more than one payment type at a time.
  • The Invoicing Cash book Cash book page has been rewritten.
  • The Invoicing Cash book Summary page has been rewritten.

 

Other

  • The Other Map page has been rewritten and enhanced. If you are experiencing any problems with the display of data on the map, please check whether you have entered the public IP address of the ISPadmin server in the ispadmin_public_address item in Settings Syst. settings General.
  • The Tariff change tool in Other Tools has been rewritten.

 

NetFlow

  • The NetFlow Select page has been rewritten.
  • The NetFlow Export page has been rewritten.

 

ISPadmin 4.28 beta2

  • We suggest that you update ISPadmin to this version. In some cases, the behavior of the application during the bulk generation of invoices could become unintuitive. If you use stable versions of the system only, we suggest that you update again.

 

ISPadmin 4.28 beta1

Clients

  • The $CLI_USER_GOODS$ variable has been replaced with a new one: $CLI_GOODS[column][number]$ . This variable can be used in contract templates, which can be added to the system in SettingsContracts My templates. More information can be found here: https://wiki.ispadmin.eu/en/415-eng/client-management/menu-clients/client-card/contracts/548-contracts
  • Bug fix: When a service was automatically deleted at the end of the notice period, no information was given on the name of the administrator that had entered the cancellation into the system.
  • The Inclusion of overpayment page in Client card / Invoicing has been rewritten.

 

Settings

  • The Settings Syst. settings Backups page has been rewritten.
  • The SettingsAdministrators Administrators / Allowed IP addresses has been rewritten.

 

Statistics

  • Statistics IP addresses: When an Internet/VoIP service is transferred, a record is made of this action.
  • There is a new tab Services in Statistics Client stat.. You can find there all clients' services and their details (service name, connected from, suspended, PPPoE name, price, invoice group, client number, VAT ID, client name). You need to set the corresponding rights for this tab on the administrator configuration page.
  • The Statistics Data page has been rewritten.
  • The Statistics IP phones page has been rewritten.
  • The Statistics Syslog page has been rewritten.
  • The Statistics Client stat. By Tariff page has been rewritten.

 

Invoicing

  • IE localization: Generation of SEPA files for AIB

 

Other

  • The  Other Tools / Mikrotik script page has been rewritten.

 

 

ISPadmin 4.27 Stable

 

  • Email header optimization: Emails sent from ISPadmin now have a higher deliverability rate.
  • Modifications improving system behavior and stability

 

ISPadmin 4.27 beta2

Hardware

  • Hardware Routers: Modifications have been made to the way switches and devices connected to routers are deleted. In some cases (if there were other devices dependent on the device to be deleted), a problem could arise that would lead to the deletion of all Nagios dependencies. The Status Map was affected as a result. This version fixes the problem. We recommend that you update your ISPadmin. If you use only stable versions, please update to the latest stable version (4.26 Stable).

 

 

ISPadmin 4.27 beta1

Clients

  • Radius NAS IP lock - If the Lock Client checkbox in the Internet (Radius) service configuration is checked, the system goes through all the routed networks and assigns ("locks") a given client to the router where a match with their IP address has been found. If a match has been found on two routers, the client is assigned to the one that is (according to the configuration) closer to them (if shaping has been set up on it). If the situation is not clear-cut, the original algorithm is used (the client is "locked" only after their first log-in from any concentrator). For all this to work correctly, the client's IP address must be entered into the system. Already "locked" clients are not affected in any way.

 

Hardware

  • Redundant router - If you are in the process of adding/editing a router, you can now choose a new option Mikrotik - redundant in the Router type drop-down menu and then select a particular Master router. The rules applied to the redundant router will be the same as those applied to the selected Master router. Thus, there will always be a backup router with up-to-date configuration that can be used when it is necessary.

 

Statistics

  • Statistics History Settings - Bug fix: Items in some categories were not deleted according to the settings (the set number of days).

 

Invoicing

  • A new check has been implemented: If invoices are being generated or saved in more than one invoice group at a time, a warning message is displayed.

 

 

 

ISPadmin 4.23 Stable

 

All changes from previous beta versions have been implemented.

 

ISPadmin 4.26 Stable

 

All modifications from previous beta versions have been implemented.

 

ISPadmin 4.26 beta6

Hardware

  • Modifications have been made to the way router backups work. Monthly backups are now created as well. The number of backups setting remains the same, but the backup procedure differs. If 10 router backups are to be made, 5 daily and 5 monthly backups will be created. That is, half the backups will be daily backups and the other will be monthly backups. If the value entered is an odd number, the number of daily backups will be greater than the number of monthly backups. The total disk space occupied will remain the same. 

 

Statistics

  • Modifications have been made to the SMS queue (Statistics Servers stats SMS). You can now see here even SMS messages that have not been sent because of some sort of SMS gateway error (formerly: Other Tools > SMS Errors). You can send them again or delete them.

 

Invoicing

  • There is a new item SEPA_custom_mandate_identification in Invoicing Settings General. It allows you to enable/disable the SEPA ID field on a client's configuration page. If you enter a certain value into the field, it will be used in the process of SEPA SDD XML generation.
  • HU localization: Postal check OC31 - Line breaks are now supported. There are no longer any decimal places in the total amount.

 

 

ISPadmin 4.26 beta5

Clients

  • Client card / Invoicing / Payments: The list of received payments now includes a new column Accepted. This column displays the name of the administrator that received a given payment (through Invoicing Payments Payments).
  • A bug has been fixed in the check mechanism on the Add new contact / Edit contact information page. In the case of company clients, it was not possible to enter other than numerical values into the Company ID field.
  • A bug in credit note cancellation has been fixed: The credit note amount was not added to a client's credit.
  • In the IPTV service configuration, it is now possible to enter a contract number.
  • In the cable internet service configuration (CMTS), it is now possible to not enter a client's IP address. A dynamic IP address is used instead. The address is taken from the range defined on a given router in the Routed Network section (the Dynamic range of DHCP fields). Such a service can be saved to the system only if the Use DHCP box in the router configuration is checked.
  • Client card / Active services / Internet: Services can be ordered by name or ID. This may come in handy, for example, when one of the services is primary and the rest are secondary.

 

Hardware

  • Hardware Routers: The current frequency, not the set frequency, is displayed for MikroTik routers with DFS activated.
  • An extra contact bug in the router configuration has been fixed. This bug could cause problems with the sending of Nagios notifications.
  • Router backup notifications have been implemented. If a problem occurs during the backup process, an email will be sent to the administrator.

 

Invoicing

  • REVERSE CHARGE - MODIFICATIONS:
    • This feature is now available in all localizations. You can disable/enable it with the help of the reverse_charge item in Invoicing Settings General.
    • The Reverse charge type code field is also globally available. You can disable it with the help of the reverse_charge_code item in Invoicing Settings General
  • There is a new item invoice_vat_table in Invoicing Settings General. This option allows you to enable/disable the display of the VAT breakdown table on invoices. Default setting: disabled.
  • Invoicing Overpayments Overpayments: Export files now contain a new column Invoice group. In addition, the automatic generation of CSV files has been implemented. This option must be enabled in the export_monthly_statistics item in Invoicing Settings General.
  • There is a new tab Statistics in Invoicing Bank. On this page, CSV files are automatically generated on the last day of a month. This option must be enabled in the export_monthly_statistics item in Invoicing Settings General.

 

ISPadmin 4.26 beta4

Invoicing

  • A bug in the component that generates PDF invoices has been fixed.

 

ISPadmin 4.26 beta3

INVOICING

  • A bug in sending bulk invoices has been fixed.
  • A VAT tab on invoices has been modified.

NETWORK MANAGEMENT

  • Data reading from MikroTik devices has been fixed.

ISPadmin 4.26 beta2

CLIENT MANAGEMENT

  • In Clients Contacts, you can now display/print the following columns: Company ID and VAT ID - iconopen.
  • You can now send Cash Payment Receipts individually by clicking on icon email2.

INVOICING

  • A new column - Variable symbol - has been added to the list of Credit notes in Invoicing Overviews Invoicing By period.
  • Now it is possible to cancel proforma invoices even if a given invoicing month is locked.
  • VAT invoices now include a table with a VAT breakdown by rate.

SCHEDULING

  • A new button Delete has been added to a task-editing screen in Scheduling.

OTHER

  • A new fuction has been added to the Change router tool in Other Tools. This function enables you to select routed networks thus moving some clients/devices only.
    alert icon Proceed with care while using this new function - it is still being tested.
  • A bug in sending SMS texts containing unallowed characters via SMPP procotol has been fixed.
  • Reading frequencies from MikroTik wireless cards has been fixed.
  • A new column IP from DNS has been added in Settings Info page Allowed pages. This column is automatically generated based on the domain name entered. This will help in cases when entered IP address ceased to be valid. Both IP addresses will be written to a router in case of any difference. The address is updated once a day.

ISPadmin 4.26 beta1

CLIENTS

  • Clients Internet: The page loading time has been reduced.
  • There is a new category Except VAT on cash receipts. It is used, for example, for invoice settlements.
  • Date field is now updated when a note is modified in Client card.
  • You can now check the Delete service automatically when cancellation date is over option while adding a new client´s cancellation. This way the affected service will be automatically removed on Contract ends on date. In addition, an email will be sent to the client. You can define the email in Settings Other E-mail templates, Cancellations column.

HARDWARE

  • The following pages have been rewritten: Hardware Routers Router status BW test and Hardware Routers Router status Wifi scan.
  • You may now filter routers by POPs in Hardware Routers All.

SETTINGS

  • The following pages have been rewritten Settings:
    Switches
    Syst.settings CATV SIP template
    Syst.settings CATV Modem template
    Syst.settings VPN server
    Active services DVBC Programs
    Active services DVBC Packages
    Active services DVBC Packets
    Other VOIP asterisk
    Code lists SchedulingHolidays
  • The setting sms_minute_limitation now applies to SMS reminders too.

STATISTICS

  • Statistics Client stat. By connection: Revenue data for usage (private clients) are available for all types of Internet services.
  • Statistics IP addresses has been rewritten.

INVOICING

  • In Invoicing Overviews Payments, it is now possible to export data to an XML file.

OTHER

  • The following pages have been rewritten in Other:
    Free SMS
    ToolsMAC address duplicities
    ToolsMAC address duplicities in Access List
    ToolsClient graphs
    ImportVoIP overviews
  • Other Bulk E-mail: You can choose the Enter custom email option in the Sender menu and then enter an email address and a name. This option can come in handy if you do not want to use one of the system email addresses as sender address.
  • Scheduling Calendar - : Show unspecified tasks checkbox has been added.
  • Ramdisk functionality has been modified. In addition to daily backups, the system now stores 2 most recent monthly backups (as of 28th of each month) as well. We strongly recommend that you run /usr/local/script/ispadmin/rrd_ramdisk.pl stop each time you restart/switch off the system. This way you ensure that the current ramdisk backup is stored and ramdisk is correctly stopped. When the system is restarted, ramdisk will be restored automatically from the last correct backup.
  • Depiction of graphs of shared tariffs has been fixed.
  • Number of records triggering the delete warning has been optimized in Statistics History.
  • A new Overview of displayed info page tool has been created in Other Tools. It shows if an info page was displayed to a client and if this client it, or not.
  • A bug in sending emails to gTLD domains with more than 4 chars has been fixed.

ISPadmin 4.25 Stable

 

  • A bug in shaping has been fixed. We strongly recommend that you carry out an update!

  • A modification in the rule-ordering method in the firewall has been made.

 

ISPadmin 4.24 Stable

 

All modifications from previous beta versions have been implemented.

 

ISPadmin 4.24 beta6

This version contains improvements/modifications that are relevant only to Czech providers.

 

ISPadmin 4.24 beta5

Clients

  • In Clients Internet, it is now possible to filter clients with a suspended service based on the reason for the suspension of the service.
  • A new column has been added to the table in the Clients Internet tab: Monthly price incl. VAT. Whether the column is displayed or not depends on the configuration of this page.
  • Clients' SMS messages are now identified as belonging to a particular client even based on the contact persons entered in the Client card.

Invoicing

  • The system now checks whether the VS (variable symbol) entered during the bulk generation of invoices is in the correct format. The system will allow you to enter only numerical values into the given field.

Scheduling

  • Technicians' daily plans now contain the GPS coordinates of relevant clients.

Other

  • The Bulk e-mail form (Other Bulk E-mail) now includes a filter for contracts that are about to expire, which will make it much easier for you to send notifications to clients informing them that their contract is about to expire.
  • The Other Contact page has been rewritten.

 

ISPadmin 4.24 beta4

Several reported bugs have been fixed.

 

 

ISPadmin 4.24 beta3

General

A new script management system has been implemented. All basic system functions are covered (router updates, data retrieval, graph updates, email sending, email parsing, etc.). For each process, the time of the last start and the average running time are recorded. If the allowed running time of a script has been exceeded, the script will not be allowed to run until this setting is reset. That happens every hour on the hour. At the same time, an email notification is sent to the administrator as well as to the ISPadmin technical support department (debug @ ispadmin.eu). We will use these emails for analysis of individual processes and their subsequent optimization. You can deactivate the sending of such notifications with the help of the ps_manager_send_info item in Settings Syst. settings General.

 

This system is supposed to prevent the server from becoming overloaded and to prevent system resources from being exhausted. Potential issues with system performance are thus avoided. It is important for you to react somehow to these notifications. You should check the perfomance of your system and possibly contact the ISPadmin technical support department.

 

We would like to assure you that the above-mentioned email notifications do not contain any personal or other sensitive data. They are used solely for the purposes of system development and optimization as well as for the purposes of ISPadmin technical support provision (in cases where issues with individual processes are dealt with).

 

You can check the current status of individual scripts by running the script /usr/local/script/ispadmin/cronProcessManager.pl debug from the system console. In the list that appears on the screen, scripts that have been temporarily suspended are marked in red. In the Running time column, the average running time of each script is displayed. In the Cycle column, the allowed running time of each script is displayed. Scripts marked in green are running processes.

 

Clients

  • You can now add a note to an IPTV service.

  • HU localization: Wrong prices for Internet services were displayed in the Client card, in Clients Internet and in the tariff settings when a special VAT rate for Internet services was used. The bug is fixed now.

  • The form used for adding a new General service to the system has been fixed. Before the fix, it was not possible to enter a price in the form of a decimal number.

  • When a credit note is issued, the system, by default, confirms it immediately (the Confirm credit note now checkbox). The note is thus immediately included in the various accounting overviews in the system.

 

Hardware

  • In Hardware Routers, descriptions of individual interfaces are available for graphs of a particular router.

  • Ramdisk and scripts used for data retrieval and graph creation have been optimized.

  • The Hardware Routers Radius Account stat. page has been rewritten.

 

Settings

  • A new filter Tariff has been added to the Settings Contracts Bulk tab. With its help, you can generate bulk contracts for a particular tariff.

  • The auto_logout function has been fixed. The system did not display the set value (in minutes), but only information about whether the given function was active or inactive.

  • The Settings Administrators Admin. groups tab has been reenabled. You can now select a particular group in the configuration of rights of individual administrators.

  • In Settings IP pools IP Pools NAT, you can now add a note to reserved IP addresses.

  • There is a new variable mac_logger in Settings Syst. settings General. With its help, you can activate/deactivate MAC address logging. Default state: inactive. In this case, the number of database accesses is dramatically reduced. 

 

Statistics

  • CSS bugs in Statistics History Settings have been fixed.

 

Invoicing

  • Invoicing Cash book: In the payment details, you can find the name of the relevant client for each entry.

  • The watermark used on proforma invoices has been modified. It is now valid according to the PDF specification.

 

Other

  • The Other Wiki page has been rewritten.

 

 

ISPadmin 4.24 beta2

  • Several bugs have been fixed.
  • We have made changes in the translation of certain terms. Here is an overview:
    • user, customer --> client
    • billing --> invoicing
    • claim --> debt
    • pair, join --> match (Payment matching)
    • settlement --> payment
    • universal --> general (General service)
    • collective, multiple, mass --> bulk (e.g. Bulk action)
    • summary --> overview
    • continuous --> pending (Pending item)
    • withdrawal --> cancellation (Contract cancellation)
    • codebook --> code list

 

ISPadmin 4.24 beta1

Clients

  • In Clients Requests, you can now add as many notes to each request as you want. It is also possible to send an email directly to the person that made the request in question. These emails are then saved to the history of the given request.
  • Authorized requests from clients now contain a link to the relevant Client card.

 

Hardware

  • There is a new subtab in the Hardware tab - Settings. In the future, it will aggregate all the global settings related to hardware matters. At this point, three tabs can be found here: Device type, End devices and Antennas.

 

Settings

  • There are new items in Settings Syst. settings - request_create_the_task and request_hour_for_task. The first item mentioned allows you to activate the automatic creation of a new task in Scheduling on the basis of the data that a client entered through the request form on the web. Such a task is then assigned to those administrators that have the Manage request in Scheduling option activated. The task is scheduled for the following day. The time is set according to the request_hour_for_task item. 
  • Bulk SMS messages - sms_minute_limitation: If you want to use this function, bear in mind the following: The configuration part is the same as before, but the function itself works differently. You can enter the maximum number of SMS messages that may be sent within a minute in the system settings. In practice, however, the system monitors the number of SMS messages sent within a second. The number of SMS messages sent within any second can never exceed 1/60 of the set limit value. This function is especially important in the case of the SMPP protocol.
  • It is now possible to disable the UBNT vulnerability alert with the help of the show_ubnt_warning item in Settings Syst. settings General.
  • In Settings Contracts Bulk, generated contracts are zipped into one ZIP file that you can download.
  • In Settings Active services General, it is possible to set a different VAT rate for the Internet service. This setting is particularly relevant to Hungarian providers.

 

Statistics

  • If the History database is too large, you will be notified of the fact immediately after login. In Statistics History Settings, the system will highlight those records that are over the limit and you will be able to change the length of data retention setting.

 

Scheduling

  • A new column - Estimated time - has been added to the Scheduling Unscheduled tab. You can specify how long individual unscheduled tasks are supposed to take.

 

Invoicing

  • Bulk generation of invoices: If you are about to issue invoices for the previous year/for the next year, the system will inform you of the fact and ask you whether the numerical series used is correct. The system also checks whether the issue date is separated from the invoiced month by more than a month.

 

Other

  • There is a new item in Other Tools - Check e-mail addresses. When you click on the Continue button, a list of clients with wrong e-mail addresses will be displayed.
  • There is a new item in Other Tools - Bulk configuration of NAGIOS notifications (for selected device types).
  • There is a new option in Other Tools - Suspend your Client portal. When you click on the Continue button, you can enter a message that will be displayed to your clients.

 

 

 

ISPadmin 4.23 Stable

It is now possible to create text backups of Ubiquiti AirFiber devices.

 

ISPadmin 4.23 beta2

NEWS

  • In the tab Hardware Routers, the filter Locality is now the first filter on offer. The filter Router is second. When you choose a particular location from Locality, the menu Router contains only those routers that are in a given location.
  • It is possible to set the maximum number of SMS messages that can be sent in a minute. You can do that with the help of the key sms_minute_limitation in the tab Settings Syst. settings General. By default, the value set is 0. That means that the function is not active. If you enter any other number, the function will be activated. The value entered = the maximum number of SMS messages that can be sent in a minute.      
  • Serbian localization for the Client portal
  • In the tab Hardware Routers Router status WiFi clients, new columns have been added to the table: Hardware type (client's device) and Firmware version (client's device).
  • Internet service: A new variable has been added to the system - DISCOUNT_NAME. It is to be replaced by the name of the discount entered in a given Internet service.
  • In the tab Hardware Routers, it is now possible to fulltext search even among network interfaces. You can activate this option in the configuration window that appears after you click on the icon in the upper-left corner of the page.
  • Performance optimization: ISPadmin took longer than normal to load when the provider's server was offline and could not download data from the Sentinel server. Now the situation is back to normal. It takes only a few seconds for ISPadmin to load.
  • In the overview of invoices to be generated during the bulk generation, proforma invoices are now highlighted with the correct colors.
  • In the tab Other Map, you can filter by individual APs that are on a particular router. You have to pick one of the routers from the menu and the system will then offer you only those APs that are on a given router.
  • Claims statistics (the tab Invoicing Overviews Claims Statistic): The former category 31 - 90 days was split into two: 31 - 60 days and 61 - 90 days. 
  • In the tab Invoicing Cashbox Unsent, the system now records also cash refunds to clients (e.g. refunds from Client card / Invoicing / Return overpayment).
  • In the tab Clients General, it is now possible to set which columns are to be displayed in the table and which are to be printed. You can also set whether the table is to be printed in portrait or landscape mode. You can print the table to PDF by clicking on the Print button.
  • In the tab Statistics Unlinked CATV, it is now possible to print the current overview to PDF.
  • The tab Clients Internet: The first icon in the last column serves as a link to the statistics page of a given service. When you hover over it, a relevent graph (graphs) will appear.
  • In Invoicing Settings Code lists VAT rates, you can now enter values with decimal places.
  • For Internet tariffs (Settings Tariffs Internet), you can have the system display graphs of so-called shared lines. These are basically graphs of the usage of given tariffs. Graphs for all tariffs can be displayed at once by clicking on Show all graphs. A graph for a particular tariff can be displayed by clicking on the graph icon in the corresponding row. If nothing appears, there is no graph for this tariff yet. 

 

REWRITTEN PAGES

  • Hardware Routers Router status WIFI status
  • Statistics Unlinked CATV
  • Add a VoIP active service

 

DATA EXPORT FROM ISPADMIN

  • The tab Other Export has been removed.
  • Data can now be exported from the system on corresponding pages. For example, client data can be exported from the tab Clients Contacts. These exports must be allowed in the configuration of individual administrators.

 

INFO PAGES AND INFO MESSAGES

  • Suspended clients are now redirected to the relevant info page even when they use the HTTPS communication protocol.
  • Info messages that appear when there is a delay in payment now work even when the HTTPS communication protocol is used.

 

VIES VAT NUMBER VALIDATION

  • This type of validation can be used in all EU localizations with the exception of CZ. In the CZ localization, the ARES service is used.
  • The system now automatically verifies saved VAT numbers with the help of the VIES system. Clients with incorrect VAT numbers can be viewed in Other Tools / VIES.
  • When you are adding/editing a client, you can click on the VIES button next to the VAT number field and have the system check whether the VAT number entered is a valid one.


RADIUS - Dynamic IP addresses

  • The dynamic assignment of IP addresses by the Radius service
  • ISPadmin now supports the dynamic assignment of IP addresses from the user-defined pool (Settings IP pools Radius).
  • A dynamic pool can be added to the system in Settings IP pools Radius: Click on the button , fill in the form and select Dynamic in the item Type.
  • In the configuration of the active service Internet (Radius), choose one of the dynamic ranges offered in the item Client IP address.
  • A random unused IP address from the selected dynamic pool will be assigned to a given client. The IP address will then change every time the client tries to access the internet.
  • This one pool can be used for all routers in the system.

 

LICA MODEMS

  • Arris modems are supported now: Allowed IP addresses of clients and devices are added to the configuration file of a modem using a new variable USER_ARRIS_IPS
  • The IP addresses listed will be able to access the internet. All other traffic will be disallowed. An object called docsDevFilterIp is used.

ISPadmin 4.23 beta1

IPTV

  • You can now separate IPTV services from each other - SledovaniTV and 4network.
  • To do it, change ID´s iptv_username_sledovanitv, iptv_password_sledovanitv (for Sledovani.TV) and iptv_username_4networktv, iptv_password_4networktv (for 4network) in Settings Syst. settings General.
  • When adding a new IPTV service in Client card select the respective IPTV Type.
  • IPTV type is also displayed when checking pricelist and syncing clients.
  • For complete information click here.

 


Routers

  • When adding a new router IP address entered is being checked against the database immediately. If already in use in the system a warning message will be displayed with router name which is used with the IP address. You will be able to save the form anyway.

 

ISPadmin 4.23 Stable

 

All changes from previous beta versions have been implemented.

 

ISPadmin 4.23 beta2

NEWS

  • In the tab Hardware Routers, the filter Locality is now the first filter on offer. The filter Router is second. When you choose a particular location from Locality, the menu Router contains only those routers that are in a given location.
  • It is possible to set the maximum number of SMS messages that can be sent in a minute. You can do that with the help of the key sms_minute_limitation in the tab Settings Syst. settings General. By default, the value set is 0. That means that the function is not active. If you enter any other number, the function will be activated. The value entered = the maximum number of SMS messages that can be sent in a minute.      
  • Serbian localization for the Client portal
  • In the tab Hardware Routers Router status WiFi clients, new columns have been added to the table: Hardware type (client's device) and Firmware version (client's device).
  • Internet service: A new variable has been added to the system - DISCOUNT_NAME. It is to be replaced by the name of the discount entered in a given Internet service.
  • In the tab Hardware Routers, it is now possible to fulltext search even among network interfaces. You can activate this option in the configuration window that appears after you click on the icon in the upper-left corner of the page.
  • Performance optimization: ISPadmin took longer than normal to load when the provider's server was offline and could not download data from the Sentinel server. Now the situation is back to normal. It takes only a few seconds for ISPadmin to load.
  • In the overview of invoices to be generated during the bulk generation, proforma invoices are now highlighted with the correct colors.
  • In the tab Other Map, you can filter by individual APs that are on a particular router. You have to pick one of the routers from the menu and the system will then offer you only those APs that are on a given router.
  • Claims statistics (the tab Invoicing Overviews Claims Statistic): The former category 31 - 90 days was split into two: 31 - 60 days and 61 - 90 days. 
  • In the tab Invoicing Cashbox Unsent, the system now records also cash refunds to clients (e.g. refunds from Client card / Invoicing / Return overpayment).
  • In the tab Clients General, it is now possible to set which columns are to be displayed in the table and which are to be printed. You can also set whether the table is to be printed in portrait or landscape mode. You can print the table to PDF by clicking on the Print button.
  • In the tab Statistics Unlinked CATV, it is now possible to print the current overview to PDF.
  • The tab Clients Internet: The first icon in the last column serves as a link to the statistics page of a given service. When you hover over it, a relevent graph (graphs) will appear.
  • In Invoicing Settings Code lists VAT rates, you can now enter values with decimal places.
  • For Internet tariffs (Settings Tariffs Internet), you can have the system display graphs of so-called shared lines. These are basically graphs of the usage of given tariffs. Graphs for all tariffs can be displayed at once by clicking on Show all graphs. A graph for a particular tariff can be displayed by clicking on the graph icon in the corresponding row. If nothing appears, there is no graph for this tariff yet. 

 

REWRITTEN PAGES

  • Hardware Routers Router status WIFI status
  • Statistics Unlinked CATV
  • Add a VoIP active service

 

DATA EXPORT FROM ISPADMIN

  • The tab Other Export has been removed.
  • Data can now be exported from the system on corresponding pages. For example, client data can be exported from the tab Clients Contacts. These exports must be allowed in the configuration of individual administrators.

 

INFO PAGES AND INFO MESSAGES

  • Suspended clients are now redirected to the relevant info page even when they use the HTTPS communication protocol.
  • Info messages that appear when there is a delay in payment now work even when the HTTPS communication protocol is used.

 

VIES VAT NUMBER VALIDATION

  • This type of validation can be used in all EU localizations with the exception of CZ. In the CZ localization, the ARES service is used.
  • The system now automatically verifies saved VAT numbers with the help of the VIES system. Clients with incorrect VAT numbers can be viewed in Other Tools / VIES.
  • When you are adding/editing a client, you can click on the VIES button next to the VAT number field and have the system check whether the VAT number entered is a valid one.


RADIUS - Dynamic IP addresses

  • The dynamic assignment of IP addresses by the Radius service
  • ISPadmin now supports the dynamic assignment of IP addresses from the user-defined pool (Settings IP pools Radius).
  • A dynamic pool can be added to the system in Settings IP pools Radius: Click on the button , fill in the form and select Dynamic in the item Type.
  • In the configuration of the active service Internet (Radius), choose one of the dynamic ranges offered in the item Client IP address.
  • A random unused IP address from the selected dynamic pool will be assigned to a given client. The IP address will then change every time the client tries to access the internet.
  • This one pool can be used for all routers in the system.

 

LICA MODEMS

  • Arris modems are supported now: Allowed IP addresses of clients and devices are added to the configuration file of a modem using a new variable USER_ARRIS_IPS
  • The IP addresses listed will be able to access the internet. All other traffic will be disallowed. An object called docsDevFilterIp is used.

ISPadmin 4.23 beta1

IPTV

  • You can now separate IPTV services from each other - SledovaniTV and 4network.
  • To do it, change ID´s iptv_username_sledovanitv, iptv_password_sledovanitv (for Sledovani.TV) and iptv_username_4networktv, iptv_password_4networktv (for 4network) in Settings Syst. settings General.
  • When adding a new IPTV service in Client card select the respective IPTV Type.
  • IPTV type is also displayed when checking pricelist and syncing clients.
  • For complete information click here.

 


Routers

  • When adding a new router IP address entered is being checked against the database immediately. If already in use in the system a warning message will be displayed with router name which is used with the IP address. You will be able to save the form anyway.

 

 

ISPadmin 4.22 Stable

A new script has been added that enables you to generate SSL certificates from the certification authority Let's Encrypt. The script generates certificates for the administration interface and the Client portal at the same time. Consequently, it is necessary to have at your disposal two domain names with the correct IP address of the ISPadmin server. Also, it is necessary to enable ports 80 and 443. You can launch the script using the following command: /usr/local/script/ispadmin/certificate.pl (no parameters). More information can be found here: http://wiki.ispadmin.eu/en/503-eng/faq/general/1654-https-certificates

 

ISPadmin 4.22 beta2

NEWS

  • You may now limit fulltext search in Clients. The limit regards a minimum number of characters to be entered by an administrator for a search to work. Define the limit for each administrator in Settings Administrators Administrators, parameter Limited clients´ search.
  • You may now set Returned Contract flag to clients in Other Bulk Action.
  • You can define a default GPS position to be displayed while editing a client, router, etc. To define it, go to Settings Syst. settings General, ID google_maps_default_gps.

 

REWRITTEN PAGES

  • Hardware Routers All > Add > Add net interface
  • Hardware Routers All > Settings > Virtual line
  • Hardware Routers All > Extra > Planned antennas on the router

SCHEDULING

  • New rights were created in Settings Administrators Administrators in Scheduling section:
    • Allow task completion
    • Allow task opening: Opening of closed tasks
  • You may now re-schedule tasks with unspecified time in Other Tools Scheduling.

 

ISPadmin 4.22 beta1

 

NEWS

  • You can now use fulltext to search Contact persons in Clients Contacts. The setup is available via iconopen on this page.
  • A Connect. points filter has been added to Clients Internet. You can use it to filter services. The filter is displayed when a router is selected.
  • You can now Show HTML of emails in the email queue in Statistics Server stats E-mails Queue.
  • Printing a list of clients into PDF (Clients Contacts) has been modified to include those clients and columns which are currently displayed. You can modify the column setup by iconopen - Columns for print. You can turn on/off this button for any administrator in their setup.

 

REWRITTEN PAGES

  • Other Tools
  • Other Backups Routers
  • Other Bulk Action
  • Scheduling Calendar > Print to PDF / Sending PDF to email

 


 

Generation of Contracts

  • The process of bulk creation of contracts has been implemented into the system replacing the old “Bulk contracts” from Other Bulk Document. This has been discontinued.
  • You may generate bulk contracts in Settings Contracts Bulk.
  • It is just like an individual contract, except there are filters to select certain clients who you are creating the contracts for. You can also select a type of active service thus creating the number of contracts according the the number of services.
  • You can also use system variables, and an automatic transfer to PDF.
  • You will see who and when generated bulk contracts, and how many contracts were generated. You can use the number to click on it and display a list of contracts.
  • By deleting a contract, you will remove the contract from client´s account.
  • Bulk contract is marked as Bulk contract icon check ok in Client card.

 


Request form

  • You can now set the system to send an information e-mail upon creation of a request.
  • The settings needed:
    • Settings Syst. settings General, ID send_email_after_new_client_request = 1
    • a due record in Settings Syst. settings General, ID system_mail and system_mail_name
  • You can define the email layout in Settings Other E-mail templates. To activate the template, click on icon check ko in New request column.

 

 

 

All changes from previous beta versions have been implemented.

 

ISPadmin 4.21 beta2

UBIQUITI BUG - MODIFICATION

Modified script

When running
/usr/local/script/ispadmin/ubnt_vulnerability_test.pl
with check, checkdevices, checkusers, or cleaninfected parameter, a dialog will be displayed, and you will be able to specify the following parameters:

IP addresses (all) ? : You may insert a list of IP addresses to be scanned by typing them. If you leave it blank, the script will use IP addresses from the database.
SSH PORT (22) ? : Default port for ssh is 22. If your ssh is somewhere else, enter ssh port number here.
SSH usernames for connect ( ubnt, admin, mother) ? : Usernames used for accessing the units. If blank, the script will try to use ubnt, admin, mother.
DEBUG (yes) ? : If you select yes, the progress of the test will be displayed in the console.

 

Help


Check  devices from ISP admin bookmark ROUTERS
/usr/local/script/ispadmin/ubnt_vulnerability_test.pl check             - show ONLY vulnerable and infected ROUTERS ( AP )

Check devices like AP ....( may take a long time )
/usr/local/script/ispadmin/ubnt_vulnerability_test.pl checkdevices      - show ONLY vulnerable and infected devices ( Acces points )

Check  END USER devices ....( may take along time )
/usr/local/script/ispadmin/ubnt_vulnerability_test.pl checkusers        - show ONLY vulnerable and infected client end device

Clean INFECTED devices ( from previous check )
/usr/local/script/ispadmin/ubnt_vulnerability_test.pl cleaninfected     - show vulnerable and infected devices and  REMOVE infection

 

More on Ubiquiti - security bug in changelog version 4.21, beta1.

 

 

ISPadmin 4.21 beta1

UBIQUITI BUG

Detecting and removing

router ubnt
Reacting to the revealed vulnerability, we released ISPadmin, version 4.20, which included a utility for detecting and curing infected Ubiquiti units. Due to the emergency situation we released the very first version of the utility quickly.

Now we are presenting the utility with enhanced functionalities.

alert icon Run the utility from ISPadmin console (connected via SSH) under root user, ISPadmin does not detect anything automatically!

/usr/local/script/ispadmin/ubnt_vulnerability_test.pl

 

When running the utility without any parameter, help is displayed.

terminal help

 

Check devices from ISP admin bookmark ROUTERS
/usr/local/script/ispadmin/ubnt_vulnerability_test.pl check <username> <username2> <username3> <username4> <username5> - show ONLY vulnerable and infected ROUTERS ( AP )


Tests all Ubiquiti units inserted in Hardware Routers. If you run this command, the system tries to attack the unit, and if it succeeds, the console displays information with IP address and firmware version. If the system succeeds in connecting to Ubiquiti unit, it tries to determine whether there is the virus or not. If yes, it displays such information in the console. Nothing else. When 10 units are tested, a dot appears on the screen to show you that the script is still running and testing other units.


Check devices like AP ....( may take a long time )
/usr/local/script/ispadmin/ubnt_vulnerability_test.pl checkdevices <username> <username2> <username3> <username4> <username5>
  - show ONLY vulnerable and infected devices ( Acces points )


Tests all devices inserted as “Device attached to device” in Hardware Routers. In this case, the utility doesn´t care about device type since such information might not be available here. The utility tries to attack all IP addresses. If there are a lot of devices in your system, this might take a long time.

Check END USER devices ....( may take a long time )
/usr/local/script/ispadmin/ubnt_vulnerability_test.pl checkusers <username> <username2> <username3> <username4> <username5>
    - show ONLY vulnerable and infected client end device


Tests all IP addresses assigned to clients. The system tests all client-assigned IP addresses for it does not know whether a client has Ubiquiti device, or not. This operation might take a long time, since all IP addresses in the system are tested.

Clean INFECTED devices ( from previous check )
/usr/local/script/ispadmin/ubnt_vulnerability_test.pl cleaninfected
   - show vulnerable and infected devices and  REMOVE infection


If an infected unit is detected in the previous step, you may clean it this way. This operation connects to and cleans just those units, which are marked as infected. It means that prior to this step you have to run the utility with parameters check, checkdevices, or checkusers. Failing this no units are marked as infected and using parameter “cleaninfected” makes no difference.

 

terminal

A mandatory parameters are: check, checkdevices, checkusers, or cleaninfected. You may use user names, which you use for login to Ubiquiti units as an optional parameter. This is needed in cases when a key is stored in Ubiquiti unit after being attacked to enable login via ssh without password. You need to know the user name with which you connect to the system. If unknown, you won´t be able to connect. While running the vulnerability test, a default user name ubnt and user admin are tested. If you use neither of these, the script won´t be able to test vulnerability hence the need for entering a different username used for accessing the unit (no need for password). Then the system will try using these usernames.

 

Listing of UBNT units in ISPadmin

When you log into ISPadmin, you will see information about Vulnerability of UBNT devices:

ubnt upozorneni

 

In Other Tools > Vulnerability of UBNT devices, you will find a tool for displaying vulnerable devices as detected by the utility - see above.

ubnt seznam

 

alert icon Check the box at the end of each row (or check all, or you may use reversed selection) to select those devices, for which you want the system to update firmware - by clicking on on the bottom.


NEWS

  •  A new filter Client group has been added to Invoicing Overviews Payments. You can use it for payment type Paired only.
  • New system variables added:
            - $CLI_RAW_NAME$ - the variable is replaced with client´s name from “Personal data” section.
            - $CLI_NAME_INVOICING$ - the variable is replaced with client´s name from “Invoicing data” section.
  • Bookmarks Clients VoIP and Clients General have been amended with the following filters: “Invoice group”, “Client group”, “Client status”, and “Client payment type”.
  • In scheduling overview - Scheduling Overview, and Client card / Scheduled interventions - an icon for editing the intervention is now displayed. This way you can edit any saved solution, even for completed tasks. One has to have “Edit” right for a given bookmark.
  • Newly, you can turn off information about aggregation for Client portal. To do it, change ID ci_display_tariff_agregation in Settings Syst. settings Client portal.
  • You can now make a copy of a tariff in Settings Tariffs Internet. There is an icon for it - - at the end of each row.
  • When saving a client information, a new duplicity check on Company ID and personal ID is carried out. If a match is found, you´ll get information message. You will be able to save the record, anyway.
  • You can now use http://ISPadmindomain.cz/new/www/find-client-by-phone-number/?number=420999888777 to get Client card of a client with the number used in “number” parameter. ISPadmin administrator must be logged in.
  • You can now filter clients by Client groups if matched payments filter is used in Invoicing Overviews Payments.
  • Information on Ram Disk (initialization, error messages, disk space) are now displayed in Statistics Server statistics Graphs.
  • You can now define your own report type in Settings Code lists Scheduling Report type.

 

REWRITTEN PAGES

  • Other Tools
  • Settings Administrators Mikrotik Login Group / Users

 

WIthdrawals

  • New filters “Submission date”, “Invoice group” and “Locality” have been added to Statistics Client stat. Withdrawals, and to Client card / Withdrawals. Columns with address, creation user and date, and time to withdrawal have been added. You can also add any number of notes to each withdrawal. There is the icon for it at the end of each row - . There are columns Last note date and Notes in the tab, too.

ADMINISTRATOR RIGHTS

  • New rights to Settings have been implemented. Previously, the rights were set for MasterAdmin, and for Main admin in some cases. Currently, the rights are automatically set for MasterAdmin only, and you have to set up the rest manually.

 

ISPadmin 4.20

 

A serious security bug of UBIQUITI units was revealed on May 13, 2016!router ubnt

It is a fundamental security breach in the web interface for the administration of UBNT units where the attacker is able to get full access to UBNT unit with Administrator rights. The bug concerns firmware versions 5.6.3 and lower. The bug was rectified in firmware version 5.6.4.

Currently, the bug allows a “worm” to attack all available UBNT units causing its spreading to other network units which get infected at once!

To defend your UBNT units against these attacks, you have to upgrade the firmware to version 5.6.4. However, you have to remove the “worm” from the unit prior to updating its firmware, failing which the new firmware might get damaged causing the unit to automatically restore factory settings which means you would need to re-set it.
Note: As the rumour goes, some of the units automatically restore their factory settings after 18 hours following the attack.

As a result of this, ISPadmin offers you a quick solution of the problem thanks to its new utility which is able to detect infected UBNT units and cure them automatically. In the current version, you have to run the utility from the command line under root rights.

Command line:

         /usr/local/script/ispadmin/ubnt_vulnerability_test.pl check            - Displays all infected UBNT units only
        /usr/local/script/ispadmin/ubnt_vulnerability_test.pl clean           - Displays all infected UBNT units and cures them

When the utility is run, all UBNT units in the system will be tested, and if the infection is found, the system will display information on vulnerability of units and cure them (if parameter “clean” is used).

In the upcoming version of ISPadmin we will include an automatic detection of the infected units upon login to the system.

 

ISPadmin Development Team

All changes from previous beta versions have been implemented.

 

ISPadmin 4.19 beta2

NEWS

  • Form for adding a new task has been modified. The fields have been organized so that filling them would be more intuitive.
  • Internal ID field has been added to router edit. You can store there any number related to your internal records. You will be able to see the number in Hardware Routers Router Status Routers, column “Internal ID”.
  • A new system variable has been added - it is related to client: $AMOUNT_DUE$. It return current client´s debt. If there is no debt, or overpayment the variable return zero.
  • Now you can define a default task type for adding through Client card in Settings Code lists Scheduling Task types.
  • alert icon The process for checking number of remaining licenses has been altered. Instead of a check upon login, the system now checks while you add Internet service, and does not allow you to exceed your number of licenses. This will prevent situations where you were able to exceed your number of licenses, and when exiting the programme, you were blocked from using it.

 

ISPadmin 4.19 beta1

 

NEWS

  • In router overview - Hardware Routers All - you have now the option to hide, or display all Switches on the page in one click (Switches ). There are buttons for it on top of page numbering.
  • Variable and specific symbols are now displayed instead of Invoice number in $OUTSTANDING_INVOICES$ variable.
  • You can now set up your own template for sending a lost password into Client portal. Define the template in Settings Other Email templates, and save it as Forgotten password to CP.
  • Statistics Client stat. Withdrawals has been amended by the following filters: Invoice group, Location, Withdrawal date from - to. Also, Address, Created By, and Time to withdrawal columns have been added.
  • Clients Contacts tab has been optimized; the main impact on the speed of its loading have the following columns: Total sched.tasks, Services, and Balance. Turn unused columns off to speed up the loading.
  • While saving client data, a duplicity check is done on “Number of ID (passport)” and “Company ID”. If a duplicity is found, information message is displayed. Client data are saved.
  • In Dashboard, you can now set up a number of hours for displaying Nagios messages. E.g. using value “2”, you will have displayed messages not older than 2 hours.
  • Sending a bulk email - Other Bulk Email - has been adjusted. Prior to this change, attachments were saved directly to email body, and then to the database. In case of larger number of emails the database was overloaded. Currently, attachment is only saved once to a hard drive, and attached to email from the database during sending. This will decrease the database load and speed up sending of bulk email.
  • New system variables for IPTV have been added:
        - $IPTV_DELKA_SMLOUVY$ (EN: $IPTV_CONTRACT_LIFETIME$)
        - $IPTV_CENA_ZA_BALICKY_S_DPH$ (EN: $IPTV_PRICE_FOR_PACKAGES_WITH_VAT$)
        - $IPTV_CENA_ZA_BALICKY_BEZ_DPH$ (EN: $IPTV_PRICE_FOR_PACKAGES_WITHOUT_VAT$)
  • New client-related system variables have been created - $FAKTURACNI_EMAIL$, $TECHNICKY_EMAIL$ a $OBCHODNI_EMAIL$ (English equivalents: $CLI_INVOICING_EMAIL$, $CLI_TECHNICAL_EMAIL$, and $CLI_BUSINESS_EMAIL$). If one of the email fields is blank, it is substituted by the main client email.

 

REWRITTEN PAGES

  • Hardware CMTS Detail
  • Hardware Routers All > Add > Device
  • Hardware Routers All > Add > Headend
  • Settings Active services General
  • Settings Administrators Service MAC
  • Settings Tariffs Internet / CATV / DVBC / VoIP
  • Statistics Server Graphs / Processes / Services / E-mails

 

AUTOMATIC ALLOCATION OF ACCESS POINT TO INTERNET SERVICE

  • In global settings - Settings Syst.settings General, ID auto_assign_access_point, you can now turn on automatic allocation of access point to Internet service. The function detects an Internet service without access point, yet with allocated MAC address. The MAC address is searched for on all routers with defined access point and active registration for WiFi card. If a match is found, the system automatically assigns it to Internet service, and save the information to log.

 

NEW ADMINISTRATOR RIGHTS

  • Rights for tabs Statistics and Other have been modified.

 

XML export (HU localization only)

  • A new button HU Export XML has been added to Invoicing Overviews Invoicing By period. It enables to export invoices for Hungarian tax law purposes.

HISTORY

  • Tab Statistics Logger has been renamed to Statistics History.
  • You can now define an automatic deletion of the History, which is saved in ISPadmin. There is the set up for it in Statistics History Settings. There are sections listed here with information about current number of records in the history. You can define a number of days for keeping the history of the records. The records are automatically deleted every night. Click on Delete now to delete the records immediately.
  • For safety, this tab is off by default and you will have to enable it in Settings Administrators Administrators.
  • Logger - OLD tab continues to show an old type of events which will be transferred to History.

 


 

SCHEDULING

  • Button Delete task has been removed from task edit pane due to the new administrator rights. A new button Delete has been added to Scheduling Calendar when you hover over a task.
  • Emails with tasks from Scheduling now contains a direct link to a client. Click on client's name to follow the link. You have to have ID ispadmin_server correctly set up in Settings Syst. settings General.

All changes from previous beta versions have been implemented.

 

ISPadmin 4.18 beta3

ADDRESSES

  • The address format is now standardized for the CZ localization.

 

ISPadmin 4.18 beta2

NEWS

  • In Scheduling, the Delete button is no longer there when you edit a task. It has to do with the newly modified rights management in this tab. To delete a task, you have to go to SchedulingOverview, or to Client Card / Scheduled interventions.
  • In HardwareRouters, the list of Groups is no longer displayed in the tab section (menu). The reason for this is that the list can get quite long, which results in not all the tabs being displayed in the tab section (menu). To compensate for it, we have added a new Group filter to the tab.
  • In Client Card / Send e-mail, it is now possible to choose more that one e-mail address to send an e-mail to. All the e-mail addresses of a given client (including contact persons) are at your disposal.

 

REWRITTEN PAGES


RIGHTS MANAGEMENT

  • New rights management options have been added to the following tabs: Clients, Hardware and Monitoring.
  • In the above-mentioned tabs, the rights have been preset. You have to check whether the settings suit your needs or not. If not, change them. It is not possible to preset all the settings automatically.

 

ISPadmin 4.18 beta1

NEWS

  • Added new bookmark Statistics Client stat. Withdrawals. It is a list of all saved withdrawals with option to filter and sort.
  • You can now add GPS coordinates to access points by pointing in the map, and display them in Other Map.
  • You can now set invoice group filter in Settings Info Page Inf. messages.
  • New column CPU load. was added to Hardware Routers Router Status Routers.
  • While editing Internet service and searching router by SSID you will now see column with description of access point.
  • Info page profiles have been moved from Settings Info Page to Settings Info Page Profiles. This way we created room for more profiles and created 4 optional profiles.
  • You may now attach other client´s PDF contracts while sending a contract to client (Client card / Contracts).
  • You can allow Change of the password in Settings Administrators Administrators. It is a main menu item and it is allowed for logged administrator only. It is mostly used for administrators without right for Settings Administrators.

 

REWRITTEN PAGES

  • Settings Code lists Clients Service type
  • Clients Requests
  • Client card / Invoicing / Invoicing details / Update client's address

 

L2TP service

  • Added support for L2TP service
  • Insert L2TP service in adding/editing Internet service in Client card.
  • Insert login name and password for verification on the same page.

 

System variables

Newly added:

  • $VOIP_TARIF_CENA_S_DPH$ ($VOIP_TARIFF_PRICE_WITH_VAT$) - returns tariff price incl. VAT
  • $VOIP_TARIF_CENA_BEZ_DPH$ ($VOIP_TARIFF_PRICE_WITHOUT_VAT$) - returns tariff price excl. VAT

 RIGHTS FOR ISPADMIN

  • ISPadmin administrator rights have been being rewritten and implemented.
  • Their implementation is going to be done step by step and it will only include rewritten pages.
  • Currently, rights are completed for Client card and Scheduling.
  • You can set them up in administrator editing pane (Settings Administrators Administrators), in Rights for Client card and Rights for Main menu sections.
  • New rights relate to those pages stated in administrator edit, and are going to be added to other pages with adjusted rights.
  • alert icon  Within scope of this update rights will be pre-set for the above-mentioned pages and must be checked and completed!!! This cannot be done automatically.

INTERFACE FOR TECHNICIANS

  • New bookmarks: Clientsand Cash Box. Check Clients to display option to enable icon money accept Accept cash payment, and also option to insert a minimum number of characters for filtering clients using full-text.
  • If Accept cash payment is enabled, it would be possible to accept cash payment in this interface. Prerequisites: client has unpaid invoice.
  • In Cash Box bookmark, you can now see a list of cash payments accepted by technician.

 


INVOICING

  • In Invoicing Invoices Time Periods, items with deducted overpayment on invoice are newly not included into the statistics of time period. (This may only happen in case that overpayments are included into VAT).
  • Option to print a list of claims to PDF added to Invoicing Overviews Claims Claims.
  • In Invoicing Overviews Cash box, you can now use sorting by invoice group. Also a new list Payment Overview has been added showing information where selected cash payments were included.
  • You can now sort by all columns in the tab in Invoicing Overviews Payments.
  • In Invoicing Overpayments Overpayments, you can now select All years and All months.
  • New type of imported statements has been added. It is possible to use it for any bank using SEPA format and supporting payment export in camt.053.001.02 format.
  • In Invoicing Bank Import, you can now select new import type - SEPA - camt.053.001.02.

INVOICING - Settlement of more invoices

  • In Invoicing Bank, you can now settle more invoices at once during pairing (no need to add excess amount to overpayment). If settlement of more invoices with one payment is
    available, you will see Pay more invoices.. As the next step, you will be able to select invoice to be settled. Remaining payment amount goes to credit.

 

Generation of invoices (HU localization only)

  • Description of situation BEFORE 4.18 beta1
    • Issue date - fixed
    • Taxable date - option to modify it
    • Due date is automaticaly set to Taxable date
  • Description of situation AFTER 4.18 beta1
    • Issue date -fixed
    • Taxable date - option to modify it
    • Due date is generated automatically from system setings. System calculates due date from number of days set in Client card. If client doesn´t have this value set, then the system uses a number from Invoicing Settings General, ID splatnost_faktur

 

All changes from previous beta versions have been implemented.

ISPadmin 4.17 beta2

NEWS

  • Information on who and when disconnected a client is now available in Statistics Unlinked Clients. These columns are, as usually, set up based on administrator login.
  • In Hardware Routers All, you may now select Search network interface (using iconopen)
  • New field County added to Client card (IE localization).
  • New supported PowerBeam 5AC device (Ubiquiti).

ISPadmin 4.17 beta1

NEWS

  • While editing Switch, you can now add GPS coordinates, thus finding the correct location of the device.
  • In Hardware Routers, superior router for Nagios is displayed under its IP address. Click on it to open the device.
  • Column ID and Postcode have been added to Clients Contacts. ID is a system ID from the database. You may sort results by both.
  • In Hardware Routers, icon graph Graphs of selected routers button is now displayed. It displays all graphs on selected routers. Click on iconopen to select displayed types of graphs. Settings for this is stored for login administrator.
  • SNMP port and SNMP version can be saved while editing Mikrotik, Cambium, Canopy, and Radwin routers. In case the values are not default.
  • New system variable has been added: $COMPANY_NAME$. It is linked to client and it lists company name (2nd row of Business Client name).
  • We newly support CASA SYSTEMS headends. Administration is similar to other headends, and communication runs via SNMP protocol (you must complete snmp community).
  • While editing any router or switch, you can now add their POP.
  • In Client card / Active services, if service is deleted, Other IP addresses and Subordinated service is displayed. This is to keep history of a service.
  • In Scheduling Calendar, a pop-up text displays while hovering over task text showing Last solution.
  • SI type postal money order has been added into reminders (SK localization only).
  • New system variables for Internet service have been added
    • $SLEVA_OD$ ($DISCOUNT_FROM$)
    • $SLEVA_DO$ ($DISCOUNT_TO$)
  • You can now set up a page for redirecting a client following a successful login to the client portal. Set it up in Settings Syst.settings Client portal, ID ci_redirect_after_login (enter url address here).
  • In Settings Syst.settings Client portal, ID ci_sms_add_text, you can now enter client system variable which is replaced in an SMS.

 

REWRITTEN PAGES


DASHBOARD

  • Nagios Notification widget added.
  • To display Nagios notifications in the Dashboard, you have to create a Dashboard template in Settings Code lists Nagios Templates. Then you create Contact group with Dashboard type in Settings Code lists Nagios Contacts. And finally, check a box in Report outages for Nagios section for monitored device in Hardware Routers.

INVOICING

  • A page with option to print or display documents for Receive payment in cash (Client card, Invoicing) has been discontinued. Instead, this option is now on the top of the page when a payment is accepted.
  • DPH column has been added to Invoicing Overviews Invoicing. This column is also listed in printed documents.
  • You may now use new type for invoice export into ABRA G3 SW.
  • A new page in Invoicing Overpayments Incl.to VAT By Group has been created. It contains all overpayments included into VAT and displays them by invoice groups.
  • In Invoicing Settings Accounting System, you may now set up accounting for overpayments counted to VAT. If accounting is included, the inclusion of overpayment will use this accounting.
  • All invoices are now sent to clients using their Invoicing email. If not used, common e-mail is used as yet.
  • While exporting to MK-soft SW, you have an option to Export invoices without payments. Export will be done without payments (SK localization only).
  • If client changes payment method from Bulk payments, the system includes information about termination of client while generating file for bulk payments. Thus the system includes these clients for the last 2 months into bulk payments file. (SK localization only).
  • In Invoicing Bank Email, a PDF list Payments from Bank is now displaying details of payments.
  • In Invoicing Bank FIO/Raiffeisenbank, a PDF list Bank payments now displays information about payments which were counted into opening balance. If a list is without excluded payments, a tab with detail list of excluded payments is not displayed.
  • In Invoicing Overpayments Overpayments, View OverPayments in PDF now shows title on all pages, numbering of pages and issue date.
  • Generation of SI type postal money order is changed (IBAN format supported). Code on the order is now generated from IBAN bank account number (SK localization only).
  • In Invoicing Overpayments Overpayments, you may now filter by year, month, and invoice group.
  • In Client card, Invoicing, you may now print a list of Issued Invoices, Cash Payments, and non-cash Payments. You can send these lists by email. While sending the list, you can attach the other list as well.
  • A print list of issued invoices in Client card, Invoicing is identical to Invoice overview.
  • In Invoicing Overviews Accounting, you can now display list of invoices in PDF.

 

INVOICING - STANDALONE INVOICE

  • Completely rewritten to new framework
  • Issuing a standalone invoice is divided into a few blocks:
    •  Invoice header - Basic settings of the invoice (number, dates, supplier, etc.)
    •  Service invoicing - Select month(s) for invoicing services A suspension period for invoicing a service is newly displayed; a service cannot be invoiced for such period.
    •  Pending items - If there are pending items for a client, you may invoice them here. You can now select items individually (in the past, you had to select all).
    • Other items on invoice - Add other items for invoice. Click + or - to add/delete items. Click on Items template to select any amount of templates and used them for invoice. Each template may contain more items. Set up templates in Invoicing Settings Templates Invoice templates.

SledovaniTV a 4NetworksTV

SledovANITV

configuration

In Settings Syst.settings General:

  • Enter access for API (iptv_login, iptv_password).
  • Set IPTV type, ID iptv_type = 1.

Initialization

In Settings Active services IPTV Synchronization:

It reads packages and links clients from SledovaniTV system to ISPadmin services.
You can check proposed changes before the import.
You may then click Import do ISPadmin.

icon info2  Automatic daily sync of changes has been turned off in beta version of ISPadmin.

Add / edit service

A client must be registered to SledovaniTV before you add IPTV service.
Packages will be activated/de-activated.
Set-top boxes will be activated/de-activated.

 

4NetworksTV

Configuration

In Settings Syst.settings General:

  • Enter access for API (iptv_login, iptv_password).
  • Set IPTV type, ID iptv_type = 2.

Initialization

In Settings Active services IPTV Synchronization:

It reads packages and links clients from 4Networks system to ISPadmin services.
You can check proposed changes before the import.
You may then click Import to ISPadmin.

icon info2  Automatic daily sync of changes has been turned off in beta version of ISPadmin.

Add / edit service

When you add a service, a user is created in 4Networks.
Packages will be activated/de-activated.
Set-top boxes will be activated/de-activated.

ISPadmin 4.16 beta3

FIXES

  • Some minor bugs, as reported by providers, fixed
  • Adjustement of Tatra Bank SK import (amounts over 1,000€, SK localization)

NEWS

REWRITTEN PAGES


SCHEDULING

  • In Scheduling Calendar / Daily, when you hover over calendar column, you´ll see administrator´s name that belongs to it.

CLIENT PORTAL

New parameters have been added for Client portal:

  • ci_display_payment_details_tab - displays Payment Details in Client portal
  • ci_display_balance - displays client´s balance in Client portal

INVOICING

  • Tab Invoicing Overviews Invoicing By Period
    • Functions at row ends have been included into one select box.
    • PDF print: Page is now orientated to landscape and name of invoice group is displayed.
    • In List of Issued Invoices, header for all pages, page numbering, and line numbering have been added.
    • A new List of Issued Invoices for VAT has been added.
  • Tab Invoicing Overviews Invoicing By Groups
    • Functions at row ends have been included into one select box.
    • PDF print: Page is now orientated to landscape and period has been added.
    • A new List of Issued Invoices for VAT has been added.
  • Tab Invoicing Cash box Sent, a header for all pages, page numbering, and overview issue date have been added to List of Sent Payments.pdf.
  • In Invoicing Overpayments Returned / Display in PDF, a header for all pages, page numbering, and issue date have been added to PDF list.
  • Invoicing Overpayments Returned / Bank Order
    • While generating ABO file for returned overpayments, the system uses VS and SS as used in original payment.
    • If payment has neither VS, nor SS, SS is not stated and client´s s number is used as VS.
  • Tabs Invoicing Bank FIO and Invoicing Bank Raiffeisenbank, you can select Rejection Reason for excluded payment. In Invoicing Settings Code lists Rejection, you can define rejection reasons. You can filter list of excluded payments by rejection reason.
  • Functionality of excluded payments for CZ and SK localizations:
    • In excluded payments list, you can now filter by Excluded, Sent, and Returned. All excluded payments are under Excluded. It is possible to generate Bank Order for such payments. Upon clicking Bank Order, the system generates bank file (ABO file - bulk transfer) with excluded payments. Having been included into the file, payments change to Sent (Payment are sent to the bank through bank order). For sent payment, you can newly confirm its sending, or cancel it. Having been confirmed, payment changes to Returned, and it is not possible to restore it or work with it in any way. Having been cancelled, payment changes to Excluded, and it is possible to work with it further. Information on who and when approved payment exclusion is displayed.
  • Tab Invoicing Overpayments Incl.to VAT / View OverPayments in PDF: Invoice group is now displayed, header is on all pages, as well as line and page numbering, and issue date.
  • Settings for reminders have been moved to Invoicing Settings Templates Reminders.
  • Settings for notifications have been moved to Invoicing Settings Templates Notifications.
  • A new tab Invoicing Settings Code lists has been created. Payment Types, Settlements and VAT rates have been moved there.
  • In Invoicing Bank FIO and Invoicing Bank Raiffeisenbank, you can now print Bank Payments. It contains information on downloaded payments for a given period, and whether they have been credited, credited towards overpayment, excluded, or are not yet matched. Also, excluded payments are divided into reasons.
  • File format for import type CSOB - text format - Slovakia has been adjusted. As of November 1, 2015, CSOB statement format has been changed (SK localization).
  • File format for Tatra Bank - SK import has been adjusted. Currently, records of type Kredit are imported only (SK localization)

ISPadmin 4.16 beta2

FIXES

  • Invoice sending error fixed

NEWS

  • A new router type, Delibertant, has been added. The system now reads basic info about a device operation, data transfers on interfaces, and connected clients on WiFi interface. You cannot add clients to this router type. (It behaves similarly to UBNT routers).

CMTS

  • Headend Juniper G1 is newly supported.

ISPadmin 4.16 beta1

FIXES

  • Some minor bugs, as reported by providers, fixed
  • Optimization of automatically run scripts for data reading (CRON).

NEWS

  • Duplicate email addresses are no longer shown while sending email from Client card / Information / Send email.
  • The system remembers selected sender while sending email from Client card / Information / Send email, and pre-fills it next time.
  • While adding a new client, the system remembers the last chosen invoice group and pre-fills it automatically next time.
  • In Clients Internet, look up using Router filter searches in subordinated services of active Internet service too.
  • In Other Bulk Email, Router Locations item has been changed to MultiSelect, i.e. you may now select more items from the list.
  • A new feature of adding Planned Outages of devices has been added to HardwareOutages. When opening the Client card, a check against planned outages is now being done, if yes, a warning message is displayed. Also, planned outages could be displayed in Dashboard widget.
  • ARES service has been implemented into Client Edit. You can press the ARES button after you have entered company ID. If a match is found, values are filled in, and you may use them by pressing the Use data button to pre-fill the edited form. This service is available for the Czech localization only.
  • Newly added system variables $MIN_DOWNLOAD$ and $MIN_UPLOAD$ for Internet service, which read minimum guaranteed tariff speed for a given Internet service.
  • When editing Internet service, you may now add repeated suspension of a service. To do that, mark off Repeat.
  • In Hardware Routers All, it is now possible to choose routers with connected CMTS in State filter.
  • System set-up IDs ur_billing (newly ci_display_invoices_tab) and ur_billing_payment (newly ci_display_cash_payments) have been moved to Settings Syst. settings Client portal.
  • In Settings Info page Info.messages, it is now possible to filter clients by their actual invoice balance which are overdue.
  • In Client card / Active services, number of client's active services, incl. suspended ones, is displayed in the Active services button.
  • It is now possible to configure look up in Hardware Routers. There is a configuration button on the left side of the screen. You may choose whether to look up also in switches, devices connected to router, and routed networks. The configuration option has been added to avoid unwanted delays in look up time.
  • Now you may choose FUP for Radius-type tariff, similarly as for Wifi-type tariff. Set-up is available in Settings Tariffs Internet. Mikrotik device is then updated in Queue Tree and Mangle sections with reduced tariff speeds for clients with FUP. In case of regular tariffs, a typical speed management through Queue Simple by Radius service is used.

REWRITTEN PAGES


PUSH NOTIFICATIONS FOR NAGIOS

  • Mobile App licence only
  • Push notifications for Nagios have been newly implemented in the system. Their functionality copies the one of emails and SMS, only a mobile app is being used, and the notification is delivered free of charge directly to a mobile device. You have to be connected to the Internet.
  • You can create Push notification templates in Settings Code lists Nagios Templates.
  • A newly created Push notification template is then used in Settings Code lists Nagios Contacts.
  • Contact groups may be added to a device (router, switch) during its editing.
  • To change an SMS notification to a Push notification, just change notification type to Push and add Push contacts in Settings Code lists Nagios Contacts.

 

MOBILE APP

  • Clients tab is only displayed if an administrator has been granted access to it in the system. If so, he can only see clients who are in allowed invoice groups as per the settings. Changes in access rights are only applicable upon next login.

BILLING

  • Invoicing Settlements History tab has been discontinued. All information on settlements is now in Invoicing Overviews Payments.
  • In Invoicing Overpayments Incl. to VAT, a newly displayed columns Price excl. VAT and VAT have been added. They have been also added to PDF files.
  • Invoicing Opening balance tab has been moved to Other Tools.
  • In Client card / Invoicing, an invoice with credit note is marked as Solved by the credit note. This information is also stored for invoice detail.
  • Invoicing Overviews Invoicingtab has been moved to Invoicing Overviews Invoicing By period. Along with this, a new tab Invoicing Overviews Invoicing By groups has been created. This overview is similar to By period, only you may choose month and not an invoice group. Results are listed by invoice groups (a separate line for each group).
  • In Invoicing Invoices, you can now lock invoices for a selected month for all invoice groups.
  • In Client card / Invoicing, a detail of cancelled payment shows who, when, and why cancelled the payment.
  • Adjustment in displaying tabs:
  • In Invoicing Bank Import, XML Import, SIPO, SK post, FIO, Raiffeisenbank, you can use fulltext to search in payment details.
  • You can now cancel a cash payment only provided that payments have not yet been sent in Invoicing Cash box. If payments are sent you have to make a correction tax document for an invoice.
  • You can now select document issue date while creating a cash receipt in Client card / Invoicing / Receive payment in cash.
  • You can select bank account number in Client card / Invoicing / Return overpayment. The system automatically fills in bank account number from the Client card, and also proposes bank account numbers used for payments of invoices in the past.
  • A filter by month has been added to Invoicing Cash box Unsent. The system displays current month by default.

 

INVOICING - CHEQUE PAYMENTS (US and CA LOCALIZATIONS)

 

PAYPAL

  • Due to changes in PayPal policy, it is now possible to match payments automatically only in case of a valid certificate while using HTTPS. In case of HTTP no certificate is required, and PayPal connection continues to be functional.

SCHEDULING


DASHBOARD

  • Dashboard has been introduced into the system. Important information from ISPadmin can now be displayed on one screen.
  • After you login to the system, a Dashboard icon is displayed in the upper toolbar, and opens Dashboard in a new window.
  • It is recommended to be used on a separate screen where Dashboard is run with certain settings.
  • Dashboard comprises of various panels, Widgets. You can set displayed widgets with a button in the upper right corner. Each widget can be individually configured, e.g. refresh time or colour scheme. Any configuration is stored individually for each administrator.
  • There is a Fullscreen button in the upper left corner.
  • There are following widgets available at the moment:
    • Scheduled Outages: all scheduled outages are displayed, active ones are highlighted in red.
    • Routers CPU load: routers with higher CPU load are displayed. You can set the CPU load value in widget settings.
    • Received SMS: all received SMS are displayed; the same values as in Statistics History. You can set a number of days for displaying received SMS.
    • Offline routers: offline routers are displayed with off-line time

CLIENT PORTAL

  • The interface has been totally changed.
  • Its design is set to default skin. A logo is the only possible thing to move from the previous version. If set correctly, the logo should work correctly now.
  • There are the following skin themes available: red (default), blue, green and orange. You can switch between them in Settings Syst. settings Client portal, ID ci_skin_theme.
  • Login to the portal from an external login form continues to be possible, only you have to change an after link to http://domain.where_is_ispadmin_client_interface/sign/?do=signInForm-submit
  • How to configure the Client portal
  • Keys (IDs) have been renamed completely. They begin with ci_ (client interface), and now provide you with better names to describe the meaning of an ID. ID description has not been changed.
  • You can now set a number of months for displayed invoices in the Client portal. To do it, change the ci_display_invoices_for_the_last_x_months ID in Settings Syst. settings Client portal.

 

TASK MANAGER

  • Possibility to add task to oneself.
  • List with all clients and basic information about them (e.g. addresses, phones, contact person, notes, services).
  • Detail information about client’s internet service.
  • Search any router in router list.
  • Upload already taken photos from phone gallery.
  • New features may require ISPadmin, version 4.15 or newer.
  • Some bugs fixed.

ISPadmin 4.15 beta2

NEW

  • A new item Withdrawal Initiation Date has been added into Withdrawals (tab Client card / Withdrawals).
  • In the tab Client card / Active services, there is newly displayed information about Set-top boxes for IPTV service (No. of Set-top box, IP address and MAC address). Click on IP address to display ping graphs.

 

REWRITTEN PAGES

INVOICING - POSTAL MONEY ORDER (SK localization)

  • In the tab Invoicing Settings General, it is now possible to select type of postal money order in the invoice_sk_slozenka_typ key:
    • 0 - Type S
    • 1 - Type SI
  • Currently, the Slovak Post accepts both types of postal orders, however as of January 1st 2016, the Slovak Post should only accept postal order type SI where all bank account numbers are in IBAN format.

 

INVOICING - SEPA PAYMENTS (ES, IT and IE localization)

  • A new payment type SEPA has been added into the tab Invoicing Settings Code lists Payment types.
  • To generate SEPA file at the same time, click on Generate SEPA File in the tab Invoicing Invoices Invoices. The system will then generate SEPA file only for those clients with SEPA payment type. The Generate SEPA File option is only displayed if there is at least one invoice with SEPA type for a given month.
  • In invoice detail (tab Client card / Invoicing), when you click on SEPA generation information about an option to Mark exported invoice as paid is displayed.
  • It is possible to set mass function for Payment method to SEPA in the tab Other Bulk Action.

ISPadmin 4.15 beta1

FIXES

  • Fixed some minor bugs as reported by providers.

 

NEWS

  • In the tab Other Bulk Action,  it is now possible to bulkly set the option to Issue a pro-forma invoice.
  • The tab Client card / Documents now displays the name of the administrator which has saved a document to the system.
  • Newly created tab Hardware in the main menu. The tabs Routers, CMTS and Switches were moved into the Hardware tab. Also newly added, the tab Overview which will be explained below.
  • In bulk emails or SMS it is now possible to filter by Clients' locations. This location is set directly on a specific client.
  • Now in the tab Clients IPTV, a new column Number of Set-Top boxes was added. By clicking on the count of the set-top boxes all associated set-top boxes are displayed. Also new, bellow the headline, is the checkbox Show Set-Top boxes which is able to display all associated set-top boxes.
  • In the tabs Other Bulk E-mail and Other Bulk SMS, it is now possible to filter messages by invoicing period. If a client has at least one active service with an matching invoicing period, a message will be send to the client.
  • When sending an invoice by e-mail in the tab Client card / Invoices, it is now possible to attach a document from the tab Other Documents and it is also possible to attach a saved file from your computer.

 

REWRITTEN PAGES

 

SCHEDULING

  • New added link for task details in emails that inform about changes in tasks.
  • In the tab Scheduling Calendarnew Settings added to the left menu. The settings only apply to this tab. In this tab it is possible to turn the displaying of finished tasks on/off and it is also possible to set the order of none specific tasks.

 

ROUTERS

 

IPTV

  • When editing a service in IPTV, it is now possible to choose on which port of a switch the service is located. It allows for a better overall view of each port.
  • When editing a service in IPTV, it is now possible to set Invoicing date. It makes it possible to set a day on which the client will be invoiced. This setting will be used in the near future (when the Invoicing module is rewritten) so it will be possible to invoice a client on a specific date for any invoicing period (for example: 15.11.2014 to 14.12.2014). For now, this setting has no effect on invoices.

 

WITHDRAWALS

  • New in the system: it is now possible to add and record Withdrawals of active services , including information about the reasons and methods of a given withdrawal and possibly a record of a state, in which a client has been able to be convinced to revoke his withdrawal and wants to continue his service subscription(for example if better terms where given by the provider).
  • In the tab Settings Syst. settings General, with the the help of the key default_notice_period, it is now possible to set a default number of months for a withdrawal. This setting is only applied to newly created services.
  • Newly added into the system: the possibility of a withdrawal for client services. This is applied to two new code lists Reasons and Submission, which are located in the tab Settings Code lists Withdrawals.
  • When saving an active internet service, it is now possible to save a withdrawal period for a specific month. When creating an withdrawal, this period is automatically set.
  • A withdrawal can be then create in Client card / Withdrawals.
  • In the tab Client Internet, it is now possible to filter clients by active withdrawals by using the filter Details / Active withdrawal. An active withdrawal is when a client is currently within a withdrawal period.

 

INVOICING

  • Now when importing a list into the ABO format the displaying of a bank account numbers has been changed so the bank code is now also being displayed.
  • When receiving cash payments it is now possible to receive a partial amount of credit.
  • Now new, the possibility to transfer any invoice to an other client. With the button Transfer invoice located in the details of an invoice.
  • In the tab Invoicing Overpayments Returned, it is now possible, after choosing a invoice group and the type of payment by Bank transfer, to generate an bulk payment order. This bulk payment order can then be used by for banking. To generate this payment the system uses the bank account number, the client used when creating a payment return and also the Bank account number for payment refund which needs to be set on the given invoice group.
  • When editing an invoice group in the tab Invoicing Settings Invoicing group, it is now possible to allow or forbid a superCASH code on an invoice.
  • When using an invoice backup the system automatically sends a standard invoice to the client when an invoice backup has been paid. But if a client has set his invoicing by mail and hasn't set his email or does have invoicing by email disabled, then the system sends the notification to the email set in the tab Invoicing Settings Generalby the value of the key billing_mail. In this version the system only sends this notifications only when a client has invoicing by mail enabled or has invoicing by mail enabled but has no email set.
  • The tab Invoicing Bank FIO is now displayed only when an account was added in the tab Invoicing Settings Bank FIO.
  • The tab Invoicing Bank Email is now displayed only when an account was added in the tab Invoicing Settings Bank Bank - email.
  • The tab Invoicing Bank Supercash is now only displayed when in the tab Invoicing Settings Generalthe values of supercash_id and supercash_password are set.
  • The tab Invoicing Bank PayPal is now only displayed in case an invoice group has PayPal activated.
  • The tab Invoicing Bank Raiffeisenbank is now only displayed in case an account has been added in the tab Invoicing Settings Bank Raiffeisenbank
  • If a client adds credit and the system finds out that a payment has arrived to a different bank number than the clients invoice group, then the system displays a warning.
  • For manual pairing of an payment the system displays information about, if a bank account number of an payment has been found on multiple clients. If the same bank account number is found on multiple clients then it is possible to remove this number from the client. If the same bank account number is found on multiple clients then then it is not possible to automatically pair payments on a payment rule that contain the rule of a matching banking numbers.
  • In the tab Invoicing Overview Invoices, it is now possible to print an overview into PDF and also export it into CSV data.
  • In the details of payment pairing in the tab Invoicing Bank SIPO, new information about the details of a payment parings is now displayed.

 

INVOICING - integration of the Raiffeisenbank payment system

  • In ISPadmin it is now possible to automatically download payments from the Raiffeisenbank payment system.
  • In the tab Invoicing Settings Bank Raiffeisenbank, it is now possible to add a new account, on which the system automatically starts to download informations about payments.
  • To add a new bank account, the values shopname, creditaccount, creditbank and password have to be set. This data will be provided by the banks in case a payment system is being used.
  • Once a bank account is added to ISPadmin, the system automatically starts to download payments in 10 minute intervals.
  • After an bank account has been added to the system, the system downloads payments 48 hours retroactively. Therefore, it downloads also the previous two days.
  • In the tab Invoicing Bank Raiffeisenbank, a list containing information on payments, with the option to search and pair payments, is available. Exactly like in the other tabs of Invoicing Bank.

 

POP

  • New code list for POPs added, in the tab Settings Code lists POPs.
  • New tab Hardware Overview added. In it, it is possible to display the structure of the network. With all network elements (routers, switches, devices, passives element).
  • When first loading the page, it displays a list of localities with their name and online/offline state of all devices on a given locality.
  • Locality Overview: here it displays a list of localities of the tab Settings Code lists Locations. On each locality the name and the number of online/offline connections on a locality is specified. Located on the top right corner are icons with the options (add passive elements, legend). Every single locality and passive element is able to be connected in such a way that they correspond with the actual network. The connecting of an element is done by clicking and dragging into the yellow boxes of each element. After a link has been created it is possible to click on the link to display a menu with the options (add a note, remove connection).
    • POP Overview: POP Overview, passive elements and uplinks can be displayed by clicking on a locality. An Uplink is a connection between a locality or a POPs intended for a specific devices. On the right menu it is possible to display routers and switches which are on a locality and is possible to add them to a POP. The assigning is done by dragging the device icon on to a specific POP.
    • POP Details: By clicking on a POP it displays a list of devices that are assigned to the POP (routers, switches, passive elements and uplinks). Here it is also possible to make the same changes as on the POP site.
  • Every change of dragging and connecting is automatically saved.

 

SWITCHES

  • The tab with the list of switches was moved into the main tab Hardware.
  • Now it is possible to add a switch if it has no parent router.
  • For each switch (without a parent router) it is now possible to choose a locality. Switches with a set locality can then be assigned to an specific POP.
  • Now it is possible to assign a internet service to a switch (port of an switch) which aren't connected to any routers.

ISPadmin 4.14 beta4

FIXES

  • Fixed some minor bugs reported by providers.

INVOICING

  • New in pairing payment: in the tab Invoicing Settlements Settlements, a graphical overview for the current year was added.
  • In the tab Invoicing Bank FIO, instead of the supplier's bank account number now the description set in the tab Invoicing Settings Bank FIOis displayed. For the selected bank account number, now information about the last downloaded statement is displayed.
  • New type of Postal money order TKSZ was added (only HU localization).

INVOICING - NEW FEATURES FOR PAIRING RULES "ACCOUNT NUMBER"

  • The bank account number of the client has to be equal to the bank account number of the payment.
  • The system automatically saves the bank account number of the client, on each payment. These informations are saved into a special table, where the system checks on a new payment for particluar bank account number for payment pairing (Searching and pairing of a payment by this rule is available only in the case when the rule to pair payment by account number is defined in the system).
  • If the system finds the same bank account number on a client or no matching bank account number, then the current rule will be ignored and the system will apply the next rule in the rules list.

ISPadmin 4.14 beta3

FIXES

  • Fixed some minor bugs reported by providers.

NEWS

  • In the tab Client card / Contracts in the column Issue Date, the exact time is displayed now.
  • When defining an IP range in the tab Settings Code lists IP ranges, it is now possible to specify a locality. After a range has been set it is now possible, in the tab Statistics IP ranges, to filter a range by its locality.

NEWLY REWRITTEN PAGES

INVOICING

  • In the tab Invoicing Settings Templates General, it is now possible to set an accounting code for each item in a template (if accounting codes are enabled for invoices). These accounting codes are then used, when choosing a template while adding an universal service.
  • Now it is possible for Excluded payments in the tab Invoicing Bank FIOto be sorted by month, year and supplier account number and it is also possible to display them in PDF.

Invoicing - Include Overpayments to VAT

  • In the tab Invoicing Settings Invoice group, it is now possible to Include overpayments to VAT/TAX. If this option is turned on, the system starts to add all new overpayments to the VAT/TAX. It is also necessary to set up a number line in which the system will index new overpayments. Initial value of number line of included overpayments to VAT (VAT documents). If the option Include overpayments to VAT is enabled, the system automatically creates an invoice for the newly credited overpayment, with counted in VAT / TAX from a received payment. If such a overpayment is later subtracted on an issued invoice, the VAT amount is also subtracted, for the overpayments that have been already registered. Overpayments included to the VAT and all issued documents can be found in the tab Invoicing Overpayments Incl. to VAT where it is possible to print a single or a overview statement of all overpayments included to VAT, in a specific date period. If this feature is used, we recommend to include information about the overpayments into the Terms of Service for your clients.

ISPadmin 4.14 beta2

FIXES

Bug fixed for the cancellation of an added payment to the client credit. If a payment was added to the client credit and afterwards cancelled, an error was occurring in the displaying of the import. In the list of imports all payments were credited to the client and marked as unpaired. On the client, however, the credit was added correctly.

NEWS

A new system variable was added for the setting of an invoicing day in the active service internet ($INT_INVOICE_DAY$).

ISPadmin 4.14 beta1

Fixes

  • Some minor bugs, as reported by providers, fixed

News

  • The tabs Settings Code lists Task types and Settings Code lists Holidays were moved into Settings Code lists Scheduling.
  • In the tab Clients  VoIP, fulltext search now also searches through other IP phones which were specified in the active service.
  • In the tab Clients Contacts, now every administrator is able to set which columns are displayed. The button for the column setting is located on the top left corner.
  • The tab Statistics  Client stat. is due to sensitive financial data now only displayed for administrators with the rights of MainAccountant or MasterAdmin.
  • In Information messages (tab Settings Info Page Info. messages), a new filter Client details was added. So now it is possible to filter by client without email address, without a phone numbers and etc. It is now also possible to display an information message by the current balance of a client.
  • When adding active services internet (tab Client card / Active Services), in the section Suspend service, a new check box Repeat was added , it refers to the suspension type Suspend service and invoicing (from-to).

Newly rewritten pages

Scheduling

  • For newly saved task solutions now the time is saved as well.

Invoicing

  • The rules for payment pairing are now also applied to the tabs Invoicing Bank E-mail and Invoicing Bank FIO.
  • In the tab Invoicing Invoices Invoices, when exporting SEPA , now a submit box is displayed where it is possible to choose if all invoice exports are marked as paid. Because the corresponding SEPA file, send by the bank, only has information about the refused payment, by which it isn't possible to automatically reimburse an invoice.
  • Unification of functions for payment pairing. Previously it was possible for unpaired payments to Pair, Pair manually and Add to Credit. Now payments have only one button Pair. By clicking on this button a form for searching clients, invoices and client information about the current payment is displayed. Further bellow on the page a list with clients and their invoice is displayed. Next to a client is the button add to credit, which makes it possible to add credit to a client. Next to an invoice is the button Pair, which makes it possible to pair a payment for the current invoice. The system tries to automatically display clients and their unpaid invoices by the payment information.
  • A new import for GoPay payments was added.
  • In the tab Invoicing Bank superCASH, it is now possible to pair unpaired payments.

Routers

  • Improved client portal for better usability - font style, column width, padding between virtual interfaces.
  • In the tab RoutersAll, new filter options, DFS supported and DFS enabled, for the State filter were added.
  • Now in the tab RoutersAll, WiFi clients on Access points are also displayed.
  • Now on the header of a router: in the tab Extra, the number of photos assigned to that a specific router is displayed.
  • The icon for displaying ping graphs on routers was added back to the frequently used icons.

ISPadmin 4.13 beta2

FIXES

  • Fixed some minor bugs reported by providers.

NEWS

  • Now it is possible to export data to CSV format in the tab Clients Internet. Export option is available for only those administrators which have enabled permission to export data from system. This new permission option is available to set in the tab Settings Administrators.
  • In the tab Other Bulk Action, there is now possible to display only those clients (by using the right filter option) which do not have filled in password to their Client portal and there is also possible to generate new password for such clients.
  • In Client card /Active services, there is now possible to run update router configuration. The button is enabled to use only in the case if the router configuration is not updated and there is a need to update rules on router immediately, e.g. when a MAC address is changed.
  • Auto-sent reminders (requests for payment) now counts with credit of particular client as well. In the past, while sending auto-reminders, system did not count overpayment for particular client. Now if the overpayment is higher than the amount of outstanding invoice the system will not send auto-reminder because the unpaid invoice can be settled from Client's overpayment.
  • Fixed some minor bugs reported by providers.

ISPadmin 4.13 beta1

FIXES

  • Fixed some minor bugs reported by providers.

NEWS

  • New rewritten page Clients Internet. Now all columns are displayed. The display of the columns can be changed by clicking on the button Columns on the top left.
  • Now it's possible to set multiple email addresses on a client. New options for Invoicing email, Technical email and Business email were added. In future releases, this email options will be used for the division of email recipients.
  • Now it is possible in Bulk e-mail to choose, to which email addresses it will be send. If the above mentioned email addresses are empty, the email will be send to the (default) email addresses of the client.
  • When editing Additional IP addresses in active services internet, it is now possible to write quotes around the input of Client MAC address this prevents the automatic assignment of MAC addresses.
  • The updating of routers, when making changes to the system, was optimized.
  • If on a router the option DHCP is enabled.Then on every router update, before uploading the DHCP leases, it removes the dynamic assigned DHCP leases.
  • Newly added the possibility of sending SMS via Nagios when using the SMPP protocol.
  • When making backups of a configuration on a MikroTik router it now removes the file from the router after the backup has finished (safety measure).

REWRITTEN PAGES

  • Fixed some minor bugs reported by providers.

SCHEDULING

  • Now it is possible to set a default number of minutes for the task solution time. It can be set in the tab Settings Syst. settings Scheduling by the key planning_default_task_solution_time_minutes. Once a date is selected, the solution time is automatically calculated and set to the given setting.
  • When adding a task, below every selected technician, a table with his current workload for the day is now displayed. It also displays overlapping tasks and the time interval of each task. On mouse over the detail of a task is displayed.

SENDING AND RECEIVING SMS OVER THE SMPP PROTOCOL

  • In the tab Settings Syst. settings General, it is now possible to set new parameters.
    • sms_smpp_port: TCP Port for the communication between a SMPP gateway.
    • sms_smpp_sender: sender identification.

INVOICING

  • In Postscript at Invoice, located in the editing of an invoice group, now additional system variables can be used.
    • $TOTAL_VAT_AMOUNT$ - Total VAT amount.
    • $TOTAL_AMOUNT_WITH_VAT$ - Total amount with VAT.
    • $TOTAL_AMOUNT_WITHOUT_VAT$ - Total amount without VAT.
  • The tab Invoicing Cash box is now divided into the tabs Invoicing Cash box Sent and Invoicing Cash box Unsent.
  • The tab Invoicing Bank Unidentified payments was moved to a new rewritten tab Invoicing Bank Import. The payments that were moved can be found in this new tab under the button Unidentified payments.
  • In the tab Invoicing Bank Import, unused imports were removed.
  • In the tab Invoicing Bank Import, it is now possible to filter by import type. It works only for newly imported files.
  • When issuing an invoice (invoicing details in the Client card), it now displays the total balance of the invoice.
  • Export of MPR/KS invoices now exports IC VAT values as well.

INVOICING - RULES FOR PAYMENT MATCHING

  • A new tab for the rules of payment matching were added. Invoicing Settings Bank Rules. Here it is possible to define a multiple number of rules for the automatic matching of payments. The rules are applied by the order in which they are in the list. These rules are ONLY applied for the tab Invoicing Bank Import!
  • When creating a new rule for every action, an icon i is displayed. On icon mouse over additional details are displayed.
  • For the creation and assembling of rules it is possible to run a test to check if the rules work properly. The button Test rules for payment matching is located on the top of the list of rules. After clicking on the test button, a form is displayed where it is possible to display payment information. After the test, the rule table is displayed were each rule has a matching invoice or client. The green mark signalizes to which rule it would be able to match.
  • It works so that upon the automatic matching of payment imports it goes through the current rules of payment matchings and finds a matching invoice or a client according to the individual rules. The payment will be matched or added to the client credit, by the first rule that matches the criteria of the rule. To maintain the functionality, 6 system variables were created to ensure payment matching as before. This rules can not be edited or deleted . On every rule it is possible, with the help of the column Active, to activate or deactivate the current rule.
  • Now automatic invoice matching is possible.
    • Match the payment by a banking account number.
    • Match payments by a note on a payment (some clients use VS - variable symbol /SS - specific symbol).
    • Match a payment, if the payment amount is lower. (the invoice will be partially paid ).
    • Match a payment, if the payment amount is higher. (the invoice will be paid and the rest is credited to the client).
    • The possibility to automatically credit a client for payments was added.
    • The possibility to match payments by oldest or newest invoice.

ROUTERS - LIST

  • New rewritten router list.
  • In the router list. a new filter State was added, which has the option to filter Monitored routers and Routers with a restart configuration.
  • In the router list under the filters, the buttons + and - are located. With the help of these buttons, it is possible to hide or show all parent routers. In the hidden state, a list view with the most important information is displayed. At the beginning of every row, a button + for the option to collapse is displayed. This option to expand or collapse is saved to each administrator account, so after the next login it displays the last set state. The same principal of expanding and collapsing is also used on Network interface, Device attached to device, Switches, Headends and Routers.
  • With the new rewritten router list, also the permissions for the routers have changed (tab Settings Administrators). The option to set the permissions to MasterAdmin and MainAdmin for the routers was removed. Now they have no effect on the router list. Everything is set for each administrator separately, this can be set on any given account.
    • Allow routers: routers ON/OFF
    • Adding routers
    • Editing routers
    • Deleting routers
    • Manage devices
    • Manage headends
    • Router restart
    • Update router configuration
    • Router backup
    • Photogallery management
    • Emergency mode

SYSTEM VARIABLES

  • New system variables for the service Internet were added.
    • $INT_PRICE_WITH_VAT_INV_PERIOD$: The price for an invoice period with VAT
    • $INT_PRICE_WITHOUT_VAT_INV_PERIOD$: The price for an invoice period without VAT
  • New system variables for the service IPTV:
    • $IPTV_CONTRACT_LIFETIME$: Minimal duration of a contract

 

 

ISPadmin 4.12 beta2

FIXES

  • Minor bugs fixed

NOVINKY

  • New system variables for clients were added:
    • $IBAN$ (EN: $CLI_IBAN$)
    • $BIC$ (EN: $CLI_BIC$)

SCHEDULING

  • The calendar is now first order by non specific tasks and then by task beginning time.

FAKTURACE

  • The fulltext search in the tab Invoicing Overviews Invoices now searches on individual invoice items.
  • In the tab Invoicing Invoices Time period By invoice, new features are added:
    • print to PDF
    • export to CSV
    • on mouseover on a client, additional information about the client is displayed
    • on mouseover on a invoicie, additional information about invoice is displayed

ISPadmin 4.12 beta1

FIXES

  • Fixed some minor bugs reported by providers
  • Bug Fix for the NAT 1:1 rules.

NEWS

  • In the tab Settings Other News, it is now possible to message clients in a specific invoicing group.
  • In Client card / History, it is now possible to display all changes of a certain category on one page.
  • In the tab Settings IP Pools IP Pools NAT, it is now possible to click on Number of engaged IP addresses to display a list of clients and their IP addresses.

REWRITTEN PAGES

INVOICING

  • The HU localization now displays the taxable date also in the invoicing group of VAT / TAX non-payers.
  • For exports to Omega the items and invoices are now set to a mathematical rounding of 2 decimal places.
  • The values export_vat_code and export_of_numerical_series_prefix are moved to the global configuration of invoicing (tab Invoicing Settings General) to the configuration of invoicing groups (tab Invoicing Settings Invoice group).
  • For the export of invoices to the program EKONOM a invoice date (dat_zauct) was added. This date is set as the date of invoice.
  • For the export of invoices to the program RLB (HU localization) now additional data, whether the invoice is paid or not, is saved. If the invoice is paid, the date and format (cash receipt, bank) of the invoice is saved.
  • Now it is possible to set PayPal for each invoicing group individually. The setting is moved from Invoicing Settings General to the tab Invoicing Settings Invoice group.
  • Now an export to the program SAP is available. For an implementation it is necessary to contact the support team.
  • Now a new page for issuing credit notes is available in the (tab Client card / Invoicing / Details / Issue a credit note) and it is now also possible to set a time interval for issuing of credit notes.
  • In the tab Invoicing Overviews Claims Statistic, by clicking on details a list of invoices is displayed. In it the invoice type is displayed and the entire report can be printed to a PDF file.
  • In the tab Invoicing Overpayments Returned, it is now possible to print the report to a PDF file.
  • When sending a cash receipt in the tab Invoicing Cash box, all selected filters are applied to it now.
  • Now when importing OC31 payments (HU localization) backed up invoices are paired as well.
  • A New tab was added to Invoicing Invoices Time period By invoice. In it is possible to find a list of invoices where every invoice is calculated by the selected time range.

INFO PAGE

  • New Tab Settings Info Page Inf. messages.
  • A new filter in Tariff internet was added. It is now possible to inform only clients with a specific internet tariff.
  • A new column No. of clients was added. It displays the count of clients that are affected by an information message, it can be clicked on to display a list of affected clients.

SYSTEM VARIABLES

  • New system variables for the service Mobile were added:
    • $MOBILE_NAME$ - Service name
    • $MOBILE_STREET_INST$ - Street (of installation)
    • $MOBILE_CITY_INST$ - City (of installation)
    • $MOBILE_Postcode_INST$ - Postcode Code (of installation)
    • $MOBILE_FLAT_INST$ - apartment(of installation)
    • $MOBILE_FLOOR_INST$ - floor(of installation)
    • $MOBILE_CONNECTED_FROM$ - connected from (date)
    • $MOBILE_INVOICED_FROM$ - invoiced from (date)
    • $MOBILE_INVOICING_PERIOD$ - invoicing period (date)
    • $MOBILE_CONTRACT_NUMBER$ - contract Number
    • $MOBILE_PRICE_WITH_VAT$ - price per month incl. VAT
    • $MOBILE_PRICE_WITHOUT_VAT$ - price per month excl. VAT
  • New rewritten system variables page (in the tab Settings Contracts / List of system variables). Now it is possible to hide or display individual sections of the system variables.
  • The configuration of system variables is moved to a new tab (Settings Code lists Syst. variables).

ACCESS-LIST CREATION

  • In a situation where the router Mikrotik is only an AP without any routed network and clients, and also has QOS set on his parent router. It starts to write the clients, that are assigned to this access point, to the Access-List(included AP-TX-LIMIT, CLIENT-TX-LIMIT according to the settings for internet services).The Routers have to be listed as active and their API, MAC filter, wi-fi Mac has to be enabled.

ISPadmin 4.11 beta2

FIXES

  • Fixed some minor bugs reported by providers.
  • Reading errors in RAM and HDD size for MikroTik version 6 and higher are now fixed.

INVOICING

  • Optimization of payment read-outs in the tab Invoicing Overviews Invoices and Client card / Invoicing, resulting in a speed increase.
  • If issuing a new invoice in (Client card / Invoicing), a new option Mark invoice as sent was added. It can mark an issued invoice as sent by E-mail.
  • New in tab Invoicing Invoices Invoices: it is now possible for the current year and invoicing group to set the option Mark invoices as sent.
  • If issuing a new invoice in (Client card / Invoicing), it is now possible to select all months for one service at once.

SEPA IMPORT

  • New Tab Invoicing Bank SEPA added.
  • So now there is also supported to import returned SEPA payments with error payments.

MOVING GRAPHS TO RAMDISK

The main usage load for disks, on which the system is installed on, is the generation of graphs in 5 minute intervals. For each client at minimum 2 graphs are created. For the routers at minimum 5 graphs are created in relation to the count of interfaces. Graphs are stored in binary form on the HDD and take up to 500KB of space. Therefore in practice the system needs to work with a large number of small files in which every 5 minutes informations about transmitted data and measured values are written. For a larger number of graphs SAS disk drives are recommended. SAS drives are significant faster, in working with small files, then SATA drives. Basically it is about the IOPS that the disks are able to provide to the system. In practice SATA disks are able to provide up-to 100 IOPS , SAS on the other hand are able to provide up-to 150-180 IOPS (depending on whether it is a 10k or 15k disk). The sum of IOPS can only be increased by the number of disks in RAID or by installing SSD disks for system graphing. IOPS is the main limitation for working with graphs. If the sum of IOPS is insufficient, the system latency is going to be increased and in some cases sites may load slower because the system is waiting for the HDD to be able to read and write. In this case an increase of RAM or CPU upgrade will not help. The only possibility is to increase the number of disks ( or replace the slow SATA drives with faster 15k SAS drives ).

  • It is now possible to move generated graphs to a RAMDISK. A Ramdisk is a self-contained part in memory, that behaves like a disk but Access times are several times faster than a conventional HDD, because it only uses RAM memory to store the data. If graph generation is run within RAMDISKS the IOPS and the disk usage will be significantly reduced. This is the most noticeable in large installations ( 1000 clients or more). In this cases we recommend moving graphs to a RAMDISK.
  • To work with RAMDISK, run this utility
/usr/local/script/ispadmin/rrd_ramdisk.pl
  • To display a help message, run it without any parameters
  • Usage:
/usr/local/script/ispadmin/rrd_ramdisk.pl initialize - Initialize RAMDISK
/usr/local/script/ispadmin/rrd_ramdisk.pl destroy - Destroy RAMDISK permanently
/usr/local/script/ispadmin/rrd_ramdisk.pl start [force] - Start RAMDISK
/usr/local/script/ispadmin/rrd_ramdisk.pl stop - Stop RAMDISK
/usr/local/script/ispadmin/rrd_ramdisk.pl save [force] - Save RAMDISK data to backup
/usr/local/script/ispadmin/rrd_ramdisk.pl check - Check RAMDISK usage
/usr/local/script/ispadmin/rrd_ramdisk.pl set - Set RAMDISK in MByte
/usr/local/script/ispadmin/rrd_ramdisk.pl restore [backup.file] - Restore RAMDISK from last backup.file
  • You may use the following parameters:
    • initialize - Initializes the RAMDISK and moves the data to the RAMDISK.
    • destroy - Unistalls the RAMDISK and moves the data back to the drive.
    • start - For an automatic start after booting. Use [force] to initialize RAMDISK even if the size of the restored backup is smaller by more than 5% than the previous ramdisk size, or if RAMDISK initialization was not successful after server reboot, and you need to initialize RAMDISK from the console.
    • stop - Makes an automatic backup of the data in RAMDISK, copies the backup to a Hardrive, and stops RAMDISK. !!! We strongly recommend that you perform it every time you restart/switch off the system !!!
    • save - Makes a backup of data of the RAMDISK to a Hardrive - performed automatically once a day, 10 backups are done retrospectively, and you may restore them later. Moreover, 2 monthly backups (as of 28th of each month) are stored.
      (It backups into /usr/local/script/ispadmin/rrd_data_backup/. Use [force] to make a backup of ramdisk which is smaller than the previous ramdisk in size, e.g. if you deliberately delete more files with graphs. A check on 5%-difference compared to the original size is performed.)
    • check - Checks the utilization of the RAMDISK and if needed, it automatically increases the RAMDISK.
    • set - Set RAMDISK size in MB to increase it according to your needs.
    • restore - Insert name of backup file from backup directory for rrd ramdisk to restore a daily backup of rrd data. If no name is inserted, the system will restore the last known backup from this directory. You may use data restore if you loose it, or the data is incomplete. The only must is initialized RAMDISK.
  • When RAMDISK is installed, you need to run the following command:
/usr/local/script/ispadmin/rrd_ramdisk.pl initialize
    • This initializes and configures all that is needed. After rebooting the sytem it installs the RAMDISK again and the data are moved on to it.
    • Be aware that the data on a RAMDISK is saved in RAM and if a server malfunction occurs ( powersuply malfunction ) all data are lost. In the case of correct restart, the system automatically backs up data to the Hardrive an moves it onto the RAMDISK after booting. The system also makes an automatic backup onto a hardrive once a day. So in case of power supply outage, one-day data only is lost.
    • For RAMDISK creation it is absolutely necessary to have a sufficient amount of RAM. The maximum amount of RAM that can be used for the RAMDISK is 25%.
    • The necessary amount of RAM is calculated dynamically according to occupied disk space (mostly 510Mb - 5GB). If the calculation for RAM is resulting in a larger amount then 25%, the RAMDISK is not created and it is necessary to upgrade the amount of RAM. If RAMDISK capacity is more than 80% full, the system will try to increase the disk automatically (if RAM is sufficient). If it fails, you may increase RAMDISK manually using set option.

ISPadmin 4.11 beta1

FIXES

  • Fixed some minor bugs reported by providers.
  • Changed permission for Administrator management. Now Administrators can only be modified by administrators with the permission of MasterAdmin

NEWS

  • Added a check for the item "Allocate an IP address from the number" in the configuration of Routed Networks.
  • In Tab "Clients / IPTV"a filter was added for "Invoice Group".
  • In Tab "Clients / Home" service tasks were removed. Now they are available in the menu "Scheduling / Overview"

REWRITTEN PAGES

  • Settings / Administrators / Admin. groups
  • Clients / VoIP
  • Clients / Universal
  • Other / Documents
  • Client card / Information / Documents
  • Invoicing / Settings / Templates / Universal
  • Invoicing / Settings / Templates / Pending it.
  • Invoicing / Overviews / Opening Bal. - Show list of invoices in CSV
  • Invoicing / Overviews / Invoicing / clicking on the number of invoices - displaying a list of invoices in PDF and CSV
  • Client card / Information / History

INTERNET SERVICE

  • Maps are now displayed in Change service INTERNET, and loaded after the initial page load. The page is now able to load faster (up to 50%).
  • When editing the pop-menu "Router" it displays Active routers first and underneath are Monitored routers. They are separated by the title Active and Monitored.

IP NAT POOLS

  • In the tab "Settings / IP pools / IP pools NAT" an option in the table for clicking "Number of engaged IP addresses" was added, to display the list of engaged IP addresses.

TV

  • Now it's possible to use the service Sledovanitv.cz in combination with ISPadmin. Clients are identified by IP addresses in their Active Internet services. After the browser displays the URL of sledovanitv.cz, he is rerouted to ISPadmin (https://[isp.example.cz]/new/www/sledovani-tv/identify) , which identifies the client and invokes a reroute to the sign in form on sledovanitv.cz. If the Client needs an list of TV stations for VLC, their is the possibility of using the URL https://[isp.example.cz]/new/www/sledovani-tv/channels, which returns, after authentication, a list of TV channels.
  • After commissioning , it is necessary to agree on Rerouteing with sledovanitv.cz s.r.o from their URL sledovanitv.cz to ISPadmin ISPadmina https://[isp.example.cz]/new/www/sledovani-tv/identify

SCHEDULING

  • In the tabs "Scheduling / Overview" and "Client card / Information / Scheduled interventions" is an overview of scheduled tasks. Each technician is able to see all tasks, they only differ in who is able to edit and delete a specific task.
  • Now it's also possible, for technicians with the lowest permissions in scheduling, to set the ability to change technicians on existing tasks. The Configuration is set in Administrators Settings, with the check box "Cange technician task"
  • If in tasks a assigned technician is removed, the technician is informed, via E-mail, that the task was cancelled. The E-mail is automatically sent, if the technician has set a valid E-mail address. The Subject of the E-mail can be set in the tab "Settings / Syst. setting / Scheduling" with the key "planning_email_subject_unassign"
  • While saving a task in scheduling it's possible to send information of the task via email to the clients. In the tab "Settings / Syst. settings / Scheduling" there it is possible to set the subject with the key "planning_email_subject_ticket_to_client" and it will be automatically completed with the ID of the Task. This E-mail can be sent with each change in tasks by clicking "Send ticket to Client" in the edit Tasks.
  • While adding and editing tasks it is now able to save up to 5 people at once.
  • In the tab "Scheduling / Overview" last applied filters are saved and used after the page reloading.
  • In the tab "Scheduling / Overview" it is possibility in the Calender, to click on a month to display tasks only for that specific month.
  • In the tab "Client card / Information / Scheduled interventions" filters are not saved and after the page reloading there are no before used filters applied

INVOICING

  • In the tab "Invoicing / Invoices / Invoices" option "Lock Invoices" was added for a specific month and invoice group. If an invoice is locked in this way, it isn't possible to change, cancel, change dates and address and issue a new invoice in this particular period. Locking and unlocking can be only done by the MasterAdmin or MainAdmin.
  • Added support for exporting invoices to "BYZNYS" accounting system.
  • In the tab "Invoicing / Overview / Invoices" there it is possible to "View Statistics by Service" but each row has a new added icon to print out a statistic of every individual service
  • While adding common services it is now possible to choose an accounting code for each item. If accounting codes are permitted (the tab "Invoicing / Settings / Accounting") and in the tab of the service no accounting code is used, the system applies a global accounting code selected from the general service (the tab "Settings / Active services / General").
  • In the tab "Invoicing / Invoice / Invoice" by click on view or print invoices in PDF, an intermediate step appears with the option to choose a certain type of payment.
  • In The detail of each invoice it is now possible to generate SEPA data for the invoice (currently only possible for all invoices issued in a given month).
  • Now when generating files for SEPA (the Client card / Information / Invoicing and Invoicing / Invoices) the system automatically settle all invoices for which SEPA was generated. This feature is only available for localizations ES, IT, and IE (for other localizations available on demand).
  • Enabled reloading for erroneously processed e-mail from the bank. In some cases it may happen that the system marks one as processed, but couldn't read any payments. So now in the menu "Invoicing / Bank / E-mail" erroneously processed emails, can be marked as unprocessed with the icon at the end of the line and the system tries to precesses them again in regular 5-minute intervals.
  • A new system variable created invoice_offset_correspondence_address in the menu "Invoicing / Settings / Universal" , through which it is possible to move the mailing address on the invoices. The value indicates how many millimetres the address is moved downwards.

PAYPAL PAYMENTS

  • Automatic matching of incoming payments in PayPal now supported.
  • A new tab PayPal is now available in the tab "Invoicing / Bank", where all payments received via PayPal are displayed.
  • For proper functionality it is necessary to set following parameters:
    • In the tab "Settings / Syst. Settings / General" it's necessary to adjust the parameter ispadmin_server and insert an IP address or Domain of an ISPadmin server (eg. Demo.ispadmin.eu).
    • In the tab "Invoicing / Settings / General" it's necessary to adjust the parameter paypal to "1" and also into the paypal_account_id fill in the PayPal account ID.
    • In the firewall rules HTTPS must be allowed globally.
  • If everything is properly configured and enabled, after any payment of the invoice from Client portal (by clicking on the icon PayPal), the payment appear in the tab "Invoicing / Bank / PayPal" and the invoice is automatically set as paid.

Send and receive SMS via the protocol SMPP

  • Added support for sending and receiving SMS via the Internet protocol SMPP. If a SMS gateway (for example 2N VoiceBlue) supports the SMPP protocol, it is possible for the system to send and receive SMS. The gateway is connected via Ethernet and ISPadmin is communicating via the TCP / IP protocol. The main advantage is that the gate does not have to be placed directly next to the ISPadmin server, but can also be located anywhere (e.g., in another server room). So it can be used in combination with virtualization, where it is sometimes difficult to map a serial or USB port on an SMS gateway to a specific virtual installation.
  • In the tab Settings Syst. settings General, it is now possible to set up new parameters:
    • sms_notify: sett value to 3 for SMPP protocol usage.
    • sms_smpp_ip_address: IP address of the SMS gateway
    • sms_smpp_login: login name
    • sms_smpp_password: login password
  • Accordingly it is possible to send SMS to clients, send automatic system notifications and notices

GOOGLE MAPS

  • In the tab Other Map, a new filter All states of clients and All Routers is added. By selecting the filter states of clients all clients belonging to this state are displayed on the map and the same applies for the Router filter.

ISPadmin 4.10 beta4

FIXES

  • Fixed some minor bugs reported by providers
  • Fixed some bugs while adding the Internet service.
  • When adding a new contact the system no longer shows from pop-up menu those invoicing groups which are marked as inactive in a tab "Invoicing / Settings / Inv. groups"

REWRITTEN PAGES

  • Invoicing / Settings / Payment types
  • Invoicing / Settings / Settlements

ISPadmin 4.10 beta3

FIXES

  • Fixed some minor bugs reported by providers.

REWRITTEN PAGES

  • Invoicing / Cancel / Invoices
  • Invoicing / Cancel / Cash

INVOICING

  • Fixed bug in export of Direct debit file where was necessary to customize data structure for CZ post office.
  • Slovakia ČSOB bank has changed payment notification format. The format has been customized to accept payment notifications for ČSOB.
  • In a tab "Invoicing / Invoices" there were displayed icons with additional options at each row with generated invoices. Now there is a pop-up menu which includes all available option better organized behind one icon.

INVOICING - ACCOUNTING CODES

  • Completely rewritten setting of accounting codes for invoicing.
  • In the tab "Invocing / Settings / Accounting / Accounting" there it is possible to set up own accounting codes. Ïn the case system will offer from a table only those pre-defined accounting codes.
  • In the tab "Invocing / Settings / Accounting / Services" there it is possible to set up accounting codes for services Internet, VoIP, General etc.
  • In the tab "Invocing / Settings / Accounting / System" there it is possible to set up accounting codes for system items used for invoices generating like fee for sending invoices by post.
  • In the tab "Settings / Tariff" there it is possible to define accounting codes for services INTERNET, CATV, DVBC, VOIP, IPTV. Now it is possible to set up acconting code for whole service but also for individual tariffs. If any accounting code for tariff is defined here, system will use it as default before application of accounting code for whole service. If there is no specific accounting code for particular tariff system will use accounting code for whole service as default.
  • In the tab "Invoicing / Overviews / Invoicing" there it is possible to display statistics by accounting codes and also export accounting codes to accounting system.

GOOGLE MAPS - COORDINATES

  • If in the client card are incorrect coordinates for displaying location on Google maps, the system runs internal script (once per day) which will set up correct coordinates at those clients. Google API has limited number of attempts for location corrections (one-hundred times per day), so when the daily limit is exceeded script will be ran next day to continue.

PHOTOGALLERY - EXIF INFORMATION

  • Adding of photos to client card now also includes EXIF information which are displayed below photo preview. Currently system save information about taken date, device model and GPS coordinates of photo taken location (if available). If coordinates are retrieved system will display also "Earth" icon below the photo preview to display location on Google maps by clicking on the icon.
  • By clicking on the photo to display it in larger window there are also displayed EXIF information, if available.
  • Retrieving of EXIF information is available for new uploaded photos only.

ISPadmin 4.10 beta2

FIXES

  • Fixed some minor bugs reported by providers.

NEWS

  • New router types supported Cambium, Radwin a Edge. (Available in the tab "Nagios").
  • Fulltext searching now includes also notes for search results in the tab "Clients / Contacts".

REWRITTEN PAGES

  • Scheduling / Overview
  • Invoicing / Settlements / History
  • Invoicing / Cancel / E-Payments

SCHEDULING

  • Fixed some reported bugs.
  • In a task calendar it is possible to display list of unspecified tasks. Sorted by long-term tasks at first and below them are displayed other unspecified tasks for particular day sorted by insert day.
  • Now it is possible to re-open even already closed task if there is correct authorization for scheduling part assigned to a particular administrator / technician. Editing task is saved to a history log.

INVOICING

  • In the tab "Invoicing / Cash box" there is a new dividing of invoicing groups and years. While exporting payments in the tab "Cash box - Sent payments" there it is now possible to export CSV or different format from a context menu.
  • New rewritten pages also now displays line numbering.
  • In the tab "Invoicing / Overviews / Payments" there is now also total overview at bottom of the list.
  • Now it is also possible to create "Credit note" even for item with Reverse charge (CZ only - as we know).

INVOICING - TIME PERIODS

  • In the tab "Invoicing / Invoices / Time period" there is now possible to export statement for defined time period to PDF (by clicking on a particular icon).
  • The statement includes information about invoices which belongs to a particular month.
  • Detail of particular month includes detailed preview of invoices for time period (by clicling on a PDF icon at each line).

ROUTERS - NEW SUPPORT

  • Added support of UBNT Edge Router.
  • Added support of Cambium ePMP 1000.
  • Content filtering option has been also customized, so it is now possible to select "Router type" from pop-up menu and choose type "Ubiquiti Edge Router" or "Cambium".
  • When access details are filled in the system will start to retrieve interface list from routers (approx. in 5 minutes) and also will start to draw transfer graphs, signal graphs of connected clients (if available) and CPU graph.

IP NAT POOLS

  • In the tab "Settings / IP Pools" there is a new tab "NAT Pools".
  • There is possible to define public IP addresses used for NAT of clients.
  • While adding NAT pool there it is possible to define range of IP addresses (network number / mask) and also router which is that range defined on.
  • While adding Internet service in a client card there is now possible to defined IP address (on which NAT is provided) from pre-defined range. System provides NAT on particular router automatically (if enabled) for private IP address of the client.
  • To enable applying of NAT address on router, it is necessary to set up key "mikrotik_nat_for_end_user" to value "1" in the tab "Settings / Syst. settings / Mikrotik". In other case (value "0") NAT will not be applied to Mikrotik.
  • If enabled, every client will have applied another rules "dstnat" and "srcnat".
    • /ip firewall nat add action=netmap chain=ispadmin_first_dstnat comment=ispadmin_NAT_1.2.3.4_10.10.0.100 dst-address=1.2.3.4 to-addresses=10.10.0.100
    • /ip firewall nat add action=netmap chain=ispadmin_last_srcnat comment=ispadmin_NAT_10.10.0.100_1.2.3.4 to-addresses=1.2.3.4 src-address=10.10.0.100

 

ADD INTERNET SERVICE

  • The page "Active services" has been rewritten to new framework interface.
  • Billing information now also includes field "Invoicing day" where it is possible to fill in the date for invoicing of client service. This information will be used (when Invoicing part is rewritten to framework) to invoice client for whatever time period needed (e.g. from 15th of November to 14th of December). It is not applied yet.
  • Individual fields are now organized in a logical order for adding new internet service.
  • Fields "Access point" and "Switch" now provides also search option to fill in the name and find out search results faster.
  • Displaying of client IP address and IP of client's end device is now switched.
  • While filling in IP address it is now possible to define which will be used for NAT (mentioned above in article IP NAT POOLS) by clicking on a checkbox "Client NAT".

RADIUS POZASTAVENÍ KLIENTŮ

  • Suspension of clients which are authenticated via RADIUS has been customized. In the past when a client was suspended (e.g. because unpaid invoice) system refused authentication via RADIUS but there was a problem that client did not know if their service was suspended or disconnected due to some technical problems on provider's site.
  • Now it is customized and every suspended client persist authenticated via RADIUS but system forward them to a special info page where they can find information why their service is not available. So it means the same process as it is at standard Internet service without authentication via RADIUS.

ISPadmin 4.10 beta1

FIXES

  • Router graphs are now displayed properly even if the traffic is larger than Gbit/s on interface. In the past graphs were cut off on max. value of traffic 2.1 Gbit/s.
  • Mikrotik in version 6.18 and higher now returns API value about voltage on router (if supported) in new format to display this information correctly.
  • Fixed bug in invoicing of VOIP service where in the case of credit used and generating invoice for more than one month, the system counted with credit for one month only and not for whole pre-defined period.

NEWS

  • The tab Clients / Contacts now display row numbering for records in a table.
  • The tab Clients / Contacts now includes also filter (pop-up menu) to display clients by location.
  • In the client card (the tab Contracts) there is now possible to defined output format of sent contract from client card (PDF, RTF or DOCx). Default setting is PDF format.

REWRITTEN PAGES

  • Invocing / Overpayments / Returned
  • Invocing / Overpayments / Included - Export to XML
  • Invocing / Overpayments / Overpayments - Export to PDF
  • Invocing / Overpayments / Arrears - Export to PDF
  • Invocing / Overviews / Platby - Excluded payments
  • Client card / Statistics / Data transfer
  • Client card / Scheduling
  • Settings / Administrators / Administrators

INVOICING

  • In the client card (the tab "Invoicing" there are now displayed all client's payments (at bottom of the page) which has been accepted in particular year. By clicking on the loupe icon it is possible to display detail of payment.
  • The tab "Invoicing / Overviews / Payments" there is a new button "Excluded payments". By clicking on this button the list of unmatched payments. Next to that button it is possible to display list of the same in PDF format.

CLIENT PORTAL

  • In client portal it is now possible to display also a contract in PDF format. To display contract in PDF format it is necessary to mark contract in the client card for displaying in the client portal by clicking on the particular icon.

AUTHORIZATION SETTINGS

  • The tab Settings / Administrators / Administrators) has been completely rewritten to the new interface with customized authorization settings for Scheduling module. Newly there are no assigned in global authorization rules for "Masteradmin" and "Main Admin" administrators but it is necessary to apply individual rules for all administrators for scheduling. Scheduling module can be visible for all administrators which have marked checkbox "Use scheduling". If the checkbox is not marked administrator has no option to see, add or customize tasks to scheduling.
  • There are new 3 basic types of authorization rules for administrators for scheduling:
  • 1) Administrator - Full rights. It means Administrator can see all tasks with full option to customize them, make a new scheduling plans, etc.
  • 2) Leader - Full rights but only for particular group of technicians. In this case Leader is able to see all tasks with full option to customize them, make a new scheduling plans, etc. but only for particular group, so they are not able to see tasks of another leaders or their groups.
  • 3) Technician - Can see only those tasks which has been assigned to them but cannot see tasks of another technician in the same or different group. In the case of enabled authorization Technician it is possible to individually customize additional authorization like add, change or delete tasks.
  • Authorization for sending of e-mails with assigned in tasks or requests from Client portal can be enabled individually.
  • By this update all authorization rules has been replaced from older version to the new one but it is recommended to check validity of this authorization rules because not all authorization rules can be replaced automatically.
  • Authorization "Allowed Invoicing groups" - If a new invoicig group is added to the system, it will not be visible for all administrators automatically (except "Master Admin" authorization level) but it is necessary to allow visibility of the new group for particular administrator of the system.

VOIP SERVICE - BULK IMPORT OF PHONE NUMBERS

  • In the case of active VOIP service for client, there is an button "Another IP phones" to assign anothe phone numbers for this service. To assign new phone numbers as bulk there is now also possible to "Add range of IP phone numbers" by clicking on particular button.

NAT ADDRESSES

  • New tab added "Settings / IP Pools / IP Pools NAT". There it is possible to define ranges of IP addresses which are used to NAT private IP addresses of clients. Each NAT pool has option to assign in a router which is provided NAT on and also to define used IP addresses which will not be offered to clients in the system.

NEW SYSTEM VARIABLES

  • $DVBC_PACKAGES$
  • $DVBC_PACKAGES_PRICE_WITH_VAT$
  • $DVBC_PACKAGES_PRICE_WITHOUT_VAT$
  • $IPTV_DISCOUNT$
  • $IPTV_FLAT_RATE$
  • $IPTV_FLAT_RATE_NOTE$
  • $IPTV_DEPOSIT$
  • $IPTV_CONTRACT_RENEWAL$
  • Further details about system variables are available under the tab "Settings / Contracts / Own templates".

MIKROTIK

  • While adding DHCP lease for particular MAC address the system checks if the MAC address has assigned any IP address dynamically. If yes, dynamic record is removed at first. In the past dynamic record was not removed but it caused (in the case of assigned IP address from dynamic pool) that IP address was assigned after timeout of previous assigned IP address.

RADIUS

  • Customized RADIUS to better identify disconnected clients. In some previous cases (e.g. link failure) RADIUS was not able to detect these disconnected clients properly and after re-connection clients still looked like disconnected.
  • While adding DHCP lease for particular MAC address the system checks if the MAC address has assigned any IP address dynamically. If yes, dynamic record is removed at first. In the past dynamic record was not removed but it caused (in the case of assigned IP address from dynamic pool) that IP address was assigned after timeout of previous assigned IP address.

ISPadmin 4.09

FIXES

Fixed bug about incorrect CRON function in version 4.08

PDF DOCUMENT CONVERSION TOOL

  • Added a list of supported fonts which are tested and fully functional in PDF conversion tool.
  • In the case of different font used the system may replace the font type by different font and displaying of converted documents can be different than original text documents.
  • Supported fonts:
    • Andale Mono
    • Arial
    • Arial Black
    • Arial Narrow
    • Calibri
    • Comic Sans MS
    • Courier New
    • Georgia
    • Impact
    • Times New Roman
    • Trebuchet MS
    • Verdana
    • Webdings

 

ISPadmin 4.08

BETA3

BUGS

  • Fixed some minor bugs reported by providers.
  • Fixed function for auto-conversion of text documents to PDF where some fonts had a problem to be converted correctly.
  • BASH SHELLSHOCK (CVE-2014-6271) problem corrected.

INVOICING - TIME PERIOD

  • In the tab "Invoicing / Invoices / Time period" there are now also displayed credit notes and now there is possible to sort invoices and credit notes separately.
  • In the tab "Invoicing / Bank / E-mail" there is now possible to work with individual payments even for email payment notifications received from a bank. So if there is any unidentified payment from the list, it is now possible to move only this unidentified payment to unmatched payment list instead of removing a whole email as it was in the past.

CLIENT PORTAL

  • Client portal now also displays information about total client balance below the list of invoices.

BETA2

BUGS

  • Fixed some minor bugs reported by providers.

MINICMTS

  • In the client card (in the tab "Statistics") there is now possible to restart modem by clicking on the restart button at particular modem.
  • Modem will be restarted in 10 minutes.

INVOICING

  • In the tab "Invoicing / Overviews / Invoicing" there is a row with details about paid, unpaid invoices and also created invoices which are still in due date.
  • In the tab "Invoicing / Invoices / Time period" there is a new column with a client name (with active link to their client card) with option to display invoice (by clicking on a PDF icon).

BETA1

BUGS

  • Fixed bug in system variables "$INVOICE_PRICE$" and "$INVOICE_PRICE$_WITHOUT_VAT" for invoices. System variable "$INVOICE_PRICE$" has been replaced by new variable "$INVOICE_PRICE_WITH_VAT".

NEW

  • Sending of SMS from the Client card is now possible to divide by number of characters. Settings is available in the tab "Settings / Syst. settingGenerals / " at the key "sms_divide_after_chars". Value "0" means that SMS will not be divided and different value defines after how many characters a SMS will be divided.

CONVERT A DOCUMENT TO PDF

  • Due to some displaying problems of PDF documents converted by Libre Office commponent in previous system versions we were forced to replace that by a new and more powerful commponent to convert whatever text document to PDF format you need.
  • Now it is possible to convert RTF, DOC and DOCX documents from their original formats and keep the same display in PDF documents converted with applied system variables.
  • In the case of upload of a new document (template) in the menu "Settings / Other / Contracts" the system will convert a document to PDF automatically in a few seconds. When finished a new PDF icon is displayed next to a text icon.
  • In the Client card the tab "Contracts" there it is possible to create a contract using a template already saved to the system or any different document.
  • By clicking on the original editable file it is possible to customize a text file and repeat uploadinf of customized document which replace the old one and convert document to PDF automatically.

NEW REWRITTEN PAGES

  • Client card / Internet statistic
  • Invoicing / Cash box
  • Invoicing / Overpayments / Overpayments
  • Invoicing / Overpayments / Arrears
  • Invoicing / Overpayments / Included

MIKROTIK

  • Mikrotik API version 6.18 and later uses different format of signal-strength, so the system was not able to draw graphs of signal. New format of Mikrotik API is now implemented.

UBNT EDGE ROUTER

  • UBNT Edge routers are now supported.
  • In the tab "Routers" there is now possible to select also router type "Ubiquiti Edge Router".
  • System will display basic details (interface, CPU, atd.) and start to draw graphs of transfers and CPU loading in a few minutes after access details are inserted in.

RADIUS

  • If RADIUS is activated on particular router the system now supports authentication of clients to wireless access list. Before a client is connected on AP their MAC address is authenticated first via RADIUS and if sucessful connect a client to AP.
  • Now it is also possible to provide shaping on upstream router to authenticate clients via RADIUS. It is suitable for those who authenticate clients via RADIUS with only 1:1 aggregation but neet to do aggregation on central shaper device. There it is possible to select upstream router (from pop-up menu "Provide QOS on router") for shaping.

SCHEDULING

  • When mouse-over a task (in the tab "Scheduling / Calendar") the system displays info window with a task details. Now it is possible to click on a task name to display task details like documents, contracts, solution details and a task history with option to edit this task directly.
  • When adding information about task solution the system automatically fill in a name of currently logged in technician.
  • A task page display is updated to the new design.
  • Pop-up menu Client now displays also client ID in the case of more clients with the same names.
  • When a task is added by a "Head technician" the system displayes only those technicians which are assigned to a particular head technician.

INVOICING

  • In the tab "Invoicing / Invoices / Time period" it is now possible to display detailed list of invoices for particular period.
  • Cash receipts now displays also a client ID (assigned VS) for better identification.
  • In the tab "Invoicing / Bank / Import" system now offers only those import files which are available for particular system localization (a bank import options used in specific country).

HN LOCALIZATION (HONDURAS)

  • "BANCO DE OCCIDENTE" and "BANCO DE PAIS" bank import files are now supported to accept bank transfer payments. In the tab "Invoicing / Bank / Import" it is now possible to import these types of bank files with money transfers.

NZ LOCALIZATION (NEW ZEALAND)

  • "Bank of New Zealand" bank import file is now supported to accept bank transfer payments. In the tab "Invoicing / Bank / Import" it is now possible to import this type of bank file with money transfers.

ISPadmin 4.07

BETA3

FIXES

  • Fixed some minor bugs reported by providers.

NEWS

  • In the tab Other / Export / Clients there are two new columns added for export Min. fixed time of contract and Auto Renewal of the contract.

BETA2

FIXES

  • Fixed some minor bugs reported by providers.

NEWS

  • In the tab Other / Import / IPEX there is now possible to on a number of matched and not matched records to display detailed list of telephone numbers

SCHEDULING

  • Fixed some bugs reported by providers.
  • The new form of adding task is newly possible to save without necessity to fill in the Client number or router.
  • Faster form loading thanks to a customized list selection of clients. Now there are displayed 50 pre-filled clients and the list is automatically updated when writting in to the selection field.
  • Scheduling now includes also long-duration tasks. Task is displayed in a daily plan at the row with unspecified time. In a weekly and monthly plan these tasks are resized over particular days.
  • E-mail setting is available in the tab "Settings / Syst. settings / Scheduling" by the key "planning_email_from" and "planning_email_from_txt". Please check settings!
  • While editting task there is now displayed magnifying glass icon next to the client name. By clicking on the icon the Client card of particular client will be displayed.
  • When mouseover a task in the calendar the system will display detailed information about the task. Newly it is possible to display a list of service interventions by clicking on the assigned icon.

IP POOLS

  • In the tab Settings / Syst. settings there is a new tab "IP POOLS".
  • Here it is possible to add ranges for clients connected through RADIUS. In the past it was necessary to add the range of IP addresses for RADIUS for each router what was is not very practical.
  • While adding IP poll for RADIUS it is now possible to select routers from a pop-up menu which are this IP range assigned for. IP addresses from pre-defined pool are will be offered while adding new Internet services only for those clients which are connected to a particular router. Every range may have more assigned routers using CTRL button while selecting routers from the pop-up menu.
  • Next version will offer IP addresses from the range while adding the new Internet service (not finished yet).

INVOICING

  • In the tab Invoicing / Overviews / Invoicing there are now displayed also overviews of columns by clicking on the number of paid, unpaid or total number of invoices
  • In the tab Invoicing / Settings /Inv. groups there is now possible to "Hide invoicing group" by a checkbox. If selected the system will not display data for chosen invoicing group.

BETA1

FIXES

  • Fixed some minor bugs reported by providers.

NEWS

  • Updated library which generates automatic emails sent by the system. Sent emails should not be no longer marked as SPAM.
  • In the tab "Client card / Information / Send SMS" there is now possible to send SMS also to contacts mentioned at client's contact persons.
  • There is not required to add SIM card number for "Mobile" service. It is enough to fill in only the number of mobile service.

NEWLY REWRITTEN PAGES

  • Client card / Active services / VoIP / Next IP phones
  • Routers / Routes / Add new range
  • Client card / Information / Send SMS
  • Invoicing / Overviews / Claims / Statistics
  • Invoicing / Overviews / Claims / Claims
  • Invoicing / Overviews / Payments
  • Invoicing / Overviews / History
  • Invoicing / Overviews / Reverse charge
  • Invoicing / Overviews / Changes hist.
  • Scheduling / Calendar / Add task
  • Other / Import / IPEX

SCHEDULING

  • Completely rewritten page where it is possible to add tasks to the calendar. By clicking to the calendar the system will display new window to add or edit task. The tab "Scheduling / Add" is still display as "origin" due to a sync with google calendar.
  • While editing individual fields the system no longer refresh whole pages as in previous case.
  • Newly it is possible to choose start / end of 5 mins interval.
  • Possibility to set up date and time when the long-duration task should be solved. If the date is set a technician will see the task in calendar as long as the task is finally solved.
  • If the task is assigned to a technician and then a client is chosen with this assigned task, then it is possible to select contracts which are displayed in the technician interface (changelog 4.03 beta2). There it is possible to display e.g. transfer protocol which has been signed by client.
  • Tasks for technician can be overlap in calendar. The technician may have more different tasks in the same day.
  • Actual sync with google calendar is not supported. Actual sync in "old" task adding tab ("Scheduling / Add") will be turn off in November. Unfortunatelly the new "Google Calendar Api" is not possible to implement yet due to a technical reasons (Google does not support API for management of more than one calendar like in the old API).

NEW SYSTEM VARIABLES FOR IPTV SERVICE

$IPTV_STREET_INST$ - Street ( installation )
$IPTV_CITY_INST$ - City ( installation )
$IPTV_Postcode_INST$ - Postal code ( installation )
$IPTV_FLAT_INST$ - Flat ( installation )
$IPTV_FLOOR_INST$ - Floor ( installation )
$IPTV_INSTALLATION_FEE$ - Installation charge ( installation )

  • Extended support of SK SIPO for following types:
  • "VPR" - Export file of paid orders for defined period
  • "PSR" - Export file with settled payments

VOIP INVOICING

  • If there is a credit option enabled for VOIP service (settings of VOIP tariff) and VOIP service has also assigned additional phone numbers, the credit is in that case applied for all assigned phone numbers.

INVOICING

  • Added SIPO support for SK.
  • In the tab "Invoicing / Settings / Bank / FIO" there is now possible to add mark to download statements for each account with description for better resolution in the case of more FIO bank accounts.
  • In the client card in the tab "Invoicing" there are displayed detailed information about payments for this info by clicking on the invoice detail icon.
  • In the tab "Invoicing / Overviews / Payments" there it is possible to export payments to ABO format for every invoicing group. Exported data can by filtered on page "Payments" (FROM-TO, fulltex, or additional filters). This option is available for CZ and SK localization only.

INVOICING - EXPORT TO EKONOM ACCOUNTING SYSTEM

  • Export to accountin system EKONOM newly also includes option to add prefix for export of invoices to this accounting system.
  • In the tab "Invoicing / Settings / Inv. groups" there it is possible to select and edit invocing group and add there requested prefix to the field "Export prefix for number line" (e.g. 000 nebo FAV).

INVOICING MRP/KS - ACCOUNTING CODES

  • There is now possible to export also accounting codes to MRP/KS accounting system for individual items.
  • If using of accounting codes is enabled (the tab "Invocing / Settings / Universal" using the key "accounting code" = 1), the system sets accounting codes for each invoice by settings "Settings / Active services / Accounting codes" and in the tab "Invoicing / Settings / Accounting codes").

ROUTER - routes

  • New rewritten page "Routers / Routes / Add new range" where it is possible to assign IP range dedicated for clients with AP defined in the tab "Access points" at a router.
  • If the IP range is defined for access point, so in the case of adding new IPTV service it is possible to select router and also the access point from the pop-up menu. After selecting the AP the system will offer only those IP addresses assigned to this AP. This solution is suitable for larger (mostly optical) networks where there are e.g. 200 VLANs and in that case the system would offer 200 IP addresses and a technician would not know which IP range is correct.
  • This system will be available also for other services when the system is rewritten to framework.

CMTS - MINICMTS integration

  • Newly integrated support of MINI CMTS headend developed by LICA company.
  • While adding CMTS headend to a router it is possible to select "MiniCMTS" headend from the pop-up menu but it is necessary to add IP address and SNMP community to access the headend (SNMP access is necessary to create through a CMTS management).
  • If all details are set correctly the system retrieves data about signal which are displayed in graph like at other CMTS headends.

TARIFfs

  • Customized adding of tariffs in the tab "Settings / Tariffs / Internet" where it is possible to select location, client type which the tariff is valid for and also if it is active. This detailed selection of tariffs will be used for adding of the "Internet" service. In the case when there is a lot of tariffs in the system which are mentioned for particular locations or connection types, it will be quite complicated to select correct tariff for a client. The settings if the tariff is active or inactive will be used in cases where the particular tariff is no longer offered to clients but old clients have this tariff still active.
  • While adding / editing tariff it is possible to select "Location" a "Connection type".
  • In the case of selected Client type "Cable" it is not possible to choose "Connection type".
  • In the list of tariffs (the tab "Settings / Tariffs / Internet") there are displayed columns "Location" and "Connection type".
  • In the list of tariffs there is a new column "Active" which is possible to click on and swith from active to inactive or back.

RADIUS

  • In the tab "Routers / Radius / Access log" and "Routers / Radius / Active clients" there it is possible to open "Client card / Active services" by clicking on the client name.

inventory

  • While moving goods to pending items on invoice there is now possible to fill in also the warranty period. By using system variable $USER_GOODS$ the system will display the same warranty period. Settings is available in the tab "Settings / Syst. settings / Inventory".

LOKALIZAtion LT

  • Cash receipt now includes also amount in cash rewritten to words

LOKALIZAtion IT

  • In the tab "Invoicing / Invoices" there it is also possible to download SEPA file for a bank for each month after selecting correct Invocing group.

ISPadmin 4.06

STABLE

fixes

  • Regarding customization of the system function for cutting off peak levels of graphs the key "rrd_graph_alignment" in the tab Settings / Syst. settings / General has been set to the default "0" value. To use this function properly, please set up this limit again to the required value instead of default "0" value as it is there now.

BETA2

fixes

  • Fixed some minor bugs reported by providers.
  • In the tab "Invoicing / Overviews / Invoicing" there was fixed bug in fulltext searching where, in some cases, it worked incorrectly.
  • Fixed bug in the tab "Invoicing / Overviews / Invoicing" where, in the case of disabled accounting codes (in Invoicing settings) the system did not display detail by clicking on the checkbox "Show statistic for individual services".
  • Fixed bug in the tab "Invoicing / Invoices / Time period" where were counted also pro-forma invoices. It is fixed now and there are counted only official invoices.
  • E-mails from ERA bank newly comes from different email address, so it was necessary to customize script for accepting incoming emails even from this new address.

CONVERSION OF CONTRACTS TO PDF FORMAT

  • After a contract in the Client card is created the system converts it from RTF to PDF format in a few seconds. When finished PDF icon will be displayed next to RTF icon.
  • Detailed information about conversion of documents to PDF is available in the changelog version 4.03 beta2.

BETA1

fixes

  • Fixed some minor bugs reported by providers
  • If there was any discount set for a service (time limited discount), so the system did not apply it for manually created invoice but only for bulk generated invoices.

news

  • In the tab "Settings / Syst. settings / General" there is a key "rrd_graph_alignment". This key provides better displaying of values in the graph (cut off peaks in graphs) in the case of communication failure between devices because in some cases there were Tbit/s displayed in the graph. By setting this value (in Mbit/s) graphs provides better overview. In the case of 1024 value graph will use max. value 1Gbit/s.
  • In the client card in the tab "Information" there are newly displayed also additional VS (variable sysmbols) which serves to match incoming payments for particular Client.

Newly rewritten pages

  • Invoicing / Overviews / Invoicing
  • Invoicing / Overviews / Accounting
  • Invoicing / Overviews / Clients
  • Invoicing / Overviews / Opening Bal.
  • Invoicing / Overviews / Pending it.
  • Settings / Other / E-mail templates
  • Settings / Other / SMS templates
  • Client card / Contracts / Send by e-mail
  • Client card / Active services / VOIP service / More IP phones

SMS

  • In the tab "Statistics / Server stat. / SMS" there it is possible to show not sent SMS messages (ready for sending).
  • Not sent messages can be deleted individually (clicking on the delete icon at each SMS) or it is also possible to delete them all by clicking on the button "Delete all NOT sent SMS".

invoicing

  • In the tab "Invoicing / Invoices / Time period" there is displayed time period of created invoices which might be usable for accounting purposes. Clicking on the checkbox "Show statistic of individual services" will display detailed information for specific services.

INVOICING - IPTV SERVICE

  • Implemented invoicing function for IPTV service.
  • Due to first implementation of invoicing for IPTV service it is recommended to check invoices when first invoices for this service are created.

scheduling

  • In the tab "Scheduling / Calendar" there is possible to display tasks schedule and the calendar for every day in a month. Clicking on the date will display scheduled tasks for specific day.
  • In the tab "Settings / Syst. settings / Scheduling" there is a new variable "planning_calendar_day_start", where it is possible to set up the first hour displayed in calendar. Example: If there is "8" value so the calendar will start at 8AM for scheduling.

INTERFACE FOR TECHNICIANS

  • In the list of Clients there are also displayed Clients' phone numbers.
  • If there is any service assigned to a Client's task, there is newly displayed also the name of service, IP address, MAC, etc.
  • Newly it is possible to display detailed transfer graphs if there is any Internet service assigned to the task.
  • Assigned tasks are synchronized with Google calendar and it is possible to display them on their mobile phone or other mobile devices.

contract - variables

  • New added variables which can be used for new contracts for IPTV service.
  • New variables:
    • $IPTV_SERVICE_NAME$ - Service name
    • $IPTV_CONNECT_FROM$ - Connected from
    • $IPTV_INVOICE_FROM$ - Invoice from
    • $IPTV_INVOICE_PERIOD$ - Invoicing period
    • $IPTV_CONTRACT_NO$ - Contract number
    • $IPTV_PRICE_EXCL_VAT$ - Price per month (excl. VAT / TAX)
    • $IPTV_PRICE_INCL_VAT$ - Price per month (incl. VAT / TAX)
    • $IPTV_PACKAGES$ - Packages
    • $IPTV_PACKAGES_PRICE$ - Packages price (excl. VAT / TAX)
    • $IPTV_PACKAGES_PRICE_VAT$ - Packages price (incl. VAT / TAX)

IT LOKALIZAtion

  • Fixed bug in displaying of total amount on postal money orders when the total amount is automatically rewritten to the text.

ISPadmin 4.05

STABLE

fixes

  • Fixed some minor bugs reported by customers.
  • Fixed bug, when it was not possible to generate monthly invoices.

ISPadmin 4.04

BETA3

fixes

  • New version of Chrome browser caused problems while administrator tried to accept payment in Cash. Source code has been customized, so it is no longer a problem to accept payment in Cash.

CMTS

  • CMTS headend CISCO UBR 10000 is now supported.

rewritten pages

  • Settings / Info Page / Inf. messages

scheduling / calendar

  • Fixed some minor bugs reported by clients about Calendar.
  • Currently displayed day in Calendar is saved to the database, so after next display the Calendar will show the date saved in database and not current day.
  • Closed tasks are green highlighted in the Calendar.
  • Weekly plan is again available to display. In previous version there were options to display Daily and Weekly plan only.

MIKROTIK

  • Firewall rules have been optimized.

SYSTem variables

  • $CENA_ZAKLADNI$ ($INT_BASE_PRICE$) - Will replace the basic price for the Internet service without discount and fixed price.
  • $TYP_SMLOUVY$ ($INT_CONTRACT_TYPE$) - Will be replaced by text "Time limited contract" or "No time limited contract".

invoicing

  • If there is any pro-forma invoice created with Postal money order on it, so there is not displayed Specific symbol (SS) as an Invoice number because pro-forma invoices have internal negative number and it should not be displayed on a Postal money order.

RADIUS

  • If the RADIUS is used to authenticate access on MikroTik routers, so it is necessary to have set up parameter "interim-update" on MikroTik ( /ppp aaa interim-update) to a value higher than 0. If not, the tab "Routers / Radius / Access log" does not display access logs and data transfered details. As a new function the system provides auto-check of the parameter setting and if it is not set correctly the system will set it up to number 30 automatically. By this setting the system will provide sending of account information from router to RADIUS every 30 seconds and displaying of logs in the system.

IPTV

  • Each IPTV package has now option to fill in time period FROM - TO. This setting will be used for Invoicing of the service.
  • Customized counting of discount for IPTV service for Invoicing. Total discount is now counted from all fixed prices and package prices

BETA2

fixes

  • Fixed some minor bugs reported by providers

BETA1

fixes

  • Fixed some minor bugs reported by clients
  • In the tab "Clients / Contacts" there were not counted IPTV services to the total number of assigned services
  • "Mobile phone" service newly releasy the SIM number when the service is deleted and it is possible now to assign this number to the different MSISDN.

news

  • The tab "Other / Export / Optional" newly includes option to export clients by optional parameters to specify exported columns (data) to PDF or CSV file.
  • The tab "Settings / Contracts / Types" newly contains option to create own type / category of contracts and documents. If the type is set it is possible to select it while creating or editing the contract template. It is prepared for higher usage in next versions of the system ISPadmin.

rewritten pages

  • Clients / Contacts
  • Client card / Invoicing / Detail (by clicking on the detail of created invoice)
  • Client card / Invoicing / Detail / Cash payment
  • Scheduling / Daily (Calendar)
  • Invoicing/ Invoices / Export invoices

inventory

  • Newly the system saves the date of items storage. In the tab "Settings / Code lists / Inventory / Goods type") there can be displayed information about the date of the last storage and option to sort records in this column.

INFO pages

  • Newly it is possible to display info pages for customers while they are trying to connect to internet. When the customer open browser and try to access to internet via port 80, so in the case of activated Info page the client will be able to see only tis pre-defined page with "OK" button to continue to access internet. Next time when the client wnats to access internet the Info page is not displayed again. This system of info pages is a good solution how to inform your customers about important notifications and to be sure that someone had read it before accessing internet.
  • In the tab "Settings / Info page / Info messages" there it is possible to define information messages. Each message can be assigned to any client to display. This selection is vailable by routers, Client groups and Client status.
  • Each message may contain text which will be displayed for customer.
  • Message for identified client - This message will be displayed to client which is found by IP address. In the matter of facts some clients might be behind NAT, so their IP addresses are not visible.
  • In these messages system variables are available to be used (e.g. Client name), to fill in client's details automatically.
  • Message for unidentified client - this message is displayed to customers which are not identified by IP address (e.g. clients behind NAT).
  • Only one Info page can be activated at the moment.

invoicing

  • The tab "Invoicing / Bank / Email" displays numbers of matched and unmatched payments divided by more contrasted colour background
  • The tab "Invoicing / Bank / Email" newly includes full-text searching option
  • Added new export type to EKONOM accounting system. In the tab "Invoicing / Settings / Universal" the key "export" with assigned number 22

New system variables

  • Added new system variables for contracts
  • $IBAN_POSKYTOVATEL$ - Supplier's IBAN
  • $BIC_POSKYTOVATEL$ - Supplier's BIC

MIKROTIK - UPS status monitoring

  • If there is any UPS connected to the MikroTik router (driver is installed correctly) and UPS is recognized, so in that case the system is able to monitor UPS voltage and in the case of failure to send notification by e-mail.
  • In the case of correctly connected UPS the system displays current voltage in the tab "Routers / Router Status / Routers" at each router column "UPS [V]". By clicking on the value it will display detailed graph.
  • In the case of failure of electricity system will send notification by e-mail to the address of administrator which is pre-defined in the tab "Settings / Sys. settings / General" by the key "admin_email".

MIKROTIK

  • FIREWALL and NAT rules have been optimized to a tree structure. FILTER and NAT will begin to use tree structure of rule like MANGLE. The scheme is follows:
  • FIREWALL rules
  • FILTER -| My rules (not marked as ISPadmin)
  •               | ispadmin_first_forward
  •                          | ispadmin_first_(order)_(comment)
  •                                      .
  •                                      .
  •               | ispadmin_service_forward
  •                          | ispadmin_SSH_trust_server_(IP)
  •                          | ispadmin_SMTP_trust_server_(IP)
  •                          | rtr_(router name)_ispadmin_up
  •                          | rtr_(router name)_ispadmin_down
  •                          | dev_(device name)_ispadmin_up
  •                          | dev_(device name)_ispadmin_down
  •                          | switch_(switch name)_ispadmin_up
  •                          | switch_(switch name)_ispadmin_down
  •                          | ispadmin_services_mac_up
  •                          | ispadmin_services_mac_down
  •                                      .
  •                                      .
  •               | ispadmin_basic_forward
  •                          | ispadmin_group_src_(IP range)
  •                                      | iptel_(tel number)_(id)_ispadmin_up
  •                                      | (Client name)_ispadmin_(id)_up
  •                                      .
  •                                      .
  •                                      .
  •                                      .
  •                          | ispadmin_group_dst_(IP range)
  •                                      | iptel_(tel number)_(id)_ispadmin_down
  •                                      | (Client name)_ispadmin_(id)_down
  •                                      .
  •                                      .
  •                                      .
  •                                      .
  •               | ispadmin_last_forward
  •                          | ispadmin_last_(order)_(comment)
  •                                      .
  •                                      .
  •               | ispadmin_drop_forward
  •                          | ispadmin_drop_NETWORK
  •                          | ispadmin_DROP_SSH
  •                          | ispadmin_DROP_SMTP
  • This structure provides very detailed process of firewall rules and an effective pass with increased performance (it is not necessary to process whole firewall tree e.g. with thousands of rules to find out rule at the end of the list) but the system search only in a few "jumps" in the tree structure where the rule can be found faster because the system search in the specific number of rules regarding the network mask. The mask number (ranges divided by blocks) is possible to set in the tab "Settings / Syst. settings / Mikrotik" by the key "mikrotik_mangle_net_block". Anyway it is also possible to apply your own set of rules processed globally for all routers (Tab "Settings / Syst. settings / Mikrotik" by the key "mikrotik_default_fw") for rules at begin of the tree (the key"mikrotik_default_fw_last" for the rules set located at the end of firewall). This default set of rules can also contains individual rules for each router, which is processed only for particular router. Rules can be set in the router edit page filling in the items "First FW rules on the router" and "Last FW rules on the router".
  • Newly the system creates the list of IP addresses on the MikroTik router in "address-list" (name - ispadmin_DROP_NETWORS) , where all networks of Clients' ranges are written in to drop traffic for non-registered customers. While updating routers, the system no longer delete the list to add these new ranges but only disable the chain (forbidden) "ispadmin_drop_forward".

 

  • MANGLE rules
  • NAT ----| My rules (not marked as ISPadmin)
  •              | ispadmin_first_(chain name)
  •                          | ispadmin_first_(order)_(comment)
  •                                      .
  •                                      .
  •              | ispadmin_first_dstnat
  •                          | ispadmin_remind
  •                                      | remind
  •                          | ispadmin_info_pages
  •                                      | info_pages
  •              | ispadmin_service_dstnat
  •                          | ispadmin_trustserver_https__(domain)
  •                                      .
  •                                      .
  •              | ispadmin_basic_forward
  •                          | ispadmin_disabled_user
  •              | ispadmin_last_(chain name)
  •                          | ispadmin_last_(order)_(comment)
  • As in the previous case this structure provides very detailed process of firewall in NAT section and whole process is similar to process of FW rules. While editing router it is also possible to add specific "First MANGLE" and "Last MANGLE" on the router.
  • It is recommended in the tab "Settings / Syst. settings / Mikrotik" to use option "mikrotik_nat_disable_users" = 2, which provides applying of records of suspended customers in to the "address-list" and creates only 3 rules for each reason of ¨suspension in NAT instead of 3 rules for each suspended customer which, in the matter of fact, will decrease loading of routers while updating.

IPTV

  • Newly it is possible to assign unlimited number of Set Top Boxes to IPTV service
  • To create new IPTV service it is mandatory to assign at least one Set Top Box and next it is possible to add other boxes by clicking on the button "Add new Set Top Box".
  • Each Set Top Box can has own description
  • Each Set Top Box can has own information about locality, access point and IP address
  • Each router has option to assign IP range only for IPTV service (The tab "Routers / Routes". Next, while adding new Set Top Box, it is possible select IP address from the range assigned for IPTV service.
  • In the case when there is no IP range assigned for IPTV service, the system will offer IP address from the range for customers but only in the case when IP rage is the same for IPTV service and customers as well.
  • If the IPTV service is deleted, it is possible to display it in the Client card by click on the item from left menu "Active service" and next click on button "Show deleted services" and it is possible to re-activate it by click on the button "Restore".

ROUTERs - routes

  • In the tab "Routers / Routes" (Located at each router) there it is possible to add IP range with access point and assign IP address by this access point.
  • If "Access points" are pre-defined on a router, so it is possible to assing an access point to particular range (networks assigned for customers, voip, iptv ...). E.g. in the case of FFTx technology these access point may represent individual VLANs.
  • While adding new IPTV service it is possible to select router and access point. If the access point, which is assigned to IP ranges, is selected so the system will offer only those IP addresses for Set Top boxes which are assigned to this access point. It does make sense to use it e.g. in the case where there is 300 VLANs on the router where each of VLANs has own record in the tab "Routes".
  • This procedure of IP address selection by access point works for IPTV service now but in the next versions of the system it will be extended to other services as well.

scheduling - calendar

  • The tab "Scheduling / Calendar" has been completely rewritten and replace previous calendar which was available in the tab "Scheduling / Daily", "Scheduling / Weekly" and "Scheduling / Monthly".
  • In the right corner of the calendar it is possible to switch between Daily and Monthly preview.
  • In the left top corner of the calendar it is possible to switch Days by clicking on the right or left arrow.
  • Newly it is possible to drag and drop tasks in calendar by mouse and simply move tasks from one technician to another.
  • Each task can be extended by mouse to change or extend time of assigned task and it will also change the time of the task for technician where the task is assigned to.
  • Mouseover the displayed task will show detailed description of the task.
  • Click on the task will edit page of the task
  • Click on a technician name in a Daily plan (name of the column) will open following options:
    • Show Daily plan - Will show Technician's Daily plan in PDF.
    • Show Daily plan with finished tasks - Will show Technician's Daily plan including finished tasks
    • Send Daily plan - Will send Daily technician's plan to an e-mail
    • Show Weekly plan - Will show Technician's Weekly plan in PDF
    • Send Weekly plan - Will send Weekly technician's plan to an e-mail
    • Show service interventions - Will show service interventions of technician planned for this day
    • Send service interventions - Will send scheduled service interventions to a technician's e-mail
  • There is a list of technicians in the left part of calendar where it is possible to mark technicians which will be the calendar displayed for. Click on the technician name will deactivate technician and their tasks will not be displayed in Daily calendar next click on the same technician name will re-activate displaying of tasks in the calendar. Pre-set is saved automatically and after next login to the system the calendar is displayed with the same settings of Daily plan display.
  • Under the list of technicians there it is possible to display coloured quide with description of particula task types and also "Statistiks of unfinished tasks", where are now displayed only unfinished tasks but in the next versions there will be additional details.

scheduling - head technician

  • Newly added "position" of head technician which is mentioned as supervisor of other technicians whose check tasks of subordinated technicians.
  • The tab "Settings / Administrators" newly has option to set up permission "Head technician" for the Scheduling part for each administrator. If set the system will display all technicians which are assigned to this Head technician.
  • In the case of "Head technician" authorization assigned the Head technician can see in the scheduling part only those technicians which are assigned to him. If the administrator has authorization as "Schedule admin" or "master admin" so in these cases they are able to see all tasks and all technicians and it is possible to display only those which they need.

CMTS

  • The tab "CMTS / CATV / CATV buildings" newly contains filter for better search by optional data inserted.
  • The tab "Settings / Code lists / CATV lines" newly contains filter for better search by optional data inserted.

LOKALIZAtion NZ

  • To separate decimal numbers in amount there is newly used decimal point instead of previous comma mark.

LOKALIZAtion HU

  • Invoicing of VoIP service newly includes prefixes 3620, 3630 and 3670 for "Mobile phones", other numbers have prefix 36 and are marked as "Internal calls". Other prefixes are marked as "International calls".

ISPadmin 4.03

BETA2

fixes

  • Fixed some minor bugs reported by Customers.
  • Customized VOIP IPEX import where the structure of SOAP interface has been changed from the supplier's side.
  • Fixed a bug about incorrectly displayed data transfer graphs of cable modems.

news

  • The tab Settings / Code lists / Clients / Client groups newly displays the number of clients in each group.
  • The tab Settings / Code lists / Locations newly displays the number of customers at each location.
  • The tab Statistics / Client stat. newly displays total sales turnover even for DVBC and IPTV services.
  • The tab Clients / Mobile newly includes te a field for full-text searching.
  • If a client has assigned RADIUS client type, so it is possible to fill in SSID detail like as WIFI client type has.

rewritten pages

  • Settings / Code lists / Clients / Client groups
  • Settings / Code lists / Locations

AUTO-CONVERSION OF DOCUMENTS TO PDF FORMAT

  • Newly added function for auto-conversion of RTF documents (Documents and contracts) to PDF format.
  • When uploading RTF document into to system there is another function ran on background which convertes documents to PDF automatically.
  • Function to auto-convert documents to PDF is now available for cotracts only in the tab Settings / Contracts.
  • If the upload of RTF document is correct the system will create PDF file automatically in a few seconds and displays icon of available document in PDF format next to the icon with text format.
  • Anyway, RTF format is not ideal so it is recommended to check output file in PDF format and in the case of differencies found in the output file it is necessary to edit the original RTF file and use e.g. another font or line spacing. After customization of the original file it is necessary to upload the file again and check the result in PDF if it is correct.
  • If the auto-conversion of documents is not required, so this function can be disabled in the tab Settings / Syst. settings / General switching the key "pdf_automatic_convert" to 0 value.
  • Next version released will also contain auto-conversion of contracts in the client card.

UBNT - VERSION 5.5.8 SUPPORTED

  • Newly added support of another protocol communication with UBNT version 5.5.8 devices.

invoicing

  • Customized export to PL SYMPLEX accounting system. Data are newly exported in CP1250 charachter encoding.
  • Fixed some minor bugs in the tab "Invoicing / Invoices"
  • Improved export to OMEGA accounting system, where is newly extension to export "VAT control statement"

invoicing - bulk payments

  • In the case when created pro-forma invoices are paid by import file of bulk paments in the tab "Invoicing / Bank / Bulk", the system creates official invoices automatically. It is almost the same as in the case of standard payment via bank transfer.

BETA1

fixes

  • Fixed some minor bugs reported by Clients.
  • Fixed bug in cancelling payment in the Client card for FIO bank (CZ and SK only) where the payment affter cancelling still looks like settled in the tab "Invoicing / Bank / FIO".

news

  • In the Client card in the Tab "Active service" there is newly displayed Total call price for additional telephone numbers for VoIP service . There is also displayed total call price for previous month.
  • In the Client card in the tab "Information" there is newly displayed "Representative person" if set.
  • Switch management newly also retrieves MAC addresses from devices by the port where they are connected to. In the Tab "Routers" when mouseover the port on the switch displayed, the system will show data transfer graph and also "Retrieved MAC addresses" of end devices.
  • The Tab "Statistics / Client stats" is newly divided by the Service type to IPTV and DVBC.

rewritten pages

  • Invoicing / Invoices
  • Invoicing / Bank / Unidetified payments
  • Invoicing / Bank / E-mail
  • Invoicing / Bank / Supercash
  • Statistics / WiFi list
  • Settings / Code lists / Inventory / Inventory types
  • Settings / Code lists / Inventory / Type of Goods
  • Settings / Code lists / Inventory / Group of Goods
  • Settings / Code lists / Inventory / Suppliers
  • Settings / Code lists / Task types / Add, Edit

scheduling

  • While adding new task to the system there is newly an option to set dead line for technician to contact the Client.
  • In the Tab "Scheduling / Free" where are all Free tasks displayed there is a checkbox "Show this page after login". Newly in the case of marked checkbox the page is displayed only in the case when there is any Free task. In the past only blank page was displayed in the case of no Free task added.
  • In the Tab "Settings / Code lists / Task types" there is a new option to assing Requested documents to any task which might be required to upload to close (solve) task.

SCHEDULING - TECHNICIAN'S INTERFACE

  • Work on standalone interface only for technicians has been started. These technicians won't be able fully access the admin interface but will see only their interface with assigned tasks and details needed to solve tasks.
  • In the tab "Settings / Administrators" there is the new tab "Technicians" to add the technician with limited access to the system. Every technician has assigned own location to cover and other locations are not visible for them and it is used to schedule tasks for them. Every technician may have several "primary" and "secondary" locations to cover. Secondary locations might be shared with another technician (e.g. Due to a distance). Locations available while adding new technician can be set in the tab "Settings / Code lists / Locations" where all clients are assigned into.
  • Technician with pre-defined account can log in via standard login screen to the system but after login they see only their limited interface and assigned tasks from the Scheduling.
  • If there is any task with flag to contact the Client, so the technician can enter that the Client was contacted and when. It is also necessary to enter result of communication with the Client (e.g did not answer a phone call).
  • When the task is solved it is possible to close the task. If there is required to upload any requested documents the technician has to upload them before closing task and also enter description / result of the task.
  • Every task has an option to add note.

invoicing

  • Added new export type to ÚČTO accounting system (depends on localization). This Invoice export type can be selected in the Tab "Invoicing / Settings / Universal" by editing key "export" to value "20".
  • Customized invoice export to MK-SOFT accounting system (added missing XML tags).
  • Added new export type to OBERON accounting system (depends on localization). This Invoice export type can be selected in the Tab "Invoicing / Settings / Universal" by editing key "export" to value "21".
  • While sending Requests for payment (Reminders) the Sender e-mail is filled by address pre-defined for particular Invoice group in the Tab "Invoicing / Settings / Invoice group". If there is no e-mail set, so in that case system will use default address from settings located in the Tab "Invoicing / Settings / Universal" at key "billing_email".
  • Customized invoice export to POHODA accounting system for correct export for "Check VAT statement" whixch is newly necessary for SK localization.
  • Customized invoice export to MONEY S3 accounting system where are newly also displayed rounding of invoice amount also to the amount excl. VAT.
  • Česká Spořitelna (CZ only) has changed the format of bank statement for import, so it is customized in the system as well now (The Tab "Invoicing / Bank / Import").

invoicing - export of payments

  • In the Tab "Invoicing / Bank / Import" there is newly possible to save all payments to XML format by clicking on the "XML" icon at item "Print all payments for period". XML tags are newly included in XML file:

<invPrice>112.00</invPrice> Invoice price which the payment is matched to

<invPriceAddedToInvoice>112</invPriceAddedToInvoice> Matched amount of payment done

<assignedCreditDetail>

<creditId>1</creditId> ID in the Credit table

<creditPrice>65338.00</creditPrice> Amount added to Credit

</assignedCreditDetail>

In the Tab "Invoicing / Overpayments / Included" there is a new XML icon. By clicking on this icon the system will export Overpayment to the XML format:

<credits>

<credit>

<creditType>addToInvoice</creditType> Defines how the system will manage Overpayment (3 options)

1 - addToInvoice - Counted to invoice

2 - backToClientByBankTransfer - Returned to Client to their Bank account

3 - backToClientByCash - Returned to Client by Cash

<clientId>6012</clientId> Client ID

<price>400.00</price> Amount

<invSymVariable>35</invSymVariable> Invoice VS (Valid for addToInvoice type only )

<invSymSpecific>6012</invSymSpecific> Invoice SS (Valid for addToInvoice type only )

<invId>10</invId> Invoice ID (Valid for addToInvoice type only )

</credit>

</credits>

 

invoicing - SEPA payments

  • Almost all countries in Eurozone have a duty since 1.2.2014 to move to SEPA payments which are designed for all domestic but mostly for international bank transfers between EU banks. Detailed description of goals and purposes of this project is available at http://www.europeanpaymentscouncil.eu).
  • Due to this duty SEPA payments has been integrated to the system ISPadmin in the universal XML format SEPA CORE SDD which is designed for Direct debit payments only. The specific standard is pain.008.001.02 which fully replaced individual domestic formats for created Direct debit files sent to the bank in EU.
  • No domestic bank account number are allowed for SEPA payments, so it is necessary to change all domestic bank account numbers to IBAN so the to international bank account number and bank specification has to be changed to the BIC which is the international bank identification code. In other cases Direct debit payments won't be applicable for SEPA payments because of incorrect identification from generated XML file.
  • In the Client card (in the tab "Information / Edit") there are new fields IBAN and BIC, which are used as values sent to a XML file for SEPA SDD payments sent to a bank.
  • In the tab "Invoicing / Invoices" there it is possible to generate XML file with SEPA payments for every invoicing group for pre-defined period.
  • Against the duty all banks are not ready to accept XML format for SEPA SDD payments because of individuals for some EU countries done by EPC (European Payments Council) and that countries have an option to use their domestic modifications of SEPA formats, so it is recommended to check what format is acceptable in local banks to avoid situation of sending incorrect file to the bank for Direct debit payments.

MOBILE PHONE SERVICE

  • In the tab "Clients" there is the new tab "Mobil" where are displayed all Clients with active the "Mobile phone" service.
  • Every "Mobile phone" service newly has option to assign more phone numbers to the one Active service. The list of Active services displays also another assigned numbers. The same detail is displayed also in the Call list.
  • In the tab "Settings/ Active service / Mobile phone / SIM cards" there is the option to import SIM card numbers from CSV file. CSV must have follows format: ICCID; IMSI; PRESENCE; HLR_ACTIVE; BRAND; PARTNER_ID; HID; MSISDN
  • In the tab "Settings/ Active service / Mobile phone / Numbers" there is newly possible to add Ranges of phone numbers.

invocing - mobile service

 

  • Invoicing of the Mobile phone service is newly as automated process as the Internet service.
  • In the tab "Invoicing / Settings / Universal" there is the new Key "mobile_invoicing_offset" which defines what month will be used for invoicing of total calls price.
  • 0 - Current month (e.g. Generated Invoices for period 2/2014 = Mobile phone service for period 2/2014 and Total Call price from statement for period 2/2014 )
  • 1 - Previous month (e.g. Generated Invoices for period 2/2014 = Mobile phone service for period 2/2014 and Total Call price from statement for period 1/2014 )
  • 2 - Two months ago (e.g. Generated Invoices for period 2/2014 = Mobile phone service for period 2/2014 and Total Call price from statement for period 12/2013 )
  • If there is the Fixed price set for the service, so this amount will be used for invoicing.

PHOTOGALLERY - PHOTO RE-SIZE

 

  • Newly it is possible to upload a photo to the Photogallery with pre-defined width of photos. This function avoid situation when larger photo (than needed) are uploaded to the server and takes a lot of disk space.
  • In the tab "Settings / Syst. settings / General" there is the new Key "photo_default_width" which defines default width of uploaded photo. Height is proportional re-sized. Default value is 0, it means that a photo will be uploaded with original size.
  • Before uploading a photo to the Photogallery it is also possible to select different size of uploaded photo from the Pop-up menu.

IPEX

  • To be able use the IPEX SOAP gateway it is necessary add login name and password. Setting is available in the tab "Settings / Syst. settings / General" at the key "ipex_username" and "ipex_password". Login details can be found in the Admin interface provided by IPEX.
  • Account can be activated in the B2BISP6 portal provided by IPEX company in the tab Settings.

system backups

  • Added function to check sending of backup to FTP. If there is any problem on FTP server (e.g. It is not possible to log in), so backup has not been saved and Administrator will be informed about the event.
  • In the tab "Settings / Syst. settings / Backups" there is a new checkbox "Send e-mail about any FTP error" and also option to fill in the e-mail address for notifications. If not set the e-mail about failure will be sent to the default e-mail address pre-filled in the tab "Settings / Syst. settings / General" at key "admin_email".
  • The e-mail is sent only in the case of failure of FTP backup.

NOTIFICATION - CLIENT'S CONTRACT EXPIRATION

  • Newly it is possible inform the Client that their contract will expire. To enable function the contract has to be set as time fixed and setting is available in the tab "Settings / Syst. settings / General". The Client's e-mail address is required in the Client Card.
  • user_ending_contract_days - Defines how many days before expiration the email notification will be sent.
  • user_ending_contract_hour - Defines in which hour the e-mail notification will be sent
  • user_ending_contract_send - Enable / Disable function
  • E-mail template setting is available in the tab "Settings / Other / E-mail templates" where in the column"The Contract expiration" select appropriate template. It is also possible to use system variables for Client and also for the Internet service.

 

SYSTem variables

  • Newly added system variables for contracts. System variables can be displayed in the Tab "Settings / Contracts"
  • $STAT$ - Country (e.g. Czech Republic)
  • $STAT_FAKT$ - Country (For Invocing)

CMTS

  • In the past system retrieved transfered data of Customers from router sorted before CMTS. In some case it caused problem because some network topologies do not allow to retrieve data correctly.
  • Data are newly retrieved from Cable modems directly so it is no longer necessary to retrieve them from router as in the previous case.

LOKALIZAtion HU

  • Fixed bug in displaying of cancelled invoices.

LOKALIZAtion ES

  • Client card newly have an option to generate IBAN and BIC number by the bank account number defined in the Client card.

ISPadmin 4.02

BETA1

fixes

  • Fixed some minor bugs reported by clients
  • Fixed some bugs in CATV Access line editation (The Tab "CMTS / CATV / CATV access lines"). Optimized loading speed for pages.

news

  • In the Tab Other / Tools there is a new tool to clean up log table of Radius authentication for cases when the table contains a lot of records which are old and it is no longer important to store them. This tool provides displaying of records by months and data can be cleared within pre-defined period (FROM - TO)
  • The Radius button in the Client card newly displays number of the Radius services and it is visible for Clients with the Radius service only.
  • While editing switch in the Tab "Routers" there is newly possible to change router where the switch is assigned to.

ROUTERs - RADWIN

  • Newly added support of RADWIN routers.
  • While adding router in the system there is a new option to selected "Radwin" router type. If selected, the system provides communication with this router automatically and starts to draw graphs of data transfers on interfaces and also WiFi signal strength of connected clients, so it is similar to UBNT routers.

INVOICING - EXPORT TO THE OMEGA KROS ACCOUNTING SYSTEM

  • While exporting to the OMEGA KROS accounting system the ISPadmin exports also accounting codes from settings "accounting_code_for_service" and "accounting_code_for_demand".

invoicing

  • Auto-sent emails with invoices newly includes e-mail address and description (Name) by Invoice group setting (the Tab "Invoicing / Setting / Inv. group").

rewritten pages

  • Client card / Active service / Internet / Other IP addresses
  • Client card / Active service / Internet / Subordinated service

ISPadmin 4.01

BETA2

fixes

  • Fixed some minor bugs reported by clients.

news

  • Import of bank transfer statements from FIO bank is newly ran once per hour to import data from current day.
  • Newly the system retrieves MAC addresses which communicates via switch. These MAC addresses are displayed in the tab "Routers". Mouseover the port of the switch will display details of the port. MAC addresses which communicates via the switch are displayed in the tab "Retrieved MAC addresses"

rewritten pages

  • Routers / Radius / Access log
  • Routers / Radius / Active Clients
  • Client card / Radius
  • Client card / Photogallery
    + There is also possible to manage images by directories
    + Newly it is possible to import unlimited number of images at once
    + Displayed thumbnails of faster preview
  • Invoicing / Bank / FIO

BETA1

fixes

  • Fixed some minor bugs reported by users.
  • The Tatrabank (SK only) has modified e-mail format of incoming payments, so this new format has been updated in the system as well.
  • CANOPY devices with version of FW Platform:11/112211 has changed the communication format of SNMP what caused that displayed connection frequency was 100x higher than real number of connections.
  • Notes are now sorted from the newest (on the top) to the oldest in the Client card in Information tab.
  • Amplifier graphs for cable type clients (connected via CMTS) newly do not display Signal graphs of disconnected clients.

news

  • Scripts which manages SVM microwave connection points and communication with SNMP devices have been optimized.
  • Header now contains the name of currently logged on administrator.
  • In the tab "Scheduling / Report" there is a new checkbox "Checked only" which display only those tasks which were authorized before.
  • In the Client card in the Tab "Contracts" the list of contracts newly contains a new column "Display in CP". By clicking on the icon it is possible to select contrats which will be displayed in the Client portal.
  • The tab "Statistics / Server stat. / Graphs" newly contains graph of HDD loading with parameters retrieved by command iostat.
  • If the Internet service has set Speed limit as 0/0 (unlimited), the client will see text "Unlimited" when log in to their Client portal and check tariff setting. In the past the Client saw speed limit 0/0 as in the admin interface.
  • In the tab "Other / Export / Clients" the export file newly includes the column "Client balance" as well.
  • New system variable added. Variable $FAX$ is now available to be used in contracts.

rewritten pages

  • Settings / Code lists / CATV access line
  • Client card / Invoicing
  • Client card / Radius
  • Settings / Code lists / Inventory

invoicing

  • In the tab "Invoicing / Bank / Import" there it is possible to save payments in th XML format. "XML" icon is located on the top of the table next to the link "Print all payments for period".
  • In the tab "Invoicing / Settings" there is a new key "voip_dont_show_null_records_invoice" (moved from tab "Settings / Sys. settings / General". If set to value 1 the invoice will show only those phone numbers which are active, it means there isn't null value for calls in the month. Phone numbers without any call (zero value) won't be displayed on the invoice.
  • In the Client card in the tab "Active services" there are newly displayed total prices for services with and without VAT.

ipex MOBILe service

  • Newly added support of Mobile Virtual Operator - IPEX (CZ only as we know).
  • Mobile service can be added in the Client card. After setting up the communication with IPEX SOAP gateway the system is able to retrieve data about mobile phone calls and display list of calls in the Client card for particular Client.
  • To activate communication with IPEX SOAP gateway it is necessary to fill in following details in the tab "Settings / Sys. settings / General"
    • ipex_import_mobile_service = 1
    • voipex_username = Username to access SOAP gateway
    • voipex_password = Password to access SOAP gateway
  • If everything is set correctly the system will retrieve calls in 15 minutes. These calls it is possible to display on the page in tab "Other / Import / IPEX". There are also displayed complete statistics of calls made, SMS, MMS, etc. Statistics are displayed by months including information how many mobile phone numbers has been matched by the system and how many not. By clickin on the number it is possible to display detailed statistics or edit setting of the Mobile service to work correctly.

LOKALIZAtion IT

  • Displaying of Italian invoices has been customized. Invoices newly contains Issue date of the invoice also in the description text on the invoice.

ISPadmin 4.00

STABLE

invoicing

  • The Tab "Invoicing / Overviews / Accounting" now includes option to export in CSV format.
  • In the Tab "Invoicing / Bank / Import" there is now possible to export all payment to XML format at item Print all payment for period by clicking on the XML icon.

update details

  • Update to version 4.00 can be done only from version 3.74. In the case of any older system version it is necessary to run command "ispadmin_update stable" which will display detail of your current system version and also information how to update system to the version 3.74 by the command "ispadmin oldstable". By this command the system will be updated to version 3.74 and after that it will be possible to update system to version 4.00.
  • Recommended procedure of system update in the case of version older than 3.74:

   1)  ispadmin_update stable  ( test of your current version )
   2)  ispadmin_update oldstable   ( update on 3.74 )
   3)  ispadmin_update stable  ( update on 4.00 )

  • In the case of any questions contact our technical support to e-mail This email address is being protected from spambots. You need JavaScript enabled to view it.

BETA5

fixes

  • Fixed some minor bugs reported in previous version.

news

  • Mouse middle button now contains function to open new browser panel with submenu of the main tab in the system menu.
  • In the Client card while creating contract in PDF format there is a new option to display preview of contract before saving to the system.
  • In the tab "Setting/ Syst. setting / General" there is a new key "voip_dont_show_null_records_invoice". If set to value 1 the invoice will show only those phone numbers which are active, it means there isn't null value for calls in the month. Phone numbers without any call (zero value) won't be displayed on the invoice.

BETA4

fixes

  • Fixed some minor bugs reported in previous version.
  • Updated import format of bank statement from VUB bank which has changed format of bank statements.



news

  • Customized displaying and selection of available languages in the system. Newly the header of the page display chosen language (localization). Mouseover the icon of chosen language will display other available language.


invoicing

  • Export of invoices to the accounting program STEREO newly includes also Client number in the field "PAR_ZNAK".
  • Export of invoices to the accounting program POHODA contained fixed text before. Newly it is possible to define own text on the invoice in the tab"Invoicing / Settings / Universal" using the key "export_popis_faktury".

mobile service

  • Newly supported Mobile phone service. This service provides register and management of SIM cards and mobile phone numbers for Virtual operators. Currently the service is not connected to any virtual operator (MVNO) but we are working on that to the next versions.
  • In the tab "Settings / Active services / Mobile / Numbers" there it is possible to assign mobile phones numbers assigned to any virtual operator. In the next versions there will be possible to add whole ranges of mobile phone numbers (assigned blocks of numbers from telephone operator).
  • In the tab "Settings / Active services / Mobile / SIM cards" there it is possible to add SIM cards assigned by telephone operator which contains IMSI and ICCID code. All these details it is possible to add to the Code list. In the next versions it will be possile to do data import from CSV format.
  • In the Client card there it is possible to add new active service chosing the "Mobile" service. To add Mobile service it is necessary to fill in some required details like Name of the service, Connection date, telephone number, SIM number, etc.

BETA3

fixes

  • Fixed bugs reported in previous version.
  • Fixed bug in displaying of some items according to different permission rules assigned to administrator.

news

  • In the Client card the left menu link with "Active services" newly contains also number of active services assigned to the client for fast preview of number of active services.
  • In the Client card the left menu also contains number of records in following menu tabs: "Contracts", "Interventions" and "Photogallery".
  • Every day (5:30AM) the system checks database for any table failure, if found the system will send e-mail to administrator with information about database table failure and also information how to repair table.
  • In the Client card when the graph of WiFi signal is displayed there is also displayed channel where the client is connected to.


optimization for multi-core cpu

  • Optimization of process for retieving data from MikroTik and UBNT devices has been done. Newly the system checks information about CPU and total system loading and use that for time-sync of running processes for communication with routers what should make faster communication with routers.


IPTV service

  • Added IPTV service for managment and billing the IPTV services.
  • In the next versions it is planned to provide communication with middleware interfaces of IPTV providers. Currently there is possible to add individual rates (programme packages) for particular client.
  • IPTV service is currently not included in bulk billing.
  • In the Tab Settings / Tariffs / IPTV there it is possible to add packages provided by your IPTV provider. To add package there it is necessary to fill in the name of package, abbreviation (used for billing), price and also the Tariff ID (provided by IPTV provider) for matching of tariffs between IPTV middleware and the system ISPadmin.
  • IPTV service can be added by the same way as other Active services in the Client card. There is alos necessary to fill in all required fields and coose to appropriate tariff from defined menu. The last fields includes technical part of connection between ISPadmin and another middleware. There it is necessary to enter Set-top box unique serial number, PIN for setting of additional services directly via set-top box, IP address and MAC address of Set-top box.

 

BETA2

fixes

  • Fixed some minor bugs reported by clients.
  • Customized import format of UNICREDIT bank statement where the e-mail format has been changed.
  • Fixed bug in the Invoicing module where the partial payment and customization of the invoice date caused incorrect displaying of the invoice in Client card.

 

BETA1

  • The core of the system is newly rewritten to the framework. This new interface will help for future development of new functions. Currently there is rewritten the core of the system and some other basic pages. Every future update will contain another system pages rewritten to the framework.
  • Because of system requirements PHP 5.3 and Debian 6 version are required so it won't be possible to update system at older version of the system ISPadmin.
  • Because of the newest (framework) version of the system ISPadmin it is not possible to downgrade version 4.00 beta 1 to the version 3.x!


rewritten pages

  • Login screen
  • Bookmarks
  • Client card (Tabs)
  • Client card / Information
  • Client card / Active services (Preview of Active services)
  • Client card / Contracts
  • Settings / Contracts
  • Invoicing / Settings / Bank - e-mail
  • Invoicing / Settings / Accounting codes
  • Invoicing / Settings / Cashbook / Category
  • Invoicing / Settings / Cashbook / Group
  • Invoicing / Settings / Notice
  • Invoicing / Settings / Bank / FIO
  • Invoicing / Settings / Bank / E-mail
  • Invoicing / Bank / FIO / List of deleted payments



News

  • E-mail queue in the bookmark Statistics / Server stat. / E-mail / Queue newly contains option to delete e-mails which have not been sent yet. This function is available for "Masteradmin" administrators only.
  • Pages for sending Bulk SMS and Documents (bookmark Other / Bulk / SMS and Other / Bulk / Documents) now contains also option to select new item in details named as "Without e-mail address". Using this selection the system will send SMS or generate Document only for that clients which do not have set any e-mail address.
  • Newly the system daily checks graphs for peak levels higher than Gbit/s. If yes, system makes correction to avoid incorrect displaying of graphs.
  • These peak levels may ocurr e.g. in the case of communication with router on the packet loss rate line.
  • In the bookmark Other / VoIP import there is a new item in the option Type named as VOIP trunk VNET, which enables option to import data from VNET VoIP operator.



MIKROTIK

  • Released some minor optimalizations for version 6.x


invoicing

  • Added new export option to the SYMPLEX accounting software which is used in Poland. Export can be set-up in the bookmark Invoicing / Settings / General using the key "export".


invoicing - IMPORT FIO

  • In the case of used import of bank statements from FIO bank (detailed description in the changelog version 3.74) it is now possible to move unmatched payment to unidentified payments like the e-mail import function has.
  • Added support for more FIO bank accounts.

invoicing - check of the correct account number on the invoice

  • If the system contains more Invoicing groups and each of them has different bank account number, so it is newly possible to check correctness of the bank account number for particular Invoicing group.
  • In the bookmark Invoicing / Settings / Universal there is a key "matching_payment_by_account". When the key is set to value "1" the system checks imported payment statements for correctness of bank account number for the Invoicing group and if it is not correct so the payment is marked as unmatched and it is possible to match it manually later.

SCHEDULING

  • If the task is closed the Masteradmin has an option to check task in edit mode. By clicking on the "Check" button the system will save information Who and When the task was checked by. This detail is also visible in the task history.


INTEGRATION OF THE REQUEST FORM

  • Integrated request form for communication between the system ISPadmin and end Client. If the client fill in the request form (e.g. on provider website) the data are sent to the system and it is not necessary to fill in client details in the system manually. Data sent from Request form are available in the tab "Clients / Requests".
  • This function will not work without correct request form for new clients displayed on webpage.
  • By clicking on the icon in the bookmark "Clients / Requests" it is possible to create new client using details send by the request form (name, address, etc.).
  • Activation of the Request form is possible in the bookmark Settings / Syst. settings / General setting up the key "service_request_form" to value 1.
  • Afterwards it is necessary to create and place the Request form on your webpage where is also necessary to create appropriate fields (INPUTBOX). Before using the form it is necessary to add source code mentioned below on your webpage with Request form to send new customer's details to the system ISPadmin properly.
  • In the source code there is necessary to replace variable $ISPadminDomain by the real URL address of ISPadmin interface.
  • Form fields must be strictly named by the codes mentioned below (e.g. web_form_input_name-name, web_form_input_name-city ...)

Example: <input type="edit" name="web_form_input_name-name" > ...... In other cases the data won't be saved to the system correctly.

----- BEGIN of the Source code to place on ISP's webpage -----



$ISPadminDomain = "server.ispadmin.eu:80"; /* Domain of your Support interface in ISPadmin, e.g.: support.ispadmin.eu or demo.ispadmin.eu:81 */


/* $_POST[] params fill of your web */


$name = $_POST['web_form_input_name-name'];

$surname = $_POST['web_form_input_name-surname'];

$street = $_POST['web_form_input_name-street'];

$city = $_POST['web_form_input_name-city'];

$zip = $_POST['web_form_input_name-zip'];

$email = $_POST['web_form_input_name-email'];

$phone = $_POST['web_form_input_name-phone'];

$download = $_POST['web_form_input_name-download'];

$description = $_POST['web_form_input_name-description'];


$vars = array( "name"=>$name, "surname" => $surname, "street" => $street, "city" => $city, "zip" => $zip, "email" => $email,
"phone" => $phone, "download" => $download, "description" => $description );


$ch = curl_init( $ISPadminDomain . "/service_request_add.php" );

curl_setopt( $ch, CURLOPT_POSTFIELDS, $vars );

curl_setopt($ch, CURLOPT_RETURNTRANSFER, 0);

$output = curl_exec( $ch );

curl_close( $ch );


----- END of the Source code -----

LokalizaTION CA

  • Invoices now displays USD currency in correct format. For example: "$ 5.99" instead of "5.99 $".


Lokalizace IT

  • If there is a type of payment set as "Postal money order" in the Client card, so the system will display pre-filled Postal money order on the invoice as it is used in Italy.

Contents

   1 3.74 beta1 11.6.2013 (EN)

       1.1 BUGS

       1.2 NEWS

       1.3 INVENTORY

       1.4 INVOICING

       1.5 INVOICING - MATCHING OF PAYMENT FROM EMAIL OF UNICREDIT BANK

       1.6 INVOICING - MATCHING OF PAYMENT FROM FIO BANK ( API )

       1.7 BACKUPS

3.74 beta1 11.6.2013 (EN)

BUGS

   Fixed but about data retrieving from UBNT units for FW version 5.5.4 and higher where were incorrect data about clients, signals, etc. In this version of FW the data structure were changed.

   System now checks IP addresses if it is not assigned to any switch to avoid conflict in already assigned IP address while adding new Internet service.

   Fixed bug in manual settlement of cash payment located in the bookmark Invoicing / Bank where the the button Back did not work.

   Fixed bug while adding a new client in the case when the Client number contained more than 19 characters and it caused overloading of CPU.

   Fixed bug about data retrieving from devices via SNMP what caused incorrect graphs.

NEWS

   In the bookmark "Statistics / Client Stats / By connection" there is now possible to show data even for particular invoicing group.

   In the bookmark "Other / Export / Clients - filters" there is now possible to export the list of clients to PDF. It is also possible to set up filtres to set up filtres to export only data you need.

INVENTORY

   Newly it is possible to assign goods from inventory to the particular invoicing groups. This function can be enabled in the bookmark "Settings / Syst. settings / Inventory" using the key "central_store_use_invoice_groups". When enabled there it is possible to set invoicing group for each goods and filter the content. Filter for invoicing groups is available in the bookmark "Overviews" and "Statistics".

   In the bookmark "Settings/ Administrators / Administrátors" there is now possible to enable / disable bookmarks in Invetory "Overviews" and "Statistics".

INVOICING

   In the bookmark "Invoicing / Overviews / Claims / Statistics" there is now possible to show statistics of claims sorted by the due date.

   In the bookmark "Invoicing / Overviews / Payments" there is now possible to show the list of all received payments and its types (cash, bank transfer, bulk payments, etc.).

   In the bookmark "Invoicing / Overviews / Accounting" there is now possible to export whole financial export to CSV by clicking on the icon.

INVOICING - MATCHING OF PAYMENT FROM EMAIL OF UNICREDIT BANK

   Newly it is possible to match payments by email send from the UniCredit Bank.

   Now the system accepts payment notifications sent by email and match them with invoices of clients.

   Setup manual is available in the changelog 3.51.

INVOICING - MATCHING OF PAYMENT FROM FIO BANK ( API )

   The FIO bank now provides API to match payments via their interface.

   To work properly it is necessary to set up the key "fio_api_token" in the bookmark "Invoicing / Settings / Other". The token can be received from FIO bank. If set correctly the system will daily (7AM) download and match payments for previous day.

   In the bookmark"Invoicing / Bank / FIO" there is now possible to show overview of received and matched payments.

BACKUPS

   In the case when backups are send via FTP, there is now possible to use variable $DATE$ (more in changelog 3.71 beta1) in the path.

   Variable mentioned above can be used for daily backups only. In other cases the backup won't be complete and not possible for backup recovery.

--- End ofChangelog_3.74-beta1"

Contents

   1 3.74 beta2 18.6.2013 (EN)

       1.1 BUGS

       1.2 NEWS

       1.3 INVOICING

3.74 beta2 18.6.2013 (EN)

BUGS

   Fixed some minor bugs reported by users

   Fixed a bug while importing a bank statement from UNICREDIT BANK where was a problem to accept higher amount than 1000 CZK.

   Auto-import of bank statement from UNICREDIT BANK is now available from following email addresses: This email address is being protected from spambots. You need JavaScript enabled to view it. and This email address is being protected from spambots. You need JavaScript enabled to view it.

   Duplication of payments after the import from FIO bank is now repaired

NEWS

   In the client card the bookmark "IP telephones" has been removed and it is now fully replaced by the "VOIP" service. In the case when previous bookmark was used by your company, please contact our technical department (This email address is being protected from spambots. You need JavaScript enabled to view it.) for further details and next steps.

INVOICING

   In the bookmark "Invoicing / Overviews" there is now possible to save invoices overview to the PDF or CSV format.

--- End ofChangelog_3.74-beta2"

3.74 - 27.6.2013 (EN)

STABLE version

Stable version contains all changes and new functions reported in versions:

   3.74 beta2

   3.74 beta1

WARNING

   Version 3.74 it is the last available version for OS Debian 4.x and 5.x. In the case when the OS isn't updated to version 6.x, the future updates of the system ISPadmin won't be available.

   Update procedure from OS Debian version 5.x to the version 6.x is available at http://oldwiki.ispadmin.eu/index.php?title=Documentation/OS_update/

   In the case of OS Debian version 4.x there it is not possible to simply update OS but it is necessary to do complete reinstallation of the system ISPadmin from installation DVD which is available to download at http://download.ispadmin.eu/. In the case of any problem with system reinstallation, please contact our technical department by email This email address is being protected from spambots. You need JavaScript enabled to view it..

--- End ofChangelog_3.74"

3.73 beta1 21.5.2013 (EN)

   Fixed bug in data conversion which could occured in some version of Debian 4.0

   Finished data migration and coversion of scripts to UTF8 encoding.

   Vecause of encoding to UTF8 it is necessary to set up again password for backups. Information about password change and the manual how to do this change is displayed after the login to the system.

--- End ofChangelog_3.73-beta1"

3.73 beta2 23.5.2013 (EN)

BUGS

   Fixed some bugs because of UTF8 encoding conversion

   Fixed bug at Invoice displaying (HU localization)

   Fixed diacritics in SMS

--- End ofChangelog_3.73-beta2"

3.73 - 27.5.2013 (EN)

STABLE version

Stable version contains all changes and new functions reported in versions:

   3.73 beta2

   3.73 beta1

--- End ofChangelog_3.73"

3.72 beta1 16.5.2013 (EN)

   Because of the newest version of the system ISPadmin it is necessary to unify OS versions of Debian, PHP versions and convert database to UTF8 encoding.

   After update the system will convert database to UTF8 automatically. Some localizations are already in UTF8 encoding, like RU, UA and LT and all data are alredy saved to database in UTF8 encoding.

   The system checks version of Debian OS. For the newest version the PHP 5.3 support is needed and it is already included in the Debian version 6.0 (Squeeze). Older versions of Debian OS (4.0 and 5.0) support only PHP 5.2, so it will cause problems with updates to newer versions of ISPadmin. Also Debian OS version 4.0 and 5.0 do not support security updates so it suitable to have the newest version of OS.

--- End ofChangelog_3.72-beta1"

3.72 - 20.5.2013 (EN)

STABLE version

Stable version contains all changes and new functions reported in version:

   3.72 beta1

--- End ofChangelog_3.72"

Contents

   1 3.71 beta1 25.4.2013 (EN)

       1.1 BUGS

       1.2 NEWS

       1.3 MIKROTIK

       1.4 SCHEDULING

       1.5 INVOICING

       1.6 INVOICING - UNIVERSAL EXPORT OF INVOICES

      1.7 INVOICING - NOTICE ABOUT THE INVOICE PAYMENT

       1.8 FTP SYSTEM BACKUPS

       1.9 GOOGLE MAPS

3.71 beta1 25.4.2013 (EN)

BUGS

   Fixed bug on postal money order displayed on the invoice. In the past there was displayed an amount to pay even if the invoice was issued after the payment of proforma invoice, so there should be total amount "0" instead of full amount as remaining to pay.

   Fixed bug in the invoicing of excess data which was incorrectly counted in the past.

   Fixed bug which occured while creating an Internet service, where the system displayed IP addresses which were assigned to the switch, as a free IP addresses.

NEWS

   Newly it is possible to set up Auto Renewal for item "Min. duration of the contract". It can be set while editing an Internet service at item "Auto Renewal of the contract". Auto renewal changes are also saved to the history of changes.

   In the bookmark Routers it is possible to set up polarity "Vertical + Horizontal" while adding or editing antennas.

   In the Client card in the bookmark "History" the items "Sent emails" and "Sent reminders" has been removed from the pop-up menu and they are replaces by the new menu item "Email history", where it is possible to display complete list of sent emails to the particular client. The page is the same as in the bookmark "Statistics / Server stat. / Emails / History".

   Newly the system do logging of restoration of already removed client in the bookmark "Statistics / Logger" in the item Client card.

   In the bookmark "Other / Bulk / Function" there is an option to make bulk change for items "show on map" and "Do not display delay in payment".

MIKROTIK

   In the version 6.x while creating new queue tree the system set up queue type to default-small (version 6 has set queue type as default), but it should be set to type pfifo, so not so optimal solution. Newly the system adds parameter type=default while creating queue tree.

SCHEDULING

   In the bookmark Scheduling / Overview' it is a new option to filter content by technicians which added the task.

   In the bookmark Scheduling / Overview it is a new option to filter content by the date of solution "'from / to" to find out how many andw which tasks has been really resolved.

INVOICING

   Newly it is also possible to set up Accounting codes for Pending items created by reminders generated. It can be defined in the bookmark "Invoicing / Settings / Universal" by the key "reminder_accounting_codes". This setting relates to auto and manually created reminders.

   Newly it is also possible to set up Accounting codes for Pending items created by invoiced task from Scheduling module. Setting is available for each row separately while creating or editing a task.

INVOICING - UNIVERSAL EXPORT OF INVOICES

   Newly it is possible to export invoices in universal XML export to be used for additional processing in accounting applications. The export contains all details and items from invoice.

   It can be set in the bookmark "Invoicing / Settings / Universal" by settings the key "export" to the value 18.

   After the setting it is possible to do export of invoices in the bookmark "Invoicing / Invoices" (by clicking on the XML icon).

INVOICING - NOTICE ABOUT THE INVOICE PAYMENT

   Newly it is possible to send notice about payment received for every client in the case of correct pairing of the received payment with invoice in the system. Thanks to this function the client will be informed by email or by SMS about the payment received by provider.

   Settings is available in the bookmark "Invoicing / Settings / Notice". There it is possible to define templates for notices. At each template it is possible to define the Invoice group and Client status to send the notice for and it is also possible to choose if the notice will be send by email or SMS with appropriate text. System varibles are also available to be used in the text.

   In the Client card there it is possible to disable option to send Notice for particulat client.

   All information are saved to the history log of sent emails or SMS.

FTP SYSTEM BACKUPS

   In the bookmark Settings / Syst settings / Backups there it is now possible to send backups to FTP server. Newly it is possible to use system variable $DATE$ in the item"Folder for saving backups to FTP server".

   If the variable $DATE$ is used, the system will send to FTP server last available FULL backup (NOT daily incremental backup). Backup is in that case saved to directory where the used variable is display in the date forma YYYY-MM-DD__HH_MM (e.g. 2013_04_17__13_24 ).

GOOGLE MAPS

   Dialog windows are now displayed even after the click on the connection.

   Removed switches are no longer displayed.

   If any client is assigned to the switch, the system will display connection to the switch not to the router where the switch is connected to.

   Fixed saving of position on the map.

--- End ofChangelog_3.71-beta1"

3.71 - 6.5.2013 (EN)

STABLE version

Stable version contains all changes and new functions reported in version:

   3.71 beta1

--- End ofChangelog_3.71"

Contents

   1 3.70 beta1 4.4.2013 (EN)

       1.1 BUGS

       1.2 NEWS

       1.3 INVOICING - NOTIFICATION SMS

       1.4 MIKROTIK

       1.5 GOOGLE MAPS v3

       1.6 INVOICING

       1.7 ALERTS

       1.8 SWITCHES

       1.9 NAGIOS

       1.10 SCHEDULING

       1.11 CLIENT PORTAL

3.70 beta1 4.4.2013 (EN)

Translation in progress

BUGS

   Fixed bug while searching of receipts in the bookmark Invoicing / Cashbox where there was a problem to find out receipts which was edited manually.

   In the bookmark Statistics / Wifi list are now displayed for UBNT units as well.

   Fixed bug at "Wifi scan test" when the test was ran every 5 minutes even if the setting was set to 20 minutes.

NEWS

   Newly it is possible to choose email sender from pop-up menu as a contract sender from the client card.

   In the bookmark Statistics / Server stat. / Emails / Historiy, where the history of sent emails is displayed there the column messageID is replaced by the column "Sender status (Delivery status)". Here it is displayed information if the email was successfully received by destination server or not.

   VoIP services now have an option to set IP address and the port of VoIP web interface as well.

   New system variables added (for contracts) "INT_SSID" which is connected to the Internet service. The variable returns SSID if it is set.

   Newly the system displays current number of client connected to the particular router or access point while adding or editing services.

   Newly the system provides checking of the "Status" of the client. In the bookmark Settings / Code lists / Clients / Client stat. there is now possible to set up e-mail address and number of days to send report about client status. When it is set the system will search through the databse and if there is any client which had crossed the predefined number of days with the same status, so in that case the system will create report and send it to predefined email address.

   In the bookmark Clients / Internet there is a new filter (pop-up menu) "Location".

   In the bookmark Clients / Internet there is a new filter (in the pop-up menu Details) named as "Without e-mail address" to filter clients which do not have defined any e-mail address.

   Export of clients (in the bookmark Others / Export / Clients) now contains items "Contract returned" and "Contract returned on". Export of the internet services newly contains Installation address and Date of contract returned.

   Newly it is possible to set contract auto renewal for item "Min. duration of the contract" which is available while editing te internet service by item "Auto Renewal of the contract". This detail is also saved to the history of changes in the client card.

   In the bookmark Invoicing in the Client card there is a new item "Log of sent emails" which will be display on the bottom of the page by clicking on the invoice detail. This detail contains information about sent invoice and it is also possible to check if the invoice has been delivered to recipient or not.

   Newly the system checks if the DFS is active for UBNT unit. If it is active, so the system will display DFS icon in orange colour at the header of UBNT unit. If it is not active the icon is displayed in grey colour.

INVOICING - NOTIFICATION SMS

   While sending invoice from the system it is now possible to send SMS with every invoice. By this way it is possible to inform end customers about the new invoice for the service. Marked checkbox "Send SMS" will enable option to write SMS text or select the template. Also it is possible to use system variables or these new ones for invoice sending:

       $INVOICE_VS$ - Variable symbol

       $INVOICE_SS$ - Specific symbol

       $INVOICE_DUE_DATE$ - Due date

       $INVOICE_ISSUE_DATE$ - Creation date

       $INVOICE_TAXABLE_DATE$ - Taxable date

       $INVOICE_PRICE$ - Amount incl. VAT

       $INVOICE_VAT$ - VAT amount

       $INVOICE_PRICE_WITHOUT_VAT$ - Amount excl. VAT

       $INVOICE_CURRENCY$ - Currency

MIKROTIK

   Fixed bug at graphs created from data retrieved from Mikrotik v 6.x while traffic was higher than 100 Mbit/s.

   After the client suspension the system will add to the address-list also all subnets assigned to the client in the internet service ( "Routed nets").

GOOGLE MAPS v3

   Google maps API v2 support will end on May 2013. The system ISPadmin now supports Google maps API v3.

   In the bookmark Other / Maps in the field "Find address" there it is possible to fill the address and coordinates which will find out the point on the map. Point is marked as character "A". By the next double-click on the map it will create the point "B" and also enable possibility to display terrain profile between these two points.

   StreetView is also available

   In the bookmark Other / Mapsin the column "Filtres" there is possible to select location and display only the routers which belong to the selected location.

   In the bookmark Other / Mapsin the column "Layers" there is a new layer added named as "Switches".

   In the bookmark Other / Mapsin the column "Layers" there is a new layer added named as "Heatmap". Locations of routers and other devices are on the map displayed by different colours which depends on the number of e.g. routers in the location.

   By click on the icon on the map it is possible to display basic details. By click on the link "Open" it is possible to get faster to the particular router, device or to the switch in the bookmark Routers.

   If the CMTS module is activated so it is possible to activate layer "Modems" on the map what will display location and status (online/offline) of cable modems.

   To switch Google maps API to v3 it is necessary to do follows steps:

       -- Visit APIs Console na https://code.google.com/apis/console and log in to your Google account

       -- Click on the Services link from the left menu and acivate the service Google Maps JavaScript API v3

       -- When the service is activated, click to generate the key on the page API Access in the section Simple API Access. Maps are using API key for web application.

       -- Fill the key to the bookmark Settings / System settings in the item google_maps_api_key_v3

INVOICING

   In the bookmark Invoicing / Cashbox there is now possible to do export to CSV format for "sent payments". In the export result the row for receipts starts with character "C" and on other rows starts items by character "I".

   While invoicing the DVBC service there is a new option to display prefix of "DVBC" servie on the invoice and rewrite it as needed (e.g. "IPTV"). In the menu Invoicing / Settings there is a key "dvbc_package".

   In the case of cash payment the system newly allows to accept partial payments as well. It means when the client comes to the office and pays only the part of the payment invoiced.

   Added the new system variable "CLI_VAT_STATUS" which will returns value Yes (in the case when Invoicing group is set as payer of VAT) or value No (in the case when Invoicing group is NOT set as payer of VAT). this variable can be used for contracts.

   Added the new system variable "UNPAID_INVOICES_AFTER_DUE_DATE" which will returns total amount of unpaid invoices after the due date.

   Newly it is possible to set discount validity date for client at "Internet" service. While adding a new service there is a new field "Discount TO" there is possible to write the date until the discount is valid for the service.

ALERTS

   In some situations the system did not retrieve information from MIKROTIK (e.g. voltage) and write null value to the DB RRD. The new option in the Alert definition "Include null values" provides option to do not include these "falsh failures or null values" to the average value.

SWITCHES

   Newly it is possible to assign pictures directly to the switch. The photogallery link as at the end of the row next to the "connection test" button. Mouseover the icon will display number of pictures assigned to the switch.

   Newly it is also possible to remove all clients assigned to the switch port by selecting the port and choosing option "Remove clients from port" from the pop-up menu.

NAGIOS

   In the bookmark Settings / Code lists / Nagios / Variables there are some new variables:

       -- nagios_host_notification_interval: Time period for repeation of sending failure notifications.

       -- nagios_service_notification_interval: Time period for notification sending about exceeding values of Ping parameters.

SCHEDULING

   In the bookmark Settings / System settings / Scheduling - planning_google_calendar_title there it is possible to choose own title for tasks moved to the Google calendar. Using variable $TECHNICIAN$ will replace the variable by the technicians's name for which the task is assigned for. If the title is not set the default "ISPadmin - Scheduling" title will be used.

CLIENT PORTAL

   In the bookmark "Send SMS" there is a list of telephone numbers where the clients can add the most used telephone contacts. Selecting the contact from the list will add the number as SMS receiver.

   Also it is possible to set up the text which will be automatically added to every SMS sent from CP. Text it is possible to set up in the bookmark Settings / System settings / Client portal by the key "sms_gateway_append_text". By the key "sms_gateway_append_position" it is possible to set up if the text will be placed to start or to the end of the message.

--- End ofChangelog_3.70-beta1"

3.70 - 10.4.2013 (EN)

STABLE version

Stable version contains all changes and new functions reported in version:

   3.70 beta1

--- End ofChangelog_3.70"

Contents

   1 3.69 beta1 (EN) 31.1.2013

       1.1 BUGS

       1.2 NEWS

       1.3 MIKROTIK - VERSION 6.x SUPPORTED

       1.4 MIKROTIK

       1.5 GOOGLE CALENDAR

       1.6 CMTS - TEMPLATES OF THE CONFIGURATION FILE

       1.7 CMTS - VOIP TEMPLATES

       1.8 INVOICING

       1.9 NAGIOS

       1.10 SCHEDULING

       1.11 INVENTORY

       1.12 MODUL DEALER

       1.13 REMINDERS

3.69 beta1 (EN) 31.1.2013

BUGS

   Fixed some minor bugs reported by clients.

   Fixed bug in the bookmark Clients / Internet while mouseover the Client's name sorted as last in the list of client (the bottom of the page). Displayed information window about client was out of visible area of the page.

   In the bookmark Routers the system displayed an error in communication with Linux routers via SSH even if the communication was ok.

   When the standalone invoice was created for invoice group which was not set as payer of VAT, in that case the system did not count Additional items to invoice to the total sum displayed on the invoice (bottom of the invoice).

   While sending email in the bookmark Invoicing / Overview with more than one invoice, the system now marks all sent invoices as Sent. In the past only the first sent invoice was marked as Sent.

   Fixed bug when the system automatically ticked checkbox "Apply firewall rules" after router edit, even if the checkbox was not ticked by user.

   When Emergency mode is activated there is aslo possible to tick checkbox "Include all reliant routers" what will decrease speed for all subordinated routers. This function use settings of subordinated routers for Nagios, so it is necessary to have correct settings of routers hierarchy in the Nagios. To enable previous speed for routers it is also necessary to tick this checkbox again to apply rule back for all subordinated routers.

   Export file in the bookmark Other / Export / Clients now contains also Notes written in the Client card.

   Now it is possible to add pictures directly to devices assigned to the router, so not for router only.The icon is located at each row of the device next to the Edit icon.

   The bookmark "Photo documentation" (in the Client card) now contains option to upload picture there not only displaying of pictures as it was in the past.

NEWS

   The bookmark Routers now contains option to sort displayed list by assigned devices to the router (E.g. AP, UPS, etc.). Sorting is available by clicking on the name of the column.

   Messages displayed in the bookmark Clients / Message board can be now sorted by columns or groups and fulltext searching option. Each message can be assigned to any group. Groups are defined in the bookmark Clients / Message board / Groups.

   Optimized communication with Radius server

   In the bookmark Settings / Other / Messages and also in the menu item Messages located in Client card, there is a new option to check "Show / Hide"checkbox which affects displaying of messages in the Client portal (CP). By this option it is possible to show or hide message and it is no longer necessary to delete it at all if you do not want to display messages in the client portal.

   In the bookmark Routers there is now possible to use fulltext search option even for IP addresses and the name of the switch.

   There is a new field "Card number" at DVBC service, where it is possible to write the Card number for encryption.

MIKROTIK - VERSION 6.x SUPPORTED

   ISPadmin now supports MK version 6.x. Anyway this is still not stable version of version 6, so it means that some changes may occur from the Mikrotik side in next version.

   The main thing in version 6 is different applying of Queue tree, where in the v.6 there is no default QT "global-in" and "global-out" but there is QT "global" only, so all QT created by system are sorted to this global QT.

MIKROTIK

   In the bookmark Routers / Router Status there is also serial number of the router (if available) and also Software ID (license number).

   Since the MK version 5.12 has been released there is a new command possible "/export compact". This "compact" backup is designed ti simply transfer configuration without needs to edit MAC addresses and other parameters for standard text backup. Binary backup is in the most cases not applicable when HW changed. Compact backup is saved in the bookmark Other / Backups / Routers in the column "Export Compact" at details about MK router.

   In the bookmark Routers / Router status / BW test there is now possible to tick checkbox "Show all graphs" and it will cause displaying of all available graphs of "Bandwith tests" if available (must be set "Create graphs" at BW test)

   If MAC filter of router is used, so in that case it is possible to add other MAC addresses (in the router settings) which will be written to the access-list of wireless interfaces. Another MAC address can be added by clicking on the icon "Add MAC" below the checkbox of MAC filter activation while editing settings of the router. By this function it is possible to allow connection to the wireless interface even by devices which are not written in the system ISPadmin.

GOOGLE CALENDAR

   Newly it is possible to synchronize scheduling in ISPadmin with Google calendar service.

If this function is activated, the system does one-way synchronization with task from scheduling module to the Google calendar. It means that all task from ISPadmin scheduling module will be moved to the technician's Google calendar. As written, this is one-way synchronization only, so it is not possible to retrieve tasks from Google calendar to the ISPadmin scheduling module.

   To use this function properly, it is necessary to set up synchronization for each administrator in the bookmark Settings / Administrator follows:

       Google calendar - Synchronization - Can be activated by ticked checkbox

       Google calendar - Login name (e-mail) - Login name to the Google calendar service

       Google calendar - Password - Password to the Google calendar service

   If everything is set correctly, the system does synchronization with Google calendar for every added, edited or deleted task.

   If the task was done before activation of synchronization, the system will not do synchronization. This function is available for newly added tasks only.

CMTS - TEMPLATES OF THE CONFIGURATION FILE

   The system now contains option to create own templates and configuration file with own parameters for particular modems.

   In the bookmark Settings / Syst. settings / CATV there is a new menu item named as "Modem template". There it is possible to create templates for config files which supports the DOCSIS standard.

   System allows to use variables for config file creation and to display real parameters set in the client card.

   Variables are follows:

       DOWNLOAD - Download speed set for client (Internet service)

       UPLOAD - Upload speed set for client (Internet service)

       DS_FREQ - Downstream Frequency. If more headends are used, each of them has different DS frequency which has to be written to the config file of the modem. This frequency is automatically retrieved from headend and then written to the config file according to headend where the client is assigned for. E.g. 130000000

       UPSTREAM_ID - If more back channels are used (US), the system will write Upstream ID to the config file of the modem when appropriate system variable "Upstream Channel ID" is used in the Client card / Internet service.

       USER_IPS - If resctriction of accesses from allowed IP addresses is enabled, the system will write to the config file all IP addresses set at Client's services (E.g. VoIP telephones). If the client change their IP address for own device (PC, router) to different than set in config file as allowed, so the system will not recognize allowed IP address and device will not work properly. It is also necessary to set up variable "cable_ip_filter" to the value "1" in the bookmark Settings / Syst. settings / General.

   The system now contains two default templates for config files named as "docsis_1.0_template" and "docsis_2.0_template". The first template supports DOCSIS 1.0 and 1.1 only and the second template supports DOCSIS 2.0 only.

   Each template can be tested by clicking on the "test" icon. In that case system will check the config file and written parameters and display the text preview of the config file which can be downloaded and checked if all parameters in the file are correct. System also creates binary version of the config file and if there is any problem while compilation of the binary file, system displays an error message.

   In the list of templates there is also column "Default". By clicking on the icon displayed for particular template, the template will be set as default for all templates which do not have its own particular template set.

   In the Client card / CATV service there is possible to choose template which will be used for modem selecting item from popup menu"Modem template". If there is no template assigned for config file, in that case the system will use default template which is set in the list of templates in the bookmark Settings / Syst. settings / CATV.

   In the bookmark Settings / Syst. settings / CATV' there is a new key "catv_snmp_modem_pass". There is definded SNMP password for communication with modems. This is important to retrieve data for Signal graphs of the modem and it is also defined in the template of the modem.

   Config files can be also generated bulk by command "/usr/local/script/ispadmin/update_conf.pl gendocsis". This command will generate all config files for modems and VoIP access lines.

CMTS - VOIP TEMPLATES

   Newly there is an option to generate config files even for VoIP part of cable modems. If modems with VoIP ports are used, now there is an option to generate complete config files for individual VoIP ports of the modem which contains information about VoIP access line (Telephone number and login details). If everything is set correctly, the modem will boot data part at first and then the VoIP part including settings of telephone lines in accordance to the predefined parameters. Parameters of each VoIP access line are the same as set in the Client card / VoIP service.

   In the bookmark Settings / Syst. settings / CATV / SIP template there is now possible to create templates for the VoIP part of cable modems. There is now one Default template which contains correct configuration for two access lines (E.g. S-A EPC2203).

   For both access lines there is necessary to set up DNS name of SIP server and IP address of the SIP server where VoIP access lines will be connected to. DNS name and IP address of the SIP server are the same (IP address = DNS name of the SIP server). In the default config file the SIP server is set as "sip.net-service.cz" and IP address is "95.173.193.60". These details has to be rewritten by yours.

   Following variables are available for use in the config file:

       SIP1_VOIP_NUMBER - Telephone number of primary access line

       SIP1_USERNAME - Login name for SIP server. Mostly it is not needed because the login name is the telephone number and for login the variable SIP1_VOIP_NUMBERis used. In the case when login name is different than telephone number, the system will use value set in the field "Portal Login" located at VoIP service.

       SIP1_PASSWORD - Password for login to the telephone exchange. This value is replaced by value set in the field "Portal Password" located at VoIP service.

       SIP2_VOIP_NUMBER - Telephone number of access line 2

       SIP2_USERNAME - Login name of access line 2

       SIP2_PASSWORD - Password of access line 2

   In the template list in the bookmark Settings / Syst. settings / CATV / SIP template there is the column "Default". By clicking on the icon available for each template, it is possible to set up default template for each modems which do not have set their own particular template.

   Each template can be tested by icon "test" in the simliar way as was described in the case of cable modem templates.

   The VoIP service form located in the Client card now contains two new items which are used for creation of the config file.

Next to the item Telephone number there is a checkbox "Generate configuration file". When selected, the system activates creation of config file and will be visible in the popup menu "Connected". There is also possible to set access line as "Primary". It means that it is the first access line of modem. The second option is "Secondary". It means the secondary VoIP access line of the modem. Because of facts that for both VoIP access lines only one config file is generated, both lines has to be "tied" together. For the same reason the system displays all telephone numbers set as "Primary" even for "Secondary"access line. Choosing the telephone number will tie number to the Primary one and to the particular config file. In the popup menu "SIP template" there is possible to choose template which will be used for config file creation. Template can be chosen only in the case when the telephone number is set as Primary. In other cases selection of SIP template is inactive.

   In the bookmark Clients / VoIP there is displayed details for each telephone number if the config file is generated for this number and what type of number it is (Primary or secondary)

   If everything is correct, the system will save config files in 5 minutes to the directory "/data/support/tftp_root/". Config files for VoIP has prefix "voip_"

   For correct booting of VoIP access lines of the modem it is necessary to add option "option voipopt xxxxxx"to DHCP. Without this detail the VoIP part will not get information from DHCP about location of TFTP server with config files and VoIP part will be inactive.

DHCP option has follows format: "option voipopt 01:04:d4:c0:a8:0a:0c;".

   "option voipopt" Information about localiton of TFTP server with config files for VoIP part of the modem. This TFTP server has to be same as standard TFTP server used for data part of the modem. The system counts with the fact that data part and VoIP part is booting from the same TFTP server (config files are generated to the same directory). Address of TFTP server must be the same as set in the key "dhcp_next_server" in the bookmark Settings / Syst. settings / Linux.

       "01:04:" - Fix defined prefix

       "c0:a8:0a:0c" - IP address rewritten to the hexadecimal format. In the case when the IP address of TFTP server is e.g. 192.168.10.12, so after rewritting the address to the hexadecimal format, it will looks like follows "c0:a8:0a:0c".

       ";" - Row must be ended by semicolon mark

   DHCP option must be added to the router in the bookmark "Routed nets" where are IP addresses assigned to the VoIP modems (Address range of the modem or address range reserved for VoIP phones). Every Routed nets can be edited and it also includes checkbox "DHCP option". It is possible to write own option when checkbox ticked. In our case it is for VoIP modem booting. Without this option the VoIP part will not be active.

INVOICING

   If Accounting codes are in use, so it is possible to set accounting code even for the type of the payment in the bookmark Invoicing / Settings / Payment type. This accounting code is addedd to the items on the invoice.

   Print postal money order details on the invoice is now possible for "BA" (Bosnia a Herzegovina) as well.

NAGIOS

   In the bookmark Settings / Code lists / Nagios / Variables there is a key "nagios_email_address" to define email address from which notification from Nagios are sent. If not ser, the system will use system email address This email address is being protected from spambots. You need JavaScript enabled to view it. to send notifications.

   There is also possible to set up Timeouts for notifications sending

       nagios_critical_loss_packet - Max. value of lost packets [ in % ] for Critical error error message displaying

       nagios_critical_treshold - Max. average value of the response [ in ms ] for Critical error error message displaying

       nagios_warning_loss_packet - Max. value of lost packets [in %] for error message displaying

       nagios_warning_treshold - Max. average value of response [in ms] for error message displaying

SCHEDULING

   Newly there is also the name of administrator who created task in the scheduling below the ticket ID. Name is displayed in "Daily" and "Weekly" schedule. In Daily schedule it is displayed only in the case when "Simple preview" filter is inactive.

   Task can be deleted from schedule only if the administrator has permmission "Masteradmin" or ticked permmission to "Cancel task".

INVENTORY

   Newly it is possible to select Accounting code for items moved from inventory to the pending item on invoice. Accounting codes can be set in the bookmark Settings / Syst. settings / Inventory by the key central_store_accounting_codes. To use this, it is necessary to have enabled option "Activate Accounting codes" in the bookmark Invoicing / Settings / Universal.

   While moving goods from Inventory to the pending item, there is an optio to choose item description. In the bookmark Settings / Syst. settings / Inventory there is possible to select columns which you need to have displayed as description and sorting.

MODUL DEALER

   Dealer can now choose own variable and constant symbol before invoice issuing.

   Dealer can delete unpaid invoice.

   Manually added payments as credit for dealer have now option to write also description (e.g. promotion, bonus, etc.). Items can be edited or removed only in the case when not invoiced yet.

   On the invoice from dealer there are follows details: Commission overview, commission overview for period and number of clients, manually added credit.

   Dealer can choose Invoicing group while creating own invoice to count only that items which belongs to the specific invoicing group.

REMINDERS

   Newly it is possible to set up time when auto-reminders will be sent. In previous version the system sent reminders every day / 7AM. Now it is possible to set up time in the bookmark Invoicing / Settings / Universal by the key "reminder_send_hour". Default value is still the same as in the previous versions, so it means 7AM.

--- End ofChangelog_3.69-beta1"

3.69 - 12.2.2013 ENGLISH

STABLE version

Stable version contains all changes and new functions reported in version:

   3.69 beta1

--- End ofChangelog_3.69"

Contents

   1 3.68 beta1 - 13.12.2012 ENGLISH

       1.1 BUGS

       1.2 NEWS

       1.3 INVOICING - FIRST INVOICES IN JANUARY 2013

       1.4 INVOICING - CREDIT NOTE

       1.5 INVOICING

       1.6 ALERTS

       1.7 MIKROTIK

       1.8 SMS - AUTO-SENDING IN THE CASE OF FAILURE

       1.9 SWITCHES

       1.10 SCHEDULING - SMS TASK NOTIFICATION

       1.11 GOOGLE MAPS

       1.12 IT LOCALIZATION

3.68 beta1 - 13.12.2012 ENGLISH

BUGS

   Fixed bug in the bookmark Other / Backups / System when the system did not delete selected directory after clicking on the icon "Delete". Now the system will display dialog window, if you really want to delete selected directory and removes it after confirmation.

   Checked system of logs of changes in Client card. Some changes (mostly newly added items) were not logged at all or incorrectly.

   In the case of Tariff change the system did not rename the abbreviation of Tariff name at Internet service for clients.

   Fixed bug in bookmark Invoicing / Overviews / Invoicing. By clicking on the number of issued Credit notes (column Credit notes in the table of issued invoices) the system did not print the list of Credit notes to PDF, because of it it was not possible to exports list of Credit notes to CSV.

   If the VoIP service had set "Invoice separately" and more telephone number were assigned to this service, s othe system created individual invoice for each telephone number instead of one invoice for all numbers. Now it is fixed.

   If any switch was assigned to the router, the system did not displayed (in the menu item "Routed nets" at router and displaying Allocated IP Address Ranges by clicking on the loupe icon) IP addresses and the name of the switch.

NEWS

   SQL tasks and saving to database have been optimized. Thanks to it, the system may work faster because of lesser loading of system.

   In the bookmark Clients / Contacts in the menu "Client Detail" there is a new option "Contract returned"

   Customized header of each router in the bookmark "Routers" for better preview. Logo has been moved to the right cornet and icons below it. By this change there is more free space for long names of routers, QoS etc.

   In the list of wifi clients it is now possible to click on the name of the client and it will open the client card. Also it is possible to click on the IP address of the client and by it open the link in the new window.

   Newly the system records reboot of routers (e.g. power failure). Reboot logs are recorded in the menu Statistics / Logger choosing item "Router evenets" from menu.

   Dealer module now contains possibility to set amount with four decimal points.

   Added paging in the bookmark Statistics / IP addresses.

   Bulk emails or SMS (bookmark Other / Bulk) now containcs option to use filter "Active service". Using this selecting option it is possible to send bulk email or SMS to all clients which have at least one service of selected type.

   Paging for Contacts, Services, Internet service, Routers, etc. is now customized to make it well arranged.

   Added icon of status "Notification via Nagios" to the header of switch in the bookmark Routers and Routers / Router status / Switches.

   Newly it is possible to disable option to send authorize requests from Client portal by changing settings in the bookmark Settings / Syst. settings / Client portal using the key "ui_enable_authorized_requests_form".

   In the bookmark Settings / Switches there is a column "number", which defines how many switches are using the template. It is necessary to remove template assigned to the switch before removing.

   In the bookmark Statistics / Server stat. / Emails / History there is a messageID at each sent email. This ID is defined by SMTP server while sending and in the case of problem with receiving of email, it is possible to find out email by the messageID in the log of SMTP server

INVOICING - FIRST INVOICES IN JANUARY 2013

   For first invoices creation in January 2013 it is necessary to set up Invoicing number line for each invoicing group. While issuing invoices it is necessary to rewrite variable symbol (VS) e.g. as 20130001 to set up new number line which has to be higher than previous one because in other case it may cause problems while creating invoices because the system add the highest VS +1 automatically.

INVOICING - CREDIT NOTE

   Newly it is possible to delete "Credit note" in the client card, selecting menu item Invoicing. Before deleting the system displays message that deleting of Credit note will cause a "hole" in the Invoicing number line, so it is necessary to count with it.

   Customized algorithm for searching of Credit note VS. In the past, while issuing a Credit note the system used the highest VS in particular Invoicing group +1. Newly the system take VS of last issued invoice +1 and checks if this VS exists in the system, if not the Credit note is issued. If the VS exists the system increase the number by 1 until it find free number. By this the system will fulfill free spaces (holes) in Invoicing number line.

INVOICING

   In the bookmark Invoicing / Overviews / Claims / Statistics there are displayed Claims in order by the due date. There is also displayed number of invoices after due date a total money owed separated by period (30 days after due date, 30-90 days after due date, etc.). By clicking on the loupe icon the system will display the list of clients including money owed.

   While editing unpaid invoice in the client card there is possible to delete whole row by clicking on the icon "Delete". In the past it was necessary to remove all items on the row to delete row at all.

   If the VoIP service is invoiced as Postpaid (voip_offset is set to '-1' or '-2') and the service has set invoice separately, so in that case system set up Taxable date to the last day of previous month.

ALERTS

   In the menu Settings / Syst. settings / General there is a key "alert_counter" by which it is possible to set up maximal number of repetation of notification sent. Another alerts are sent when predefined limits for monitored values are reached.

MIKROTIK

   In the bookmark Settings / System settings / Mikrotik there is a new key "mikrotik_limit_on_wifi". In the case when the key is set to "1" value and the wireless filter (wireless access list) is active, the system apply values "ap-tx-limit" and "client-tx-limit" as well. These values contains maximal speed defined in Client's tariff + reserver 200 kbit/s. By this the speed is restricted directly on Radius and in the case of virus infection of client's PC it won't overload whole AP.

   Entries of Queue Tree have been optimized.

 Newly the system retrieves also comment defined at interface. This comment is displayed at each allocated interface in the menu "Routers". It is not recommended to use diacritic marks, because while retrieving data the comment is unreadable.

SMS - AUTO-SENDING IN THE CASE OF FAILURE

   If there is any failure while sending SMS via gateway (e.g. low credit, etc.), the system will try to repeat sending after each 5 minutes.

   In the bookmark Settings / Syst. settings / General there is a new key "sms_failure_send_again". Default value is 100, it means that the system will try to repeat sending of SMS in the interval 100 x 5 minutes. In the case of "0" value this functions in inactive.

   Newly it is possible to display SMS which have not been sent because of failure. These details are displayed in the bookmark Other / tools using item SMS failures and contains also info about last known failure and the number of tries. These SMS is possible also forward to the queue for re-sending or can be deleted.

SWITCHES

   Displaying of switch ports has been optimized

   In default setting graphs of offlien ports are not displayed. When checkbox "Show offline ports" is marked the system shows graphs of all ports.

   If the port status is changed, the system made this action by online running script. Problem may occurs if the switch restarts, because in that case startup-config settings is used and settings which is predefined in ISPadmin is not written to the switch.

   Newly the ISPadmin is trying to synchonize at "clients" switch allowed and forbidden ports in the cycle of transfer retrieving, to guide switch to the current status

   The system checks duplication of IP address also with IP address of the switch while adding active service to client to avoid situation when client has the same IP address as assigned to switch.

SCHEDULING - SMS TASK NOTIFICATION

   Newly it is possible to add task "Notification" for technician in predefined time before task starts (e.g. 30 minutes) while saving task to the system. This notification is done by SMS, so it is necessary to have active SMS gateway for SMS sending. Whie adding or editing task it is possible to select one of predefined option, when the notification will be send. It is applied for all technicians which are assigned to this task and which have set the telephone number

   Only time "Unspecified" have this option to send notification in predefined time.

   If the notification is set, the system will display icon in the right corner of the task in the list of tasks (daily and weekly). Mouseover the task will show detailed information about timing.

   SMS for technician contains following details: "Task type", "Start time", "Client name", "Address", "Mobil" a "Description" (max. lenght of SMS is 154 chars, the rest is cut).

GOOGLE MAPS

   In the menu Settings / Syst. settings / General there is a new variable "googlemaps_time_for_response". to set up timeout of google server response in seconds. Some servers do not send data to Google in time and sometimes it does not generate correct map layer. It may cause incorrect displaying of google maps which is corrected after the next click. In the case of problems, it is possible to increase value in settings.

IT LOCALIZATION

   IBAN is now displayed on invoice

--- End ofChangelog_3.68-beta1"

3.68 - 18.12.2012 ENGLISH

STABLE version

Stable version contains all changes and new functions reported in version:

   3.68 beta1

--- End ofChangelog_3.68"

Contents

   1 3.67 beta1 - 4.10.2012 ENGLISH

       1.1 FIXED BUGS

       1.2 NEWS

      1.3 ALERTS

       1.4 MIKROTIK - BATCH COMMAND

       1.5 MIKROTIK ADDRESS LIST - REDIRECTING OF NON-PAYERS

       1.6 INVOICING

       1.7 INVOICING - SECONDARY CURRENCY SUPPORTED

       1.8 SWITCHES

       1.9 BACKUPS

       1.10 INFO PAGES

     1.11 SCHEDULING

       1.12 REGISTER OF CATV ACCESS LINES

3.67 beta1 - 4.10.2012 ENGLISH

FIXED BUGS

   In the bookmark Invoicing / Overviews / Changes hist. when no record found the system displayed a SQL error

   In the bookmark Statistics / Logger when filter sort by event was used the system displayed a SQL error

   In the case where client had VoIP service assigned and the client was removed from the system and the same phone number was used for another client, the list of calls contained also all calls made by previous client.

   The bookmark Others / Export / Clients with CATV service now contains titles of columns in the list.

   In the bookmark Statistics / Logger / History of deleted services the column User displayed name of currently logged in administrator instead of administrator who made the change.

   In the bookmark Clients / Contacts the filter sort by balance worked not properly. Now it is corrected but it may take a longer time when this filter used for more invoices.

   In the bookmark Clients / DVBC there was an incorrect description of columns.

NEWS

   In the Client card in the bookmark Active services there is a new item "IP address of end device" (if it is set). By clicking on the IP address will run PING to device.

   Added notification about expiration of system updates. 30 days before expiration the system will display info message for "Master admin" after login to admin interface.

   Added notification about low number of free clients in the license. If the number is lower than 10 the system will display info message for "Master admin" after login to admin interface.

   In the bookmark Others / Export / Clients there is a new column "Do not send bulk e-mail". If the client has set it in the client card the field in export contains value 1.

   Newly in Client card in the bookmark Active services and in the bookmark Internet statistic there are displayed information about Switch and port (if it is set). If the switch is selected, so it is displayed here.

   In the settings of router, switch or device as Superior device for Nagios there is better sorting of devices now, using menu Device

   The menu Statistics / Wifi list is extended by another two items ( Antenna type, Range, Azimuth, etc.)

ALERTS

   Newly implemented system of notifications for changes of signal values, CPU, etc. It is possible to set up action ( minimal and maximal values ) when after after exceeding these limits the system will send notification via e-mail or as SMS.

   In the bookmark settings / Alerts it is possible to manage and set up all system alerts. Option to add new Default alerts - Notifications for particular type of device and its parameters. For now the system is able to watch over values like:

   ping - TTL, LOSS

   wifi - SNR, PWR (Mikrotik, UBNT)

   Canopy - Jitter, RSSI, Signal

   Mikrotik - CPU, Temperature, Voltage, RAM, HDD

   Default value is applied for all devices of specific type, if it is not set in different way for particular device. This value is visible and editable only but it is not possible to add new ones. Adding is possible only through particular graph of watched value. When adding it is possible to set up minimal and maximal values (if requested) and logical operator for both of these values. The result is displayed on the axis of values - red field defines values when the system will send notification after exceeding. It is also possible to set up time duration to get average value of retrived data and it is used as value for comparison with predefined values in the system. Notification is sent in the next step for the group of contacts which is the same as defined for Nagios ( in the bookmark Settings / Code lists / Nagios ). As subject and body of the message it is possible use variables. All alerts are sent via mail-manager, so queues are applied for them as well. These notifications have the highest priority and they are sent first.

   To add new Alert it is necessary to fill details like name of Alert, event notification, time limit, minimal and maximal values including logical operator, group of contacts for notification receiving (e-mail, SMS) and the text of notification, where it is possible to use variables (the list of variables is available on the bottom of the page). The value "Time limit" defines time duration for what the value must be exceeded to sent alert.

   More alerts will come if necessary,

MIKROTIK - BATCH COMMAND

   Added option to run pre-defined script (batch command) at Mikrotik routers. This script can be ran for Router group or for particular router only. Because of security reason this option is secured by "SuperAdmin" password which will be sent on request to leadership of ISP company only. It is necessary security restriction to avoid situation when technician will run (intentionally or not) incorrect script and it may cause e.g. blackout of the network part. To get password, please contact our technical support by e-mail This email address is being protected from spambots. You need JavaScript enabled to view it..

   In the bookmark Other / Tools / Mikrotik script there it is possible to define individual batch commands at Mikrotik routers. When ran (by clicking on the link "Run script") the system will display script progress. It is also possible to filter routers by IP, ID, locality, group or for all routers. In all cases the router has to be active and not in "Monitoring only" status and it also has to be the Mikrotik router and know "SuperAdmin" password.

   In the bookmark Other / Tools / Mikrotik script there is an icon "History" for each script and contains input (bold text on grey background) and output (other text) from executed commands or login info to Mikrotik devices (incorrect login, etc.)

   Commands are done via SSH ( not API )

MIKROTIK ADDRESS LIST - REDIRECTING OF NON-PAYERS

   In the menu Settings / Syst. settigns / Mikrotik there is the key "mikrotik_nat_disable_users". This key have existed before and its function was only to enable or suspend non-payers (Values 0 or 1)

   Newly this key has more functions and it is possible redirect non-payers by it as follows:

   0 - Do not use Info page redirection for suspended clients.

   1 - Will create 3 rules in the Firewall NAT table with source address of suspended client and the port of Info Page for redirection. This is default value to keep settings as was before, so after update to the newest version there won't be any change in settings.

   2 - Will create 3 rules for redirecting of clients for each active "Info Page" where the source address is not set but IP addresses from newly created Address-list are retrieved by particular "Info Page". Redirecting in the case of "Not allowed services" is provided to the IP address 127.0.0.1 - In the past it was an IP address of suspended client.

   3 - Each suspended client has entry in Address-list with the name of particular "Info Page". This address-list is also can be used for individual providing of NAT rules (NAT rules are not created). WARNING: The system ISPadmin manage Mikrotik rules with prefix "ispadmin", so DO NOT use names (comment) with word "ispadmin" for your own rules, because it will cause their auto deletion.

INVOICING

   Fixed bug in the bookmark Settings / Active services. When accounting code was set for service, the code was not saved to database

   In the version 3.54 beta2 there was implemented option to import bank statements automatically from directory /data/support/ispadmin/vypisy/autoload/. Newly it is also possible to create even sub-directories and system will import statements from them as well.

INVOICING - SECONDARY CURRENCY SUPPORTED

   In some cases it is necessary to display different currency on invoice (e.g. USD) instead of primary currency from system settings. Newly it is possible to add secondary currency and exchange rate as well. On the invoice there are displayed both. For now it is enabled for DO localization only.

   Primary currency is set in the bookmark Invoicing / Settings using the key "pouzivana_mena". If necessary it is possible to use the second option in the same bookmark using the key "secondary_currency". There it is possible to set up currency (USD, EUR). Using key "secondary_currency_course" it is possible to set up exchange rate between primary and secondary currency.

   If the key "secondary_currency" is set, the system will display secondary currency on invoice as well.

SWITCHES

   Automatic retrieving of MAC addresses and port allocation for internet service is newly provided by key "macfilter_getusermac_switch" in the menu Settings / Other :

   0 - No check and retrieving of new MAC addresses

   1 - Retrieving of new MAC addresses is provided only in the case when MAC address is not set. Allocation is done only in the case when client is not assigned to any port, existing allocation on different switch is not affected.

   If enabled, the system searches in ARP tables (switch must be put after the router, where the client is managed) and if found switch which is set as type "Client's" and the port type is not set as "Uplink", so the system assign that port and switch to the service automatically. Similar situation is in the case when MAC address is not set at service, when the system assign newly retrieved MAC address automatically to service. Auto-assign is not provided for "Backbone" switches or "uplink" ports.

   Auto-assign of port and switch or retrieved new MAC address of the client is logged to the history section.

   In the Client card in the bookmark "Active services" there is a new information about not running processes because of disabled port on the switch. If the port is re-enabled the service is running (it is not standard situation when the client is suspended).

   In the bookmark Routers there is possible to click on the icon for each switch (the icon is located next to graphical preview of switch). There are displayed graphs for all ports on switch. Click on daily graph will display other graphs as well (weekly, monthly and yearly graph).

   If there is no port set as "Uplink", system will display warning message to avod situation when someone disable Uplink port at switch by mistake, because it will suspend all traffic on te switch. It is recommended to have at least one port set as Uplink.

   Newly it is possible to set up switch as "Backbone" or "Client's". This option is available while editting switch. Backbone switch is displayed in green and it is not possible to assign any client on it. In future it will be possible to use more function for these switch groupes

   All changes (done action and name of adminsitrator who made it) on switch are now saved to the logger of events. The list of changes is possible to show in the menu Statistics / Logger selecting item Switches from menu.

BACKUPS

   Newly it is possible to set up start of doing backups in specified time. Settings is available in the bookmark settings / Syst. settings / Backups using item "Backing up start time", where it is possible to set up requested time for backing up start.

INFO PAGES

   Graphically rebuilded displaying of info pages for clients (settings is available in the bookmark Settings / Info page).

   Newly it is possible to display preview of "Info page" directly from admin interface to see preview of the info page which will be displayed to Clients. this option is located in the bookmark Settings / Info Page next to the button "Save" there is a new button "Preview" .

SCHEDULING

   Printed out daily schedule to PDF from bookmark Scheduling now contains also information about GPS coordinates (if it is set)

REGISTER OF CATV ACCESS LINES

   In the last version the register of access lines for CATV has been implemented. Newly it is possible to print out PDF document which contains location (building), schema of the switchboard location in the building, list of clients and complete history of access line (clients connected to the plug before). These all is available in the bookmark Modems / CATV lines.

--- End ofChangelog_3.67-beta1"

3.67 beta2 - 23.10.2012 (EN)

BUGS

   Fixed bug in permmission setiings. The bookmark Statistics is now visible for "Masteradmin" or administrators with checked permmission Statistics bookmark.

   Fixed bug in displaying scrollbars of the webpage, displayed in the Mozilla Firefox version 16.0.1.

   Fixed bug in Nagios. New notifications are sent via "Mail manager" and if the PING (service) was not correct the email was not sent.

NEWS

   Newly in the bookmark Statistics / Logger selecting the item Router events from menu, now shows info about router reboot. System now checks uptime of routers and if there is any reboot or fail, info about it is saved to log now.

   In the menu Settings / System settings / Backups there is possible to set up parts of backup (e.g. DB, graph, ispadmin, etc.) which will be sent via FTP to backup.

--- End ofChangelog_3.67-beta2"

3.67 beta3 - 5.11.2012 ENGLISH

BUGS

   Newly the system retrieves per hour the NAT table from Mikrotik and Linux router.

   In the bookmark Settings / Syst. settings / Mikrotik there is a new key "mikrotik_limit_on_wifi". If the value is set to 1, the system applies these limits to the wireless access-list "ap-tx-limit" and "client-tx-limit". It is possible if the "Wifi MAC filter" is enabled for particular Mikrotik router.

--- End ofChangelog_3.67-beta3"

3.67 - 12.11.2012 (EN)

STABLE version

Stable version contains all changes and new functions reported in version:

   3.67 beta1

   3.67 beta2

   3.67 beta3

--- End ofChangelog_3.67"

Contents

   1 3.66 beta1 - 15.8.2012 (EN)

       1.1 BUGS

       1.2 NEWS

       1.3 INVOICING

       1.4 SWITCHES

       1.5 SMS SENDING FROM CLIENT PORTAL

       1.6 NAGIOS

       1.7 MIKROTIK

       1.8 MIKROTIK - BANDWIDTH TEST

       1.9 MIKROTIK - WIFI CARD SPEED RESTRICTION FOR THE CLIENT

       1.10 LINUX ROUTERS - DHCP OPTION

       1.11 SYSTEM VARIABLES

       1.12 SYSTEM FIREWALL

       1.13 CMTS

       1.14 CMTS - CLIENT'S PLUG REGISTER

3.66 beta1 - 15.8.2012 (EN)

BUGS

   Fixed bug in the bookmark Statistics / Unlinked client. When printing out the list of client to the PDF format, some filtering parameters were applied incorrectly and the list contained online clients instead of disconnected clients.

   Bulk invoice creation and sending has been optimized. This operation consumed a lot of memory and takes too long.

   Calculation of "Total sold connectivity" corrected (bookmark Settings / Tariffs. In the past calculation did not calculate in aggregation parameter.

   Fixed incorrect import of bank statements for UTF8 localizations. There was a problem while encoding the bank statement sent by email to UTF8 characters.

   In the bookmark "Clients / Contacts" in case of using filters and trying to print out document, the result in PDF format did not contain predefined filters.

   In the tariff settings there was possible to set "upload burst" to "0" value. In this case system applied rules to the router incorrectly.

   Fixed bug in the bookmark Statistics / Client stat.. Statistics did not contain information about deleted Clients which left the tariff.

   In case of added ' (apostrophe) mark in the name of service, the system displayed an SQL error in the Client portal.

NEWS

   In the bookmark Other / Export / Routers there is now possible to export detailed list of routers into CSV format. Passwords to routers are not exported, because of security reason.

   System now checks ( Client card / Active services), in case of enabled option "Suspend service automatically From", if the date "Invoice from" is earlier than date "Suspend service automatically From".

   In the Client card, the bookmark "Information" from the left vertical menu contains option to add Notes for clients. Newly it is possible to mark note as a private. In this case the note is visible for author and "Master admin" only.

   In the Client card, the bookmark "Documents" from the left vertical menu now contains option to add document and mark it as Private. In this case the document is visible for author and "Master admin" only.

   The bookmark Statistics / Unlinked clients now contains sorting option by column "Disconnected".

   Each router (bookmark "Routers") now have an option to send failure notifications to "Extra contacts". If you need to send notifications for another contacts which are not defined in the Group for sending notification for particular router or device, so you can use this Extra contact.

   While searching by fulltext in the bookmark Clients / Internet, the system now searches through the Mobile phone number field as well.

   In the bookmark Clients / Contacts there is a column "Total sched. tasks". When mouseover the number of Schedule tasks, the list of all task for client will be displayed in standalone window and it is no longer necessary to go into Client card to find out this information

   The bookmark Other / Tools contains new item "Clients' graphs". There it is possible to remove history of clients' graphs to get more free space on HDD. Data can be removed by "Master admin" only.

   The bookmark Other / Tools contains new item "Email history". There it is possible to delete history of emails divided to the logical blocks or delete history by date. Data can be deleted by "Master admin" only.

   In the Client card / Information / Edit there is a new field to fill "GPS coordinates" manually. Moving the icon on the map will update coordinates in the field and save it to database.

   In the bookmark Statistics / Logger in the menu "Process manager" there is now option to sort by columns

   In the Client card, the bookmark "Documents" there is now possible to add mark "Show in Client portal". If enabled document will be visible in Client portal.

   When setting up router in the bookmark Routers, there is an icon for displaying / hiding of Extra firewall configuration next to item "extra firewall". This option (show/hide) is available to save space on screen only.

INVOICING

   In the bookmark Invoicing / Overpayments / Overpayments there is now displayed the date when the overpayment has been received.

   In the bookmark Invoicing / Bank / Email' there is now option to select day to display records for selected day only. Selecting item "All records" from pop-up menu will display records for whole month.

   In the bookmark Invoicing / Bank / Email there is possible to display not processed payments (not identified payments because the bank statement format is not recognized) and also unmatched payments (payments which can't br matched e.g. because of wrong VS number, etc.). Not processed and unmatched payments can be displayed by clicking on description next to the list of months.

   In the bookmark Invoicing / Settings there is a new key "Slozenka_tr_kod". If enabled (value "1") system prints code 114 on the postal money order. If the code is pre-printed from Postal office (the most cases in CZ), it is possible to set value to "0" and system will not print this code.

   In the bookmark Invoicing / Overviews / Changes hist. there is history of changes made in Invoices including fulltext search option.

   In the settings of Invoicing groups (bookmark Invocing / Settings / Invoice group) there is now possible to set up for each Invoice group if it is "standard" Commercial company (unchecked) or "Civic association" (checked). If the "Civic association" is checked, so the invoices do not contains Title like "Invoice – tax document" or "Original invoice". There is no such as "Client ID" on the invoice instead of it there is "Member ID".

SWITCHES

   Only "Master admin" now have an option to enable / disable port on the switch not everyone as before.

   In the bookmark "Router" there is now possible to activate displaying of port as tet in the table. By clicking on the "Display as text button" located below the menu "Port parameters" (the 1st icon), it will display all port in the table including details of each port.

   Newly it is possiible to retrieve internal description, which is (in the most cases) possible to add directly via terminal. Mouseover the port icon it will display Port description.

   Communication is provided via SNMP by pre-defined template. Template is possible to display in the bookmark Settings/ Other / SNMP OID. It is named as "Default Switch". This template cannot be edited (read only). In case of using switch with unusual OID, it is possible to copy (by clicking on the icon "Create the template copy") this default template to the new one and there is possible to edit template parameters.

   Option to create own templates for communication within system and switch may cause communication errors because of incorrect settings. Because of it there are implemented system error messages. When any communication problem occured the yellow Exclamation mark will be displayed below the menu "Port parameters". Mouseover the icon will display detailed error description.

SMS SENDING FROM CLIENT PORTAL

   Now it is possible to restrict and set up quantity of sent SMS from Client portal to specified telephone numbers. There two new keys for mentioned settings located in the bookmark Settings / Syst. settings / Client portal

   sms_gateway_phone_number_cannot_begin: Defines forbidden first numbers or prefixes (e.g.: +36, 0034, 0609, etc.) to avoid sending SMS abroad, etc. Semicolon or point mark can be used as separator.

   sms_gateway_phone_number_must_begin: Defines allowed first numbers or prefixes (e.g.: 777,776;773;602;608, etc.) to control sending SMS only to specified Telephone operator. Semicolon or point mark can be used as separator.

NAGIOS

   Settings of time limitation of notification

   Newly it is possible to set time limitation for sending notifications from NAGIOS. E.g. disable this option at weekends or at night.

   In the bookmark Settings / Code lists / Nagios there is now possible, while editing the contact group, to set up time plan for sending of notification for each day and hour.

   It is also possible to "Check" or "Uncheck" all fields for faster work with this plan.

MIKROTIK

   In some cases the system incorrectly retrieve Client's IP address and the client was not suspended. Now it is fixed.

   In some cases the system incorrectly wrote groups with permissions to the router and because of it the technicians were not able to access Mikrotik via Radius. Now it is fixed.

   The settings of the Mikrotik router (bookmark "Routers") now contains option to set up API port when enabled. The defaulr port is 8729. Click on the checkbox "Use API" will display new field "API port" to set up port manually.

   In the bookmark Settings / Sys. settings / Mikrotik there is a new key mikrotik_device_mac_firewall. If it is set to value "1" and the MAC filter is enabled( at Firewall level ), the system will add to configuration of Mikrotik routers new resctrictions for MAC and IP address of the device (Switch, AP, etc.). It is a security option to avoid e.g. IP address of the switch and get to the provider's network. Newly there will be allowed the correct IP and MAC address of the switch only. In this case it is necessary to have all device correctly added to the ISPadmin, in other case the device want be available. If you do not know the MAC address of the device, so in this case it is enough to remove device from the system and ISPadmin will retrive the right data from device automatically in one hour ( device must be online ). Bulk (Mass) deletion is available in the bookmark "Routers" by clicking on the icon "MAC FILTER" located in the header of each router.

MIKROTIK - BANDWIDTH TEST

   Newly added support for the Test of lines throughput between Mikrotik routers. Now it is possible to run test from whatever place in the network to the destination router. The test result is saved to database and drawn to the graph as well. This test using Bandwidth test integrated in Mikrotik

   In the bookmark Routers / Router Status there is a new submenu "BW test". There it is possible to add a new plat to run the test. Some fields are required to add a new Test like: Source router, Destination router, Test duration, Date when the test will start, Test repetition (e.g. daily), Test direction (Receive, sent or both directions). After the test, results can be displayed by clicking on the loupe icon located on the right side of each row with the test plan.

   IMPORTANT: This test will check the current Max. throughput of the line. Current traffic is not counted to the test.

MIKROTIK - WIFI CARD SPEED RESTRICTION FOR THE CLIENT

   If the Wireless filter is enabled on the Mikrotik router ( at WiFi card level ), the system adds MAC addresses of Clients to the Wireless list automatically. Newly there is also max. speed restriction for client on the Radius level. It will restrict the speed by the tariff and in the case of virus infection of the Client's PC, when it may send a huge amount of data, the AP will not be overloaded because mentioned restriction will not allow to exceed predefined limit.

   Each MAC address will get parameter:

   ap-tx-limit = download (or burst, depends on the higher value) + 200kb/s as reserve

   client-tx-limit = upload (or burst_upload, depends on the higher value) + 200kb/s as reserve.

LINUX ROUTERS - DHCP OPTION

   From the system version 3.53 beta 1 there is DHCP option for each router in the bookmark "Routed nets". This option enables possibility to add own parameters for DHCP server.

   Newly added "global" DHCP option for whole router. While editing the Flash linux router type, there is possible to enable DHCP (checkbox) and setu up own DHCP option and add special parameters for DHCP (e.g. after set top box booting). While processing configuration the system will write global DHCP option at first and after that the second DHCP option predefined at particular routed nets on router.

   IMPORTANT: Incorrect settings of DHCP option may cause failure of DHCP server on the router!

SYSTEM VARIABLES

   Because of history reason the system variables used for contracts were mostly in Czech and providers from other countries had a problem with it. Newly all system variables are available for EN version as well, so if the ISPadmin localization is different than CZ or SK, provider will see English names of system variables.

   Both formats (CZ and EN) are fully functional so it is NOT necessary to rewrite it in contracts

   Each type now has own prefix (CLI_ for clients, INT_ for Internet service, etc.)

   Newly it is possible to add system variables as needed. In the bookmark Settings / Contracts / List of system variables there is possible to add own varible (e.g. $EMAIL_STATUTORY_REPRESENTATIVE$). After that new variable is visible in the client card in the bookmark "Information" in the left vertical menu on the bottom of the page there is table Additional system variables:. Each additional system variable can be customized for each client separately directly from client card. it can be used in Contracts, E-mails, SMS or use it as new column for additional information for client.

SYSTEM FIREWALL

   In the bookmark Settings / Syst. settings / Security there is possible to set up own Firewall to protect server with ISPadmin.

   In some cases it is necessary to allowe or restrict different port than predefined one. Now it is possible to add up to 5 own ports or port ranges which can be allowed or forbidden.

   In the bookmark Settings / Syst. settings / Security there is a new option "Add port" where ports or port ranges can be added in. Use comma mark as separator.

   When saved the overview of Firewall will display this predefined port as another column and you will be able to allow or restrict ranges or ports as well.

CMTS

   All passwords in the headend settings ("password" a "enable_password") are now encrypted, so they won't be displayed in the headend settings anymore.

CMTS - CLIENT'S PLUG REGISTER

   Added register of CATV plugs, which identifies cable to the Client's flat (if the CATV module is activated in license)

   In the bookmark Settings / Code lists / CATV access lines there is possible to add virtual building to the system including location of distribution boards and number of cables in each distribution board. To add new building it is necessary to fill some data like Address, Number of floors and Note. Below these data there as a picture of building with 7 fields located around to set number of distribution board.

   When saved the list of predefined builidng is displayed in the list. By clicking on the loupe icon will display detailed layout of distribution boards and plugs in building. It is possible to set up number of plug for each physical cable. The number of fields at each distribution board equal to number of floors specified in previous step. It is usual that one cable belongs to one floor, so in one distribution board there cannot be mo cables than floors.

   In the Client card in the vertical menu "Information" there is a new item CATV Access line (while adding or editing client's data) and next to it there is a field to select the number of plug. To choose the right number, select City, Street, Building number and Distribution board defined in Code list, at first.

   In the bookmark Settings / Code list / CATV access lines by clicking on the loupe icon it will display CATV plugs at building. If the number is assigned to the client, so the Client's name is displayed next to it. By clicking on the name the History of plug utilization is displayed.

--- End ofChangelog_3.66-beta1"

3.66 - 23.8.2012 (EN)

STABLE version

Stable version contains all changes and new functions reported in version:

   3.66 beta1

--- End ofChangelog_3.66"

Contents

   1 3.65 beta1 - 11.6.2012 ENGLISH

       1.1 BUGS

       1.2 NEWS

       1.3 TOOLS

       1.4 MASS FUNCTIONS

       1.5 MIKROTIK

       1.6 MIKROTIK - MANGLE RULES UPDATED

       1.7 INVOICING

       1.8 INVOICING - RETURN OVERPAYMENT IN CASH

       1.9 SWITCHES

       1.10 SWITCH - PORT EDITING

       1.11 SWITCHES - PORT SETTINGS

       1.12 LOCALIZATION IT

3.65 beta1 - 11.6.2012 ENGLISH

BUGS

   Fixed some minor bugs reported by users

   Fixed bug at invoicing module. There was a bug in unit numbering when the overlimit data invoiced.

   Fixed bug in issuing of standalone invoices. In the case when there were defined two invoice groups (one of them Payer of VAT and the second is not) and invoice was issued from client card with changing of mentioned Invoice group, the system did not change correct columns for payers or non-payers of VAT on the invoice.

   Fixed bug in Statistic when creating VoIP statistics. Also there were added information about spent amount and time on the phone according to legal form ( Private person / Company )

- Fixed bug in Nagios. In the case when client has set "Send notification about Nagios failure" and was connected through other device to the router, in that case system displayed connection to router and not connection to device what is between router and client.

NEWS

   In the bookmark "Statistics / Server stats." there is a new bookmark "Services". There is displayed status of each service which is running on the server ( MySQL, Postfix, ... ). Current running services contains also time spent by CPU

   If the changelog is displayed after system update, all links are redirected to on-line documentation

   In the menu "Clients / Contacts" there is a pop-up menu "Details" with all clients and new options to display only clients with no time limited contract and time limited contracts as well

   In the bookmark "Router" on the top of the page there are some links ("Ping to all devices", "CPU of all routers", etc.) newly with dependence on set filter in field "Search". If there is set any filter e.g. "CPU to all routers", the system in this case display CPU for selected routers only.

   While removing client there are two new option for checking:

   - check if the client has any unpaid invoice. If yes the system display information about negative balance of invoices.

   - check if the minimal contract validity time is completed. If not the system displays information about name of the service, contract number and set date of contract.

   Both checks affect option to remove client, but it is also useful information for maintenace when client decide to end contract with provider.

   When adding or changing IPTV box in the client card the system offers next free IP addresses automatically. By clicking on IP address system write this IP address to the field IP address. In routed networks system displays free and occupied IP addresses by this users.

   In the bookmark Statistics / User stats. / By tariff all important fields have coloured background. Description of colors is defined on the top of the page.

   When adding or editing Active Internet service there is a new item in pop-up menu named as "Location". Selecting this item from menu the system displays only routers which are assigned to the selected location.

   At Internet service there is a new field "Note for contract". There is possible to type text which will can be also written to contract using system variable "$CONTRACT_NOTE$".

TOOLS

   Added new bookmark Other / Tools.

   This bookmark is available for "Master admin" only

   There it is possible to provide and set up Mass functions :

   -- MAC address duplicity - check Client's MAC addresses for duplicity

   -- MAC address duplicity in Access List - display found MAC addresses duplicities in the access list of the Mikrotik router

   -- Router change - transfer of clients, devices, routed networks from one router to second

   -- Clean up logger - allows clean up entries from Logger (bookmark Statistics / Logger) by selected type and date

   -- phpMyAdmin - phpMyAdmin is disabled as default value and has to be enabled. Access is disabled autuomatically one hour after last change of default value.

   -- Tariff change - allows mass change of Clients' tariffs

   -- Delay in payment - display clients with "Delay in payment"

MASS FUNCTIONS

   In the bookmark Other / Mass there is a new bookmark Functions. There it is possible to provide mass changes of Clients ( Invoice group, status, etc. ).

   On the page there is possible to to select client which will be affected by this change. Client can be filtered by following options: Invoice group, Group, Status, Balance. Options can be combined.

   Below displayed list of clients it is possible to select a mass change. For now it is possible to change following items: Invoicing group, Client's group, Client's status, Type of payment, Invoices by e-mail, Invoices by Postal and Do not send invoices automatically.

MIKROTIK

   Increased limit for max. number of connections via API. In some cases system evaluate high number of connections as communication failure via API.

MIKROTIK - MANGLE RULES UPDATED

   MANGLE rules providing completely upgraded. This change should increase router performance in the higher number of packets.

   Newly all packets are divided to groups, so each packet do not go through all rules saved at router in MANGLE, but if there is a group (CHAIN) where it belongs, the packet go through this group only.

   Rules are now divided to several groups. Basic groups are are created automatically:

       -- CHAIN ispadmin_first_pre - PREROUTING - currently there are added rules for automatic notification of Non-payers (Remind). No other rules are added in.

       -- CHAIN ispadmin_first_post - POSTROUTING - this target is free for now and can be used as needed. To apply rules in POSTROUTING, is possible to create your own and add it to chain ispadmin_first_post. System will not change or rewrite these rules.

       -- CHAIN ispadmin_first_forward - FORWARD - this CHAIN provides allowing of MAC addresses of technician, defined in the bookmark Settings / Administrators / Service MAC. For these Service MAC addresses there is created an address list, where are allowed MAC addresses defined. Detailed information is available in changelog 3.60 beta1.

       -- CHAIN ispadmin_group_pre a ispadmin_group_post - these two chains provides mangle of packets for incoming and outgoing traffic for individual services of clients. Each chain is automatically divided to smaller groups by blocks of IP addresses with mask /26. It helps for faster applying of rules on the router where is higher number of clients because each packet goes through previous rules and after get it gets to rule ispadmin_group_pre. This rule is automatically divided (by IP address) e.g. CHAIN ispadmin_group_pre_192.168.7.0 (number of sub-groups depends on IP range set on the router). Each packet which is going through the router and it's source IP address is in the range 192.168.7.0/26, is going only through sub-group from this range and there is no longer need to go through thousand of rules on router with higher number of clients. Basic division of sub-groups is by mask /26. This division is possible to change in the bookmark Settings / Syst. settings / Mikrotik using key mikrotik_mangle_net_block. there it is possible to set up mask in the range /24 - /30. Division depends on number of used networks on the router

   In the bookmark Settings / Sys. settings / Mikrotik there is a new key mikrotik_default_mangle_first. There it is possible to add your own set of MANGLE rules which will be applied first. rules are written in format "/ip firewall mangle add ........". Each new rule is written to standalone row. These rules are applied to all Mikrotik routers.

   Each router has an option to define own set of MANGLE rules which will be applied first or last. While editing router there is a field "Opening mangle", which will be applied first and "Ending mangle", which will be applied last.

   Individual comments can be added to each rule. Comment must start with mark #. Example: "/ip firewall mangle add ........ # My comment" or on the new row "# My comment". When proceeding all comments are removed from router. It serves for better orientation in rules.

   Rules processing is following:

       --- default MANGLE rules applied for all routers (mikrotik_default_mangle_first)

       --- special MANGLE rules applied for particular router

       --- CHAIN "ispadmin_first_pre"

       --- CHAIN "ispadmin_first_post"

       --- CHAIN "ispadmin_first_forward"

       --- CHAIN "ispadmin_group_pre"

           -- separation of MANGLE rules according to the source IP address and groups

       --- CHAIN "ispadmin_group_post"

           -- separation of MANGLE rules according to the destination IP address and groups

       --- default MANGLE rules applied to all routers

       --- special MANGLE rules applied for particular router

INVOICING

   In the bookmark Statistics / Logger there is a new item in pop-up menu History of removed invoices.

   Updated mass sending of invoices. In previous version while generating invoices (in bookmark "Invocing / Invoices") the system prepare all invoices and send them to clients. For larger providers there could be a delay in system response because of a big number of created invoices. Newly the system create invoices and after that send them to clients and display information about recipients. In the case of failure in sending it is possible to click on send button and send invoices again. The system now can recognize for which e-mail addresses the invoice were sent correctly and this email addresses will be ignored for re-sending of invoices.

   In the client card in detail of invoice there is new information about method how the invoice was paid (Cash, settled from email, import of bank statement). By clicking on the link the system display detailed description about method of settlement.

   In settings of adminsitrator permissions (settings / Administrators) there is a new permission in Invoicing part "Do not allow editting of already issued invoices". If it is enabled the administrator has no option to edit already issued invoices.

   In the bookmark Invoices / Overview / Payments there is a detailed description of received payments ( Cash, bank transfer, Postal money order, etc. )

INVOICING - RETURN OVERPAYMENT IN CASH

   In the previous version 3.64 there was added new function to return overpayment in Cash.

   Newly added bookmark Invoicing / Overpayments / Returned. This bookmark contains all overpayments returned to clients with description if it was returned by Cash or to bank account.

SWITCHES

   In the bookmark Router / Router status there is a new item "Switches". There are displayed all switches added to the system and status of communication via SNMP. If the status of SNMP is displayed in red, in that case system cannot communicate with switch via SNMP and it is necessary to check settings and SNMP community. Each switch has option to "test connection" by clicking on the link next to the edit button of the switch. There is also option to display detailed graphs of ports by clicking on the Graph icon.

   If the communication with switch via SNMP is correct, the system displays detailed information about each port incl. graph when mouseover the port icon.

   In the case when template of the switch (Settings / Switches / Templates) contains less or more ports that it is really read-out from switch, in that case system displays warning message with error description (icon "yellow triangle" on the right side of the switch table).

   Each switch can be assigned to infrastructure and displayed in Nagios. There it is also possible to set up notifications about failure via Nagios like routers and devices have.

   GPS coordinates can be set for each switch as well.

SWITCH - PORT EDITING

   In the bookmark Routers each switch contains icon to edit port manually (on the right side of the switch below pop-up menu "Port parameters")

   By clicking on this icon, the system enable Edit mode. In that case there are displayed all retrieved ports via SNMP (including terminal console, VLAN and other special ports). Each of these ports is possible to select and choose action from pop-up menu.

   This function is usable in the case when some ports are not displayed correctly

SWITCHES - PORT SETTINGS

   If communication with switch via SNMP is without problems, the settings can be done using pop-up menu "Port parameters" on the right side of the switch in the bookmark "Routers". Before applying parameters it is necessary to select requested ports by clicking on them.

   Following functions are available:

   -- Select

   - LAN Ports - select all LAN ports at switch

   - Uplink ports - select ports set as "Uplink" only ( Ports determinates for connection to infrastructure not for clients)

   - Cancel selection - deselect all ports

   -- Change status

   - Turn ports On - enable ports which are set as Offilne

   - Turn ports Off - disable ports. Communication via port(s) is not allowed. Disabled ports are displayed with red cross on the port icon.

   -- Uplink

   - Turn Uplink On - Set up port as "Uplink". In that case no client can be assigned to this port because port is reserved for connection to infrastructure. This status can be graphically recognized as well.

   - Turn Uplink Off - Cancel Uplink settings of the port.

   -- Port matching

   - Set up matching - in some cases the port is "doubled". It means that e.g. in combination of Ethernet port and GBIC port (only one can be used in time). Some switches returns via SNMP standalone OID for each port and it is not possible to recognize which is currently used and it is necessary to set it up manually selecting two ports and click on the option "Set up matching". system will match selected ports and display it separately but with the same number and also port information are the same for "both" ports. Matching of ports is possible as one extra port and any other port. While matching ports the system displays new window with option to choose "Master port". It means number of port where is the cable physically connected into. Slave port is set as not retrieved and has the same number as master port.

   - Cancel matching - Cancel matching of selected ports

   -- Port notes

   - Add note - option to write note for port. This not is displayed in the window when mouseover the port icon. Note can be also added when the client is assigned to the switch and port in the client card.

LOCALIZATION IT

   Updates import of invoices for DANEA accounting system. Added new import field "VatCode", "PaymentName". Also displaying of CompanyID and VATID was not displayed correctly.

--- End ofChangelog_3.65-beta1"

3.65 - 20.6.2012 ENGLISH

STABLE version

Stable version contains all changes and new functions reported in versions:

   3.65 beta1

--- End ofChangelog_3.65"

Contents

   1 3.64 beta1 - 23.4.2012 ENGLISH

       1.1 BUGS

       1.2 NEW RELEASE

       1.3 INVOICING

       1.4 INVOICING - RETURN OVERPAYMENT BY CASH

       1.5 INVOICING - CASH BOOK

       1.6 STATISTICS OF USERS

       1.7 E-MAIL MANAGER

       1.8 CMTS - DETAILED STATISTICS

       1.9 REMINDERS - REQUESTS FOR PAYMENT

       1.10 Client portal

       1.11 MIKROTIK

       1.12 ROUTERS - FORWARDING RULES FW A QUEUE TREE TO THE UPSTREAM ROUTER

       1.13 WIFI - CHECK OF UNALLOWED FREQUENCY

       1.14 SWITCH MANAGEMENT

       1.15 INVENTORY

3.64 beta1 - 23.4.2012 ENGLISH

BUGS

   Fixed some minor bugs reported by users

   New installations with UTF8 charset had problem with characters while sending e-mails from system. Now it is repaired.

   Fixed bug at standalone invoices where prefix of accounting codes (if used) were not displayed correctly on issued standalone invoice

   In the bookmark "Statistics / Data". Export to CSV file contained column"Sent data" and "Data total" but there were no data displayed after export, just "0".

   It was not possible to upload photos for the router with suffix (JPG, PNG, GIF a JPEG) and Capital characters.

   In the bookmark Routers / All there is IP address as a link for MIkrotik routers for the rest (UBNT, Canopy) it was only a text. Now it is active link as well and by clicking on the web interface of the router will be displayed.

   Fixed bug in the bookmark Invoicing / Settlements / History where was not displayed current year and it was necessary to select proper year at first.

   When the Client with Internet service was moved from one transmitter to another, he stayed in Offline status and Graphs were not shown. It is repaired now.

NEW RELEASE

   In the bookmark Other / FREE SMS there is a list of phone numbers with names of technicians from the defined group where the SMS will be send for.

   In the bookmark Routers / Router status / Wifi clients there is an icon (on the right top corner of the page) to remove all offline Clients. By clicking on it all clients from the list (and database) will be removed for selected router.

   While getting back reply for SMS sent via HW SMS Gateway the system send an email as notification. Newly the email containc also information about Client's name and Client ID (if it is possible to find out this information according to the set phone number in client card).

   New icons for devices displayed in NAGIOS in the bookmark Nagios / Status Map.

   In the client card / Active service there are now also rows named as SSID and SSID description, what is set in connection points at selected router. It is also included while printing out settings in the Client card.

   New system variable added $BILANCE_AFTER_DUE_DATE$. This variable will display current amount for unpaid invoices after due date.

   New system variable added $ADMIN_EMAIL$. This variable will display e-mail address of currently logged in technician.

INVOICING

   In the Client card bookmark "Information" there is a new information "Averagce scoring" what means displaying of average number of days when the payment is done. The value is counted using Scoring of the invoice / numbe of unpaid invoices and the result is Average number of days when the invoice is paid.

   In the bookmark Invoicing / Overviews / Invoicing there is possible to display all / paid / unpaid invoices or save the list of invoices to PDF or CSV file format.

   In the bookmark Invoicing / Settlements / History there is also displayed the Client number in the list of payments.

   If the variable "vat_change" is set to value "1", in this case it is possible to set VAT / TAX rate for standalone invoice while created (in other cases it is set-up automatically).

   In the bookmark Invoicing / Overviews / Invoicing there is now possible to order overviews according to services (accounting codes). Newly there is also annual statistics according to services (accounting codes).

INVOICING - RETURN OVERPAYMENT BY CASH

   Newly added option to return overpayment by cash. In the past only the bank transfer method was allowed.

   Now it is possible to select return option (by Cash or Bank transfer) in the Client card Invoicing / Return overpayment

   If the Return by Cash is selected the system display number of Bill automatically. System stores information about last number in row and display the first free Bill number automatically.

   All returned overpayments are stored on the bottom of the Invoicing page in Client card and there is also possible to print out "Cash expenditure voucher" as two originals, where one is for provider and one is for client. There is also a space to sign out the document while amount is returned by Cash.

INVOICING - CASH BOOK

   In the bookmark "Invoicing / Cash book / Cash book" there is a new column "Inserted by" where is displayed the name of Administrator who Inserted the entry into the system.

 Added new bookmark Invoicing / Cash book / History where are available all records / changes which were done in Cash book.

STATISTICS OF USERS

   In the settings of User type in the bookmark Settings / Code list / Users / User type there is possibility to define new column "Statistics". From pop-up menu is possible to select following types "Wifi, Cable, FTTH and FTTB" for detailed statistics of Users.

   In the bookmark Statistics / Client stat. / By connection there is completely new statistics of Clients sorted by Connection (defined in "Settings / Code list / Users / User type"). This statistic is created at the last day of the month so it is possible to display it on the the first day of the next month.

   In the bookmark Statistics / Client stat. / By tariff there is completely new statistics of Clients sorted by Tariff. Information is updated daily and system display average value for whole month.

   In some countries statistics like these are required by government.

E-MAIL MANAGER

   New e-mail manager released. In the past the system sent all e-mails immediately from the system to recipients but in the larger amount of e-mails (e.g. 2000 invoices) it may caused loading of server and some portals with free e-mail addresses could refuse that amount of incoming e-mails because limit was exceeded.

   The system now sorts e-mails to the queue and sending is in periods in accordance to the destination domain and to avoid exceed limit for connection to another SMTP servers.

   In the bookmark Settings / Syst. settings / General there is a key mail_manager_domain_queue where it is possible to set max. number of e-mails sent in one period to the one domain. Default value is set to "10". It means once per 5 mins the system send max. 10 e-mails to the one domain.

   Each e-mails has pre-defined priority (1-3). It can be changed of course while sending from Client card.

   In the bookmark Statistics / Server stats. / E-mails there are two submenus. In the first submenu "Queue" there is the list of current e-mails to be sent. The second submenu "History" contains information about already sent e-mails. Searching is possible by full-text or e-mails can be sorted by (Section or Priority). Mouseover the row of e-mail it will display detailed information of e-mail body.

CMTS - DETAILED STATISTICS

   In the bookmark Modems / Detail there is new detailed statistic of modems with option to display connected modems to headends.

   In statistic there is also possible to select Headend from pop-up menu. It will display installed Upstream and Downstream and also Checkbox with option to show clients contected to the specific Upstream / Downstream.

   When headend is selected another pop-up menu with list of Areas where are connected Clients will be displayed in accordance to information in client card. The last field is for full-text searching or possibility to find Clients only by specified Town / City or Street.

   When selected the system display list of Clients with detailed information about Signal and transfers.

   Above the table there is a checkbox "Show graphs". When checked the system display Signal and transfer graphs for each client.

REMINDERS - REQUESTS FOR PAYMENT

   In the bookmark Invoicing / Settings / Reminders there is newly option to define number of days of due date FROM - TO. In the past it was only possible to define number of days after due date to send one reminder to the Client. Now it is extended and possible to define period as well. If FROM - TO values are set, the client will receive reminder every day in this mentioned period. If the value FROM or TO is not set the system will send only on reminder as in previous case.

Client portal

   After first login of Client to the Client portal there is a request to set e-mail address for communication if it is not set. Newly the system will display also checkbox "Send invoices by e-mail" for Client. This checkbox is displayed only in case when the key ui_send_invoices_by_email in the bookmark Settings / Syst. settings / User Interface is set to value "1".

MIKROTIK

   Communication with routers optimized. If the API communication is activated on the router, the system is trying to get all data via API only. It will cause faster communication with router using API.

   If any rule is duplicated the system will remove it automatically. Rules duplications might be caused e.g. by failure of connectivity

   In the older versions of the system ISPadmin in the bookmark "Routers" there were possible to display the list of all clients, graphs, wifi signals, etc. on WiFi interface but only for WiFi interface of Mikrotik routers. Now it is available for all interfaces of Mikrotik routers. There is a rounded graph icon. By clicking on it the system will display information about connected clients to the interface.

ROUTERS - FORWARDING RULES FW A QUEUE TREE TO THE UPSTREAM ROUTER

   In older versions it was possible to change Mikrotik router for shaping selecting from menu "Provide QOS at router". In that case only Queue tree was transfere to the Upstream router and FW and redirection of non-payers stayed at previous router.

   Newly is possible to transfer FW rules to Upstream router using the checkbox "Apply FW rules" (this checkbox existed before) but next to the checkbox there is pop-up menu where is possible to select the router to apply FW rules. So it is no longer a problem to write QOS rules to the one router nad FW rules to another one. The default value for FW rules is "local" so it is the same as before.

   It is now possible to transfer QOS rules and FW to Upstream router (Mikrotik only) even for "Flash Linux" routers. In the case of using Linux router, all rules will be applied to the Upstream router Mikrotik and local Linux will be without any rules.

WIFI - CHECK OF UNALLOWED FREQUENCY

   Newly implemented internal check of unallowed frequency on specific transmitters.

   In the bookmark Settings / Syst. settings / General there is a key check_5G_bands. If it is set to value "1" the system checks frequency at routers and if it is without range 5500-5700 GHz, the system will display notification about routers after login to the system.

SWITCH MANAGEMENT

   Switch management implementation has been started.

   In the bookmark Settings there is a new bookmark Switches. There it is possible to define individual Switch types. It is a universal model of switch with following parameters:

   - Template title

   - Number of ports - Number of ports on the switch

   - Number of blocks - Number of groups of ports. It means ports separation. E.g. 2 blocks per eight ports

   - Number of rows - Number of rows on the switch (1 or 2 rows). If ports aqre in two rows it is possible to sort numbering by rows or by columns

   - extra ports - otpion to define extra ports at switch. Mostly it is GBIC ports or gigabit ETH ports. It is possible to add up to 4 extra ports and define if it is in one or two rows.

   In accordance to the settings ports will be ordered

   In the bookmark Routers there is the new option Add switch. By clicking on it is possible to add switch in the system but it is necessary to fill some basic information like Title of the switch, IP address, SNMP community (required for communication with switch), and it is also possible to select pre-defined template.

   In the Client card it is possible to choose switch (at "Internet" service) which is assigned to the router. It means that after selecting the router where the client is connected to, the system displays another pop-up menu to select assigned Switch. When switch is selected, the system displays available ports and it is possible to choose specific port where the client is connected to.

   System read data from switch every 5 minutes. If the communication is not possible all ports are displayed in Grey color. If communication via SNMP is ok, the system will display online / offlline status or if there is any client assigned to the port. Mouseover the port more detailed information are available.

INVENTORY

   Newly there is a basket icon at each row in Inventory to add items to "basket". If there is any item in basket the new icon "assign from basket" is available next to the PDF icon. It is for adding of more items which are e.g. on the more than one page in Inventory.

   In the bookmark Settings / Syst. settings / Inventory is possible to choose which items will be displayed on contract using the variable $USER_GOODS$ and sort it.

--- End ofChangelog_3.64-beta1"

3.64 beta2 - 2.5.2012 (EN)

BUGS

   Fixed incorrect encryption of sent e-mails at new installations in UTF8 encoding.

   In the previous version 3.64 beta1 applying of rules via API was added (not to use SSH because via API applying of rules is faster). In some cases when clients were set as PPPoE and the Tariff type ""not set"" the PPP secret was not applied correctly.

   Fixed bug when applying DHCP leases in the case of using API communication only.

NEWS

   Creating of RADIUS configuration was optimized. In previous versions while editing or adding router, the configuration for Radius was created automatically. If the number of Clients was higher, creation of configuration could spent e.g. 30 seconds. Newly it is created "On background" and parameters of the router are changed immediately.

   In the previous version displaying and communication with Switches was added. Data transfer Graphs are created for each Port of the switch and it is possible to find it in the bookmark Router by clicking on the icon Graphs on the right side (next to the name of the Switch).

--- End ofChangelog_3.64-beta2"

3.64 - 9.5.2012 ENGLISH

STABLE version

Stable version contains all changes and new functions reported in versions:

   3.64 beta1

   3.64 beta2

--- End ofChangelog_3.64"

Contents

   1 3.63 beta1 - 23.2.2012 ENGLISH

       1.1 BUGS

       1.2 NEWS

       1.3 ADMINISTRATORS - GROUPS

       1.4 ADMINISTRATORS - INVOCING GROUP RESTRICTIONS

       1.5 INVOICING

       1.6 INVOCING - INSTALLMENTS SCHEDULE

       1.7 ROUTERS

       1.8 SCHEDULING

       1.9 CENTRAL STORE

       1.10 MIKROTIK

       1.11 CONTRACTS

       1.12 WIKI ( "Others / Wiki" )

       1.13 REMINDERS

       1.14 ES LOCALIZATION

       1.15 HU LOCALIZATION

       1.16 PL LOCALIZATION

3.63 beta1 - 23.2.2012 ENGLISH

BUGS

   Fixed some minor bugs reported by users

   If the "Universal service" was moved to another clients the system did not move all items. Now it is repaired.

   Fixed settings of default templates for Nagios. In the past, when the PING was high, the system sent incorrect template with information that Host xxx is UP instead of information about higher PING.

   Preview of generated invoices had bug about displaying of price with VAT / TAX and price without VAT / TAX on the "Pending items on invoice". The bug was only on preview, the invoice itself was correct.

NEWS

   In the Client card (left menu "Documents") there is now possible to edit document description (by clicking on the edit icon).

   While sending free SMS (in the menu "Others / Free SMS") there is now possible to send SMS for predefined group of administrators. In that case system send mass SMS for all administrators which belongs to specific group.

   If the "Time rate" (changing of speed in accordance to the current time) is activated, in this case it is possible to fill up the field "speed figure can be applied to the contract". This field is used to display rate speed for Upload and Download while generating contracts.

   In the Client card the section "Note" there is a new button "Show removed", by using this button it is possible to display removed notes. It will also show who and when the notes has been removed.

   In the menu "Settings / Syst. settings / Internet bookmark" there is a new variable "column_invoicing_from". If it is set to value "1", the bookmark "Customers / Internet" will display also the date "Invoice from" what is set at the service.

   If the client is suspended, the information about who and when the service has been suspended is displayed in the menu "Active services / Internet" below the text "Service suspended". If the service is suspended automatically there is displayed the date and instead the name of technician's name there is simply "system".

ADMINISTRATORS - GROUPS

   Newly is possible to define groups of administrators. Different rules and restrictions will be applied for these groups in the future.

   In the menu "Settings / Administrators / Groups" there is possible to define individual groups.

   Each administrator has an option to set the group where belongs into.

ADMINISTRATORS - INVOCING GROUP RESTRICTIONS

   Newly is possible to display for administrators only that clients which belongs to the specific invoicing group. Administrator without specific permission is not allowed to see clients in another invoicing groups. Only the "Masteradmin" is allowed to see them all.

   In the menu "Settings / Administrators" there is possible to define allowed Invoicing groups which will be visible for individual administrators in the section "Allowed invoicing groups" on the bottom of the page.

   Logged in administrators will see their clients only in the menu "Customers / Clients" a "Customers / Internet".

INVOICING

   In the client card in the menu "Invoicing / Pending items on invoice" there is now possible to set VAT / TAX rate what will be used when the Pending items are invoiced. To enable settings of VAT / TAX rate it is necessary to have set the system variable "vat_change" to value "1" in the menu "Billing / Settings". In opposite the rate is not possible to change and the global rate from system settings is used.

   In the client card the menu "Invoicing" the row of paid pro-forma invoice has "blue" background color. This different color is for simple overview that the offical invoice was created in accordance to the paid pro-forma invoice.

   In the client card the menu "Invoicing" contains graphic overview of active services with coloured backgrounds for individual months (invoiced, paid, etc.). In the case when client had more Internet services it was not possible to find out what is the service about. Now the graphic overview contains also the name of the service (can be added while creating service). If the name is not set the system display only the description like "Universal service" etc.

   In the client card the menu "Invoicing" there is a legend on the left side, with graphic overview if invoices are paid, unpaid or after due date. By clicking on each descriptions of these legends it is possible to show e.g. paid invoices only, etc.

   In the menu "Billing / Overpayments" and "Billing / Overpayments / Arrears" there is possible to save results to PDF.

   In the menu "Billing / Bank / Email" there is possible to search in record by fulltext.

INVOCING - INSTALLMENTS SCHEDULE

   New options for mass sending of installments schedules is located in the menu "Billing / Overviews / Installments".

   Option to select client by Group, status and detail (private, company client, client with option "Invoices by post").

   Option to choose subject and body of the email (using templates from the system). System variables are also usable.

   Option to save Installments schedule to documents and fill the title and document decription. Document is visible in UR (User interface).

ROUTERS

   If there is any failure in communication with the router, the header of Router will display icon for the failure status (SSH, API and SNMP).

   While updating the router the following reports can occurs: Incomplete data (firewall filter) from Mikrotik or Incomplete data (mangle) from Mikrotik etc. It is a new function what checks if there is any problem while updating the router via SSH. In the case of problem the system terminate connection with router (for update) and report the details of failure and try to update again in 5 minutes.

SCHEDULING

   In the menu "Scheduling" there is a new calendar, newly is possible to simply set the month and year from the pop-up menu. It is much faster to find older records because in the past it was necessary to click month-by-month to find requested date.

   In the menu "Settings / Syst. settings / Scheduling" there is the new variable "planning_auto_change_tasks". If the variable has set value "1", in tis case the system will search through the unfinished tasks at 2AM and move them to the current day. It will affect only the tasks what have set the time as "not specified". It will not affect tasks with defined time.

CENTRAL STORE

   In the menu "Routers" there is a new bookmark "Goods from" (means goods from inventory). Bookmark contains information about goods assigned for the router and it is also possible to assign new goods or remove goods from the router.

   In the menu "Settings / Syst. settings / Central store" there is new variable "central_store_adding_by_barcode". Using this variable it is possible to enable / disable searching of data by barcode. If the barcode is set in the Code list, in this case the system show information like Type, Group, Description and Warranty.

   In the menu "Settings / Code lists / Central store / Type of goods" there is possible to set "description" and it will be displayed automatically when the goods is added using reader of barcodes.

MIKROTIK

   Communication with Mikrotik routers via API is now optimized.

   The value ACK is replaced by value DISTANCE (for Mikrotik versions 5.x) what is exactly the value ACK recalculated on distance. Client's graphs of Wifi signal now contains this value DISTANCE as well.

CONTRACTS

   Tuned-up "Contracts" in the Client card.

   Only administrators with permission "documents management" and "masteradmin" are allowed to write to contracts (add, delete).

   All changes made in contracts are now saved in the history card "Statistics / Logger / Contracts". Saved are information like adding of new contract, deleting contract and sending contract by email (who, when, ID of contract, email address where was contract or the failure message sent.

WIKI ( "Others / Wiki" )

   For moving any article to another foldef it was necessary to click on the icon for moving the article at first and then choose the destination folder. Now it is possible to select destination folder for moving article directly from pop-up menu while editing an article.

   Each article can be assigned for specific group of administrators where the note will be visible for. Group of administrators is possible to set in the menu "Settings / Administrators".

REMINDERS

   In the menu "Billing / Reminders / Generate" -> reminder detail there are new columns "email" a "telephone". Newly there is the filter for selection of clients "without email", "without telephone" and "without email and telephone".

   In the menu "Billing / Reminders / Generate" there is possible to click on the item "number" -> it will display list of clients with information about number of unpaid invoices, suspended services, contracts last payment and the balance. The list is possible to print out in PDF format.

   In the menu "Billing / Reminders / Generate" -> sending via SMS - there is new column "email" + possibility to display clients which do not have set email and send them SMS.

   In the menu "Billing / Reminders / Generate" there is new column "Clients without email and telephone". In PDF are displayed client which do not have set email and telephone (e.g. for sending reminder by post).

ES LOCALIZATION

   In the Spanish localization it is now possible to set to not show bank information like Bank account number, Name of the bank, IBAN and BIC code by setting the variable "dont_show_bank_information" to figure "1". It can be set in the menu "Billing / Settings / General".

HU LOCALIZATION

   In Hungarian localization there is possible to print out already printed invoices while printing invoices. If the checkbox "Skip already printed invoices" is marked, the system will display PDF document with invoices which have not been printed yet (later issued invoices).

PL LOCALIZATION

   In the menu "Invoicing / Bank" there is a new "XML import". There is possible to import Polish bank statements. To work properly there must be filled the "IDF" field in the Client card.

--- End ofChangelog_3.63-beta1"

Contents

   1 3.63 beta2 - 1.3.2012 ENGLISH

       1.1 BUGS

       1.2 NEWS

       1.3 INVOICING

       1.4 MIKROTIK PPPOE

       1.5 SYSTEM BACKUPS

3.63 beta2 - 1.3.2012 ENGLISH

BUGS

   Fixed some minor bugs reported by users

   Some (different) SMS gateways had a problem with income SMS with special characters. This SMS was not moved to ISPadmin and stay at Gateway. If these messages were more so the Gateway stopped to work properly or freeze completely. Now it is solved and system work with these SMS with "special" characters without any problem.

   Fixed bug in payments settlements. If the client wrote "message for recipient" with quotation mark(s) and the system received this payment notification by email, so in this case the payment was not settled and no later payments for this client were settled as well.

NEWS

   Newly the system check duplicity of telephone number while importing VoIP call list. If any duplicity in telephone number is found, the system displays information in the Notification table after login to the system.

   The system now displays all recipients' contacts while sending free SMS located in the bookmark "Others / Free SMS". If the group of administrators is selected for sending these Free SMS, so there are displayed all their names and telephone numbers.

INVOICING

   In the case when the system contains more Invoicing groups, there is sometimes a problem that client pay to different invoicing group (e.g. in case when the client has saved the payment information in Internet banking interface and he did not change it when he was moved to another invoicing group). Now it is possible to check out, while pairing settlements from email, if the payment belongs to the right invoicing group and the right bank account located on the invoice. In any problems the payment is not settled and can be checked and settled later manually. This function can be enabled in the menu "Billing / Settings / Universal" setting the variable"matching_payment_by_account" to value "1". NOTE: This check is only for settlements by email from the bank.

MIKROTIK PPPOE

   If the "User type" (In the active Internet service) is set to PPPOE, so in this case it is possible to add networs (In the menu "Routed nets") which will create route records for the client after successful PPPOE connection.

SYSTEM BACKUPS

   The maximum number of FULL backups is possible to set to 8. More backups is not allowed by the script.

   Fixed backing up system of all other database except that one used by ISPadmin. All other databases are not backed up correctly.

   In the case of data transfer failure via FTP, the administrator will receive information to check settings of the FTP server.

--- End ofChangelog_3.63-beta2"

3.63 - 5.3.2012 ENGLISH

STABLE version

Stable version contains all changes and new functions reported in versions:

   3.63 beta1

   3.63 beta2

--- End ofChangelog_3.63"

3.62 - 6.2.2012 ENGLISH

STABLE version

   This stable version was released because of one system bug when, in the case of mass invoicing and if there is a charge for sending of the invoice by Post office or the VoIP calls were invoiced, so in these cases invoices contained incorrect Charset encoding. It was caused because of Charset transfering to the UTF8.

   No other customizations were applied in this new version.

--- End ofChangelog_3.62"

Contents

   1 3.61 beta1 - 13.1.2012 ENGLISH

       1.1 BUGS

       1.2 NEWS

       1.3 MIKROTIK

       1.4 INVOICING

       1.5 INVOICING - CASH BOOK

       1.6 CHANGELOG

       1.7 RADIUS

       1.8 LOCALIZATION

       1.9 WIKI

       1.10 SYSTEM BACKUPS

       1.11 SYSTEM BACKING UP - BACKUPS AND RESTORATION FROM BACKUP - COMMAND LINE

        1.12 SYSTEM BACKING UP - EXAMPLES

       1.13 SYSTEM RESTORATION - EXAMPLES

       1.14 SYSTEM BACKING UP - SAVING OF BACKUPS TO FTP

3.61 beta1 - 13.1.2012 ENGLISH

BUGS

   Each UBNT device in the menu Routers contains the icon MACFILTER if it is enabled. By clicking on the icon the system displays all clients connected into this UBNT device.

NEWS

   The settings of the VoIP service now contains new fields for more detailed settings of the VoIP service. New fileds are following Portal login, Portal password, Company login, Company password and Month limit. All these new variables can be found in the menu Settings / Contracts / List of system variables

   In the menu Routers / Router status / WIFI links is now also possible to display Transfer graphs and Signal graph on both sides. Detail of the Graph can be displayed by clicking on the icon which is located on the right side of the row of the WIFI link.

   User Interface now contains option to enable or disable sending of Mass emails from provider which are defined in the menu Other / Mass / E-mail. Activation of this function for client (to be able see the checkbox in the UI) is possible to set in the menu Settings / Syst. settings / User interface using variable "tech_support_mass_email" and set to the value "1". Changes in this settings is logged in the History of changes in the client card.

MIKROTIK

   Fixed bug when while using the service MAC address (in the menu Settings / Administrators / Service MAC) for the non-existent Wireless interface of the Mikrotik router the system didn't write configuration correctly

   In accordance to the responses from ISP the settings of displaying of info pages AUTOMATIC NOTIFICATION OF CLIENT WHEN THE INVOICE IS AFTER DUE DATE has been changed. In the last version while the checkbox "Do not stop" was checked so the client didn't see the Info page but now there is a new checkbox Do not show Delay in payment in the Client card. This options allow to display the Info page to the user but in the same time to do not stop the user.

INVOICING

   In the case when issued invoice has 0 value (e.g. while minus value is added to invoice manually), it is possible to set invoice as paid in the Invoice detail by clicking on the icon Mark invoice as paid. This option is available only in the case when the Invoice has 0 amount on it.

   In the detail of the invoice in Client card there is History of payments what now contains the date of payment (e.g. in the case of partly payments). In the past there was only the date when the invoice was paid at all.

INVOICING - CASH BOOK

   The Cash book was added in the last version of the system ISPadmin and can be found in the menu Billing / Cash book. Newly is possible to filter the content by Category, Group, Income / Expense. This filter settings is also applied while printing records to PDF

   In the list of Incomes / Expenses of payments there is a total sum displayed on the right top of the table in accordance to the selected filter.

   In the list of payments there is a new column Subtotal what displays the current state for items

   If the payment is received by Cash using Cash desk so there is a new checkbox for this transaction Add to the Cash book. When the checkbox is selected the payment is displayed as Income in the Cash book.

   In the menu Billing / Cash book / Overview there is a overview by Categories, Invoicing groups or months.

CHANGELOG

   Displaying of Changelog has been customized. Now, after the success update and the first login to the system it will display current version from the website where is the text well arranged and graphically formated

   In the case of different localization than CZ or SK fo the system the Changelog is displayed in English

   In the case when Changelog is not available on the Wikipedia the system will display standard changelog from .TXT file.

RADIUS

   In the menu Settings / Tariffs / Radius there is now possible to set up rates for clients which are authenticated via Radius. In the past it was necessary to set up attribute Mikrotik-Rate-Limit manually to assign right speed to the client (download / upload) but now it is set automatically in accordance to the settings of tariff. If this attribute is already set manually so the system won't rewrite this record automatically.

LOCALIZATION

   Newly added RU (Russian) and UA (Ukraine) localizations

   These localizations are possible to display correctly in UTF8 charset only so it is available only for new installations where are all data now in UTF8 encoding

WIKI

   In the internal knowledgebase Others / Wiki there is now possible to define who is allowed to edit created article. Options are the Author of the article, User of the system with permission Masteradmin or all Users. All changes are saved in history and it is possible to display it whenever needed.

SYSTEM BACKUPS

   System of backing UP has been completely reprogrammed. In the past system did full backups of all data only but it caused high usage of HDD space and creating of backups could took several hours for this process.

   Now it is possible to create of Incremental (differential) backups to save more time and HDD space while creating backups. These incremental backups saves only daily difference in backups and if there is no change so the system do not backup anything.

   Following functions are available:

   - creating of incremental backups of the system ISPadmin (/data/support/*, graphs, scripts, backups of routers ...)

   - creating of incremental binary backups of MySQL, Dump of all databases

   - creating of directories predefined by users

   - allow restoration of all backups to the predefined directory (e.g. /restore/backup/ ) or to the default location via terminal as super-user root

   - allow restoration of backups via web interface to the special directories (e.g. for other user usage like preview, copy to PC, etc. ). Choosing the type the user can restore backups from each day only or last full backup to the current day or restore on these files which contains requested regular strings (using the search field)

   Settings is available in the menu Settings / Syst. settings / Backups. After the update this option of saving of Incremental backups is disabled as default and the system will do full backups as in the past. In the pop-up menu is possible to set up period for creating of backups (daily / weekly / monthly). If Incremental backups are needed so it is necessary to mark checkbox Do Incremental backups daily. In this case is possible to set up doing of FULL backups e.g. Weekly to save space of HDD. For complete restoration is necessary to keep the last FULL backup and following Inremental backups from the last FULL backup !

   Backing up is executed daily in 3 AM

   System creates log about backup created which is sent to the email admin-email (possible to set in the menu Settings / Syst. settings / General)

   All saved backups is possible to display in the menu Others / Backups / System. There are displayed directories which are backed up and each one of them contains Full and Incremental backups

   If the encyrpting of backups is enabled so in this case all backups are encrypted via Postcode (encryption of backup is strongly recommended). Encryption is possible to set directly from command line using the command "/usr/local/script/ispadmin/ispadmin_backup_crypt.pl"

   Backup can be also easily done by clicking on the button Create backup in the web interface

   The basic structure of directories is following:

       db - binary backups of SQL database ( directory /var/lib/mysql/ )

       db_dump - dump ( mysqldump ) for individual databases

       etc - backup of directory /etc

       graph - history of graphs of transfered data to the client ( in time data like these takes more and more HDD space because graphs are saved as images ). Location of these data is in following path /data/support/ispadmin/client_images

       ispadmin - backup of directory /data/support/ispadmin ( system data )

       scripts - backup of directory /usr/local/script/ispadmin ( binary scripts and data )

   When the Full backup is done, other backups are Incremental and arranged to the new rows beloww the Full backup

   Each backup contains information about Number of files, if it is Full or Incremental backup, Date of backup creation and the size of backup

   Each backup contains following icons:

     -- "diskette" - option to download backup to the local drive

     -- "magnifying glass" - display the list of files saved in the backup including details like Filename, date of creation, size, etc.

     -- "restoration" - option to restore file in accordance to defined parameters

     -- "delete" - option to delete backup

SYSTEM BACKING UP - BACKUPS AND RESTORATION FROM BACKUP - COMMAND LINE

   To work with backups use the command "ispadmin_backup".

   When the command is executed it will display Help where is possible to use following parameters ispadmin_backup [help] [debug] [source-path=SRC-PATH] [path=PATH] MODE SCOPE

   help - display help

   debug - display detailed output of backups

   source-path - if the BACKUP is provided by the system (parameter MODE has value backup) so it means directory where the backup will be saved. In the case of Incremental backups it is always directory /data/backup/incremental. If the different directory is needed so it is possible to change the path and create subdirectories there like etc, db, ispadmin, etc.

   - in the case of system RESTORATION (parameter MODE has value restore) so it means directory where the backup will be restored from.In the case of automatic backup it is always directory /data/backup/incremental. It is possible to change the path if the backup is in different directory, of course.

   path - if the parameter MODE is set to the value restore (restoration from backup) so in this case the path is a directory where the backup will be restored into. If the directory for restoration is defined e.g. /restore so the system will create subdirectories like /etc, /db, /ispadmin, etc.

   MODE - value "backup" - provide backing up, value "restore" - provide restoration

   SCOPE - option to restore full backup or individual directory only. If the full backup restoration is needed so use the parameter all. If the restoration of directory is needed only so in this case use the name of directory as parameter e.g. etc or script, etc.

SYSTEM BACKING UP - EXAMPLES

   Full system backup to the default directory /data/backup/incremental/

   ispadmin_backup backup all

   Full system backup to the user directory e.g. /new/backup with optional extended listing [debug] (order of arguments is important)

   ispadmin_backup [debug] path=/new/backup backup all

   Partial system backup (allowed are following options):

   - ispadmin - system ISPadmin (/data/support/[ispadmin|admin])

   ispadmin_backup backup ispadmin

   - scripts - backup of executive scripts of the system ISPadmin

   ispadmin_backup backup scripts

   - graph - backup of all users' graphs

   ispadmin_backup backup graph

   - etc - backup whole linux config file

   ispadmin_backup backup etc

   - db - backup of binary DB - tables, system, mysql and creation of directory ./db_dump_last with dump files of all databases

   ispadmin_backup backup db

   - db_dump - backup of all dumped databases MySQL to the directory ./db_dump (created directory ./db_dump_last/, where are saved all current dumped files from the last backup

   ispadmin_backup backup db_dump

SYSTEM RESTORATION - EXAMPLES

   Full system restoration to the directory /backup

   ispadmin_backup [debug] restore all

   Full system restoration to the user directory e.g. /restore/new/ from user's directory with backups /download_new_backup/incremental/

   ispadmin_backup [debug] source-path=/download_new_backup/incremental/ path=/restore/new/ restore all

   Partial system restoration

   ispadmin_backup restore ispadmin all

   New directory "./restore_mysql_dump" is created in location according to defined source-path or in default directory for incremental backups (/data/backup/incremental/) where dump databases are restored from backups into and after restoration are moved to MySQL

   ispadmin_backup restore db_dump all

SYSTEM BACKING UP - SAVING OF BACKUPS TO FTP

   Backups is also possible to save to FTP

   By clicking on the button Create FTP backup the system do standard system backup and send it to FTP if it is set. System creates complete log about this backing up option

   Settings of backups to FTP is possible to set in the menu Settings / Syst. settings / Backups

   Newly is supported secured FTP transfer via FTP SSL

--- End ofChangelog_3.61-beta1"

3.61 beta2 - 19.1.2012 ENGLISH

BUGS

   Fixed bug in User interface where, because of using incorrect font type, invoices were not printed correctly there.

NEWS

   The version 3.61 beta 1 contains completely new procedure of system backups. Backing up the system is located into the directory /data/backup/incremental' but in the older versions into the directory /data/backup/ and these old backups are not visible in the menu Others / Backups. It might cause that HDD will be filled up while backing up because these old backups are still saved on the HDD. In the case of login of the user with right permission (Masteradmin) into the system and when the some old backups are found, the system will display Caution message with information that some old backups has been found and can be deleted in the table below this message box by clicking on the cross icon located on the right side of each row with the name of old backup.

--- End ofChangelog_3.61-beta2"

3.61 beta3 - 25.1.2012 ENGLISH

BUGS

   Fixed some minor bugs reported by users.

   Fixed bug in User interfrace where the invoice (only with check) had some incorrectly displayed characters on it.

UBNT

   Firmware 5.5 newly supported ( system display transfers of interfaces and graphs of Wifi signals ).

   Unit Rocket M5 GPS ( with integrated GPS module ). If the unit is installed properly and GPS module is active, so when hovering mouse over the name of the interface the system will show GPS coordinates with altitude, number of active satellites which are receiving signal from GPS. In the "Router" menu on the header of the unit there is displayed the icon GPS. By clicking on it the map with exact location is displayed.

--- End ofChangelog_3.61-beta3"

3.61 - 31.1.2012 ENGLISH

STABLE version

Stable version contains all changes and new functions reported in versions:

   3.61 beta1

   3.61 beta2

   3.61 beta3

NEWS

   In the Client card in the menu Documents there is now possible to upload all document types (in the past it was limited for some document types only).

--- End ofChangelog_3.61"

Contents

   1 3.60 - beta1 - 15.12.2011 ENGLISH

       1.1 BUGS

       1.2 NEWS

       1.3 VERIFICATION OF TECHNICIANS TO THE MIKROTIK ROUTER VIA RADIUS

       1.4 NAGIOS

       1.5 TARIFF - MINIMAL GUARANTEED SPEED

       1.6 MIKROTIK

       1.7 MIKROTIK - SERVICE MAC

       1.8 BACKING UP

       1.9 INVOICING

       1.10 INVOICING - CASH BOOK

       1.11 SCHEDULING

       1.12 IT LOCALIZATION

       1.13 HU LOCALIZATION

3.60 - beta1 - 15.12.2011 ENGLISH

BUGS

   Fixed some minor bugs reported by users.

   Fixed bug in Syslog where some records were not assigned to the router correctly and in this case it was not possible to find records by Router in the menu Statistic / Syslog.

   Fixed bug in the menu Statistics / Data where the export of data to the CSV file contained only the first page, not all records.

   When the setting "Suspended from - to" was defined (Client card / Internet service] with any argument so the system stopped client and in all cases redirected to Info page Non-payer. Now it will display Info page in accordance to selected option.

NEWS

   Ping graph (e.g. in the menu Routers or in the Client card) now contains packet Ping size what is send to device or client.

   In the menu Settings / Sys. settings / General there now possible to set value "2" for variable "user_ending_contract_send". This setting will affect sending of notification about ended contracts

   0 - disabled, it means that system will not send notification about ended contracts

   1 - enabled, system will send notification about ending contracts even after the contract validity date

   2 - enabled, system will send notification about ending contracts to the last contract validity date.

   In the menu Statistics / Server stats / Graphs on the top of the page there is a table with new information like: Server Uptime, Core version, CPU type, Number of CPU cores, total memory, total SWAP, currently logged users and 10 last login to the server.

   In the Client card / Active services there is for each service displayed the router where is the client connected in. By clicking on the name of the router it will display router like in the menu Routers. Below the name of the router there is information about router type (Mikrotik, UBNT, Canopy, Linux).

   In the menu Statistics / Logger in the option from pop-up menu "History of changes at router" there is a new information about routers whicha has been deleted (in the bookmark Routers). This function logs Router ID, name of the router and the name of technician who deleted the router from the system.

   In the menu Statistics / Logger in the option from pop-up menu "DB info" there are logged information about damaging and repairing of the SQL database.

   In the menu Routers / Availability there is assigned icon with variable colors for each router to recognize packet lossing. Description about colors of icons and what does it mean is available in caption.

   While adding or editing the service "Internet" there is possible to define "Access point". From the pop-up menu is also possible to choose UBNT access points. If the option "Search by SSID" is used, the system will set correct router when the appropriate Access point is chosen and it is not necessary to set it manually.

 Discount is now possible to define even for CATV service. Discount can be set as fixed prices what is not depended on the service price or it can be set in percentage % and in this case the price always changes when the price of the service is changed.

   Now in the menu Statistics / Wifi list there is the new column "Antenna" what contains information about Antenna on each Interface. Antennas are separated by "|" mark and contains the Name, type and antenna gain. This column is also possible to export to CSV file.

   In the version 3.59 there was added a new function to add "external_link" in the Client card. In the last version there was displayed only the URL address what, in some cases, looked not very well arranged so now it is possible to set variable "'external_client_link_description" in the menu Settings / Sys. settings / General to fill description of this URL which will be displayed in the Client card instead of the whole URL address.

   In the menu Settings / Contract there is now displayed the name of administrator who was edited the item (contract template) at last.

   In the menu Other / Export there are new information which are send to the export file of "'Clients with Internet service". The new information are following: "Contract number", "Title of the service" and "Name of the Access point".

   In the menu Other / Wiki it is now possible to move already created note to the different folder. Note can be moved while editing and Click on the button "Move" what is located on the header of the note on the right (blue background). By clickin on the icon it is possible to choose the folder where the note can be moved in.

   In the case when MAC filter is enabled the system will display green icon "MAC filter" below the IP address of the router. By clicking on the icon it will display the list of clients assigned in. The latest version includes possibility to delete MAC address and also Clients' MAC addresses assigned in. If the MAC address is deleted so the MAC filter is deactivated and it will be enabled again only in the case when the MAC address is added manually or in the case of automatic searching for MAC address of the client what is done once per hour.

VERIFICATION OF TECHNICIANS TO THE MIKROTIK ROUTER VIA RADIUS

   This function means that now it is no longer necessary to create special accounts with special rights to access routers for technicians and in the case when technicians leave the company (e.g. technician is fired) it is no longer needed to cancel their accounts to avoid them access to routers. The system now do the automatic configuration of accesses for the Radius server and it will allow login for technicians (via Winbox, SSH, etc. depends on permissions).

   To activate management of Technicians' accesses to the routers it is necessary to set variable "service_mikrotik_login" to the value "1" in the menu Settings / Sys. settings / Mikrotik".

   In the menu "Settings / Administrators / Mikrotik login" there is the bookmark "Groups" where is possible to define each groups with detailed permissions.

       Permissions are following:

       local - login via local console

       telnet - login via Telnet

       ssh - login via SSH

       ftp - login via FTP. User with this permission can read, write or delete files

       reboot - allow option to reboot router

       read - Read only permission. User is not allowed to do any changes in configuration

       write - permission to modify configuration out of the settings of rights for User management (creating of the User accounts to access the router). This permissions does not allo Read right, it is necessary to enable it separately.

       policy - allow setting of another administrator accounts to access the router

       test - allow to do PING, Traceroute, Bandwidth-text, Wireless scan, Sniffer and Snooper

       web - allow accessing via Web Interface

       winbox - allow accessing via Winbox

       password - allow password change to individual User accounts

       sensitive - allow to display "the most sensitive" information like passwords, Wireless keys, etc. are.

       api - allow access via API

       sniff - allow to execute Sniffer utility

   There is no limitation for number of the Groups with different permissions

   In the menu Settings / Administrators / Mikrotik login there is a bookmark "Users" where it is possible to create individual accesses for technicians. Each user has to be assigned to the group where are defined all permission for users.

   If there is any access created to the router so in this case the administrator has default access to the all routers. Each router (menu "Routers") has a checkbox to enable / disable "accessing of technicians to the Mikrotik routers via Radius". If the checkbox is not enabled so no defined account in the menu "Mikrotik Login" is accessible.

   If the settings is defined correctly and Radius is enabled on the server, so the system will enable communication via Radius at all routers automatically, set Groups to access routers. Each group permission is written directly in the router to allow access of technicians in accordance to their own permission.

   Verification of technicians to the Radius depends on the settings of variable "server_ip" in the menu "Settings / Sys. settings" where has to be set the IP address of the server with running ISPadmin which is accessible from all routers. If this IP address is not valid the access to the routers via Radius will not be possible.

   This function is possible only in the case when the Radius module is active on the server with running ISPadmin !

NAGIOS

   System of sending of SMS and notifications from Nagios has been completely reprogrammed. Now it is possible to define template of the failure even for groups of contacts.

   The menu Settings / Code lists / Nagios is now separated to the submenus like Contacts and Templates.

   In the menu Settings / Code lists / Nagios / Templates there is now possible to define individual templates for sending notifications via email or via SMS (if the HW SMS Gateway is connected in). To create the template it is possible to use system variables which are displayed on the same page (e.g. IP, Host name, etc.). Each section (SMS or E-mail) has one default template which is used for sending of notifications if another template is not set.

   In the menu Settings / Code lists / Nagios / Contacts there is possible to set up default template which will be used for sending of notifications about device failure via E-mail or SMS. It means that each defined Contact group will receive own pre-defined template of notification.

   Each router in the menu Routers now contains the icon for identification of the group where the routers is assigned to (SMS or E-mail).

   In the menu Routers there is possible to set "extra contact" for SMS notification group. In the case of failure the system will send notification via SMS to all contacts defined in the menu Settings / Code lists / Contacts and also it will send notification to this extra contact. This special telephone number can be represented for example as HW resetator and in the case of receiving SMS with exactly defined text the resetator will accept it and provide restart of the device.

TARIFF - MINIMAL GUARANTEED SPEED

   In the menu Settings / Tariffs there is now possible to set minimal quaranteed speed which will be used to create QT at the router Mikrotik using the item "limit-at" at Queue tree. In the past this item was set as 1/10 of the client's speed from assigned tariff.

   Apart from settings of Upload and Download speed there is an option to set minimal speed what is separated to the following choices Automatic and Manual.

   In the case of Automatic mode the system set limit in QT to 1/10

   In the Manual mode is possible to value as needed. The minimal speed must be the higher number then 0 value but lower number than the client's speed already is (maximal speed).

MIKROTIK

   Applying of rules to the routers has been optimized

   In the menu Routers / Router Status there is now also information about RAM usage of the Router. By clicking on this information it will display detailed graph.

   Disk usage information is now also drawn to the graph.

   The version 3.59 contained new function Bad payer notification which have exceeded the due date of an invoice. This function informs clients by Info page and by clicking on OK button they are allowed to use internet service again. In the past the Mangle rules was applied to Prerouting but it caused that in some cases the Info page wasn't displayed. Now there is used Post routing to avoid this problem.

MIKROTIK - SERVICE MAC

   The menu Settings / Administrators now contains new submenu Service MAC. This function is for technicians to allow them access to the provider's network. This defined MAC address is applied to all MK routers to the wireless access list and allowed on Firewall so technician can access the network and set needed IP address. If technician does not know the IP adres he can access Mikrotik router via Winbox and do necessary changes for connection, at least.

   After connection of the device (notebook) with the service MAC address the system check the IP address and add it to the address list to be able allow this IP address on Firewall.

BACKING UP

   In the menu Settings / Backups / Routers there is possible to do individual backup of the router whenever is needed by clicking on the icon Backup at the router.

   Setting of system and routers backups was completely reprogrammed. In the past the setting was several variables and not well arranged. Now there is a new bookmark in the menu Settings / Sys. settings named as Backups where is possible to set all necessary parameters about system and routers backing up.

   SQL table what contains information about all Clients' Internet services is backed up to the directory /data/backup/sl_internet_db/ . System stores last 30 backups of the SQL table. Table can be damaged e.g. in the case of Power failure and these backups are for fast renew of data.

INVOICING

   The system now stores also history of automatic sent Original invoices by email if it is set in the "Billing / Settings" using variable "proforma_automatic_send". This History can be displayed in the Client card in the menu History from pop-up menu Sent emails.

   In the menu Billing / Bank there is possible to print settled and unsettled payments in PDF format. Now this document contains overview of all amounts on the bottom of this document.

   Newly added option to set templates for invoices, Pending items and Universal service located in the menu Billing /Settings / Templates which are usable for most common used templates for Invoices and services with predefined items on it.

INVOICING - CASH BOOK

   Nově přidána funkce "Peněžní deník". Peněžní deník slouží k evidenci příjmů a výdajů za dané období.

   Pro správné použití je potřeba nastavit v záložce Fakturace / Nastavení "Kategorie" a "Skupiny" peněžního deníku, podle kterých se budou náklady a výdaje rozlišovat. Například pokud si přejeme vést náklady na používání osobních automobilů, tak v záložce Fakturace / Nastavení / Peněžní deník / Kategorie si vytvoříme kategorii "automobily", zvolíme do které fakturační skupiny bude zařazena a přednastavíme zda se jedná o výdej nebo příjem popř. zadáme i cenu. Dále v záložce Fakturace / Nastavení / Peněžní deník / Skupiny vytvoříme už jednotlivé automobily, které provozujeme.

   V záložce Fakturace / Peněžní deník si poté můžeme výdaje i příjmy zadávat a sledovat. Například pokud do auta natankuji palivo, tak si zde přidáme výdaj do kategorie auta, do skupiny příslušný automobil a zaeviduji si částku za pohonné hmoty.

   Nad seznamem jednotlivých položek je možné celý peněžní deník zobrazit v PDF a případně vytisknout.

SCHEDULING

   While editing the Task it is possible to mark checkbox "Send copy of task to author" after that the Author of the task will receive copy of the email. If the task is edited by author himself this checkbox will not show.

IT LOCALIZATION

   Export to the Italian accounting was added "Danea easyfatt". Export to the accounting (the result file is in the XML format) can be set in the menu "Billing / Settings" using the variable "export" and set to "15" value. This option is experimental for now, because is needed in practice to test if everything works properly.

   VOIP import modified (menu "Others / VOIP import"), where the import script assign the Czech call prefix (+420) automatically and in this case it was not possible to import calls from Italian operator where is a different call prefix.

HU LOCALIZATION

   Export to the Hungarian accounting was added "RLB60". Export to the accounting (the result file is in DBF format) can be set in the menu "Billing / Settings" using the variable "export" and set to "16" value. This option is experimental for now, because is needed in practice to test if everything works properly.

Translation is in progress. Please be patient.

--- End ofChangelog_3.60-beta1"

3.60 beta2 - 16.12.2011 ENGLISH

BUGS

   Repaired bug when, because of syntax error the system didn't backups of configuration of the Mikrotik and UBNT routers

NEWS

   All parallel running processes were optimalized what may cause lower loading of server.

--- End ofChangelog_3.60-beta2"

3.60 - 20.12.2011 (EN)

STABLE version

Stable version contains all changes and new functions reported in versions:

   3.60 beta1

   3.60 beta2

NEWS

   Added detection of the "SKYNET" virus, which attack all UBNT devices. The system now detects presence of the virus and if it is detected so it will display notification in the menu "Routers" with the list of all infected routers. It is necessary to do the last update of FW of UBNT devices where is this problem solved.

--- End ofChangelog_3.60"

Contents

   1 3.59 beta1 - 16.11.2011 (EN)

       1.1 BUGS

       1.2 NEWS

       1.3 AUTOMATIC NOTIFICATION FOR CLIENTS WHEN THE INVOICE IS AFTER DUE DATE

       1.4 MIKROTIK

       1.5 PING SIZE SETTINGS

       1.6 PROCESS MANAGER

       1.7 CENTRAL STORE

       1.8 INVOICING

       1.9 LOCALIZATION - IT

3.59 beta1 - 16.11.2011 (EN)

BUGS

   Fixed some minor bugs reported by users.

   Fixed bug on the cash payment document in the User interface where was displayed VAT/TAX rate 19% instead of value set in the settings.

   In the menu Router / Router status / WiFi clients the Uptime for UBNT and Canopy devices is now displayed in correct format.

   In the client card while move over the number of invoice the displayed information about items on the invoice is now arranged correctly.

   If the payment is not settled after the import from the bank because there isn't correct VS and after that the "Assigned VS" is added into the system, so in this case after the next import of the bank statement Billing / Bank / Import the system settle the payment with the correct VS.

   "process manager" has been optimized and loading of CPU of the routes should decrease now.

NEWS

   Each removed service from client card is now logged in the history (menu Statistics / Logger). Each event includes information about Who and when the service was deleted, type of the service (Internet, VoIP, CATV,...) and ID of the removed service.

   Added control to check duplicity of IP addresses. If the system find that the same IP address is set for multiple devices so it will display information table with the list of duplicates of IP addresses.

   Templates of the contracts now contains new system variable "$USER_DEVICE$" what means the name of End device of the user.

   In the menu Customers / Internet the fulltext option now search also in the field User's end device.

   In the menu Contacts / Home there is displayed specific number of CATV users and used licenses.

   In the menu Routers the fulltext option now search also the names of devices.

   SMS sent via HW SMS gateway is send as a text by email, in the case when client send any reply. The subject now contains the name of the client for better identification

   Released new update script (the command ispadmin_update), where is now displayed the whole procedure of update and errors.

AUTOMATIC NOTIFICATION FOR CLIENTS WHEN THE INVOICE IS AFTER DUE DATE

   Added a new function with possibility to display Info page to the client in the case when the invoice is after due date. When the invoice is after due date the system will apply rules to the Mikrotik which redirect all http traffic to the info page with information about problem. By clicking on the icon OK the client accept this information and it enable standard access to the internet. This info page is displayed in defined period (e.g. once per day) till the date when all invoices after due date are paid. All traffic is enabled in the case when Info page is displayed (like POP3, IMAP, https, ...).

   This function is inactive after the update and it is necessary to set it up.

   In the menu Settings / Info page there is a new bookmark "Prodlení platby" (will be translated in the next version as "Payment delay" ) and there is possible to write the text which will be displayed to the client when the invoice is after due date.

   There is several new variables:

   remind_pay - if the variable is set to value 1 the system is active.

   remind_after_pay_day - number of days after due date when the first notification will be displayed. This notification is displayed until the invoice is paid.

   remind_time - number of days of repeating the notification. For example the value 2 means notification once per two days.

   remind_unaccepted_pay - minimal amount of the owed payment from which the notification will be displayed. This function is in the system to avoid displaying of notification page for the client who has not paid for example 1 EUR.

   For correct functionality it must be enabled automatic suspending of users in the bookmark Billing / Settings / General using the key "pozastavit_neplatice" to the value 1 and also the variable "mikrotik_nat_disable_users" in the bookmark Settings / Sys. settings / Mikrotik.

   The variable "server_ip" must be also set correctly in the bookmark Settings / Sys. settings. There must be set IP address of the server (public or private) which is available from all Mikrotik routers. Without it the info page won't be displayed.

   This function is available only for the Mikrotik routers.

   If the variable "remind_pay" is set to 0 value in the bookmark Settings / Info page / In arrears so in this case all rules are removed from Mikrotik and the traffic is enabled.

MIKROTIK

   System now downloads informations about all installed packages. The list of installed packages is possible to display in the menu Routers / Router status mouse-over the name of the router. Information about installed packages is visible only in the case of active communication via API.

   In the bookmark Routers there is a new icon Mikrotik versions. By clicking on the icon it will be displayed the list of supported and unsupported versions of Mikrotik. Mouse-over the specific number it will display detailed information about version.

PING SIZE SETTINGS

   Now it is possible to set up PING size what is for testing purposes for individual routers and devices

   Default value is 100 bytes and it is located in the menu Settings / Sys. settings / General using the variable "ping_size".

   For each router or device is possible to set individual size of the packet for PING. It is named as "Ping size" in the Settings of the router or device.

   In the case of setting a big PING size value it may cause larger network traffic.

PROCESS MANAGER

   In the menu Statistics / Processes there is now possible to terminate running processes from web interface. Each process named as "ISPadmin" is possible to terminate by clicking on the red cross icon and it will be terminated in one minute.

   Terminated processes are logged in the menu Statistics / Logger / Process manager.

CENTRAL STORE

   In the Client card / Goods from store there is a new column Status to show where the selected goods is assigned to.

 In the menu Settings / Sys. settings / Central store there is a new variable "central_store_items" to set up number of items on the invoice.

   In the menu Settings / Code books / Central store / Type of goods there is possible to add the date of warranty of the goods and it is assigned automatically when adding new goods to the store, but the condition is to have set the barcode.

INVOICING

   The menu Statistics / Logger pop-up menu Emails from bank is now visible only for the administrators with the rights Master admin or the user with permission Invoicing.

   In the menu Billing / Settings there is a new variable "form_of_billing_period" to set up date format for items on the invoice (e.g. Internet service). Like format MM/YY or MM/YYYY.

LOCALIZATION - IT

   The system doesn't check now VAT ID number only in numeric format and other characters are allowed as well

   Invoice doesn't contain the due date now

--- End ofChangelog_3.59-beta1"

3.59 - 23.11.2011 (EN)

STABLE version

Stable version contains all changes and new functions reported in versions:

   3.59 beta1

--- End ofChangelog_3.59"

Contents

   1 3.58 beta1 - 24.10.2011 EN

       1.1 NEWS

       1.2 BUGS

       1.3 MIKROTIK

       1.4 MIKROTIK - SUPPORTED VERSIONS

       1.5 MOTOROLA CANOPY

       1.6 INVOICING

       1.7 INVOICING - STAMP ON THE CASH PAYMENT DOCUMENT

       1.8 INVOICING - ACCOUNT CODING

       1.9 UBNT

     1.10 RADIUS

       1.11 USER PERMISSIONS

       1.12 CENTRAL STORE

       1.13 DVBC and IPTV Services

       1.14 SCHEDULING

       1.15 WIKI / Knowledgebase

       1.16 EXTERNAL LINK IN THE CLIENT CARD

       1.17 REQUEST FOR PAYMENT VIA SMS

       1.18 CMTS

       1.19 Localization IE ( Ireland )

       1.20 Localization HU ( Hungary )

3.58 beta1 - 24.10.2011 EN

NEWS

   Fixed some minor bugs reported by users

   The icon for Router reboot ( The menu tab Routers in the Heading ) moved on the left side of the icon for Ativation of the emergency mode

   In the Client card - Active services there is now displayed additional information like the name of administrator and date when the service was created

   In the menu Routers is added Paginating is now available in the menu Routers. Number of displayed routers can be set in the menu Settings / Sys. settings / General using the variable item_to_page. This value is also shared with the menu Users / Contacts etc.

   Now it is possible to show PING graph at UI ( User interface ). To enable this function it is necessary to allow variable tech_support_stat in the menu Setting / Sys. settings / User interface and in the Client card / Active service have enabled User monitoring and Show PING graph in UI

   In the Client card / Internet statistic there is possible to show removed services ( like as in the menu Active services is ) by clicking on the link Show removed services located on the top of the page

   Now it is possible to move any active service to another client. Option is located in the menu Client card / Active services / Move service. By clicking on the button system will display the list of the clients so just choose the client and the service will be moved after the confirmation. There is also possible to search by the name and customer's ID. This procedure is saved in the history of the service.

   In the menu Client card / Information bookmark Add the new note (bottom of the page) there is a new checkbox Display notice and when it is selected the system will display notice whenever the client card is opened.

   In the menu Other / Backups / Routers there is possible to order the list of backups regarding the each column

   The system now saves all pictures on the local HDD instead of database because it slowed down the system when contained a large amount of pictures

BUGS

   Fixed bug when client whose was suspended according to setting period Since - Until, was not re-enabled after the date "suspend until". This situation is saved in the menu Statistics / Logger item Automatically suspend users.

   The router is now possible to reboot even if the Monitoring mode is enabled.

   In the case when client is verified via Radius and in the Client card / Active service was enabled the checkbox Lock user the system did not apply changes of password to the Radius and it was unchanged. Now it is repaired.

   Fixed bug in HU ( hungary localization ) when the system generated incorrect LUHN codes on Hungarian check.

   In the case when Account coding was enabled for invoices ( Settings / Sys. settings / Invoicing ) it was not possible to delete row of the invoice while editing.

   On the page Customers / Home there was a incorrect filtering of content in Scheduling tasks.

   Fixed bug in the menu Billing / Settlements / History while printing overview to the PDF format the system displayed VS (variable symbol) and SS (specific symbol) what was not displayed on the Cash payment document.

MIKROTIK

   The menu Settings / Sys. settings / Mikrotik now contains the new variable reading_dynamic_routes. This setting will affect displaying of all Routed nets.

If the value is set to "0" (default) so in this case system read up only local routes. If the value is set to "1", the system reads up local routes + PPP + PPPoE routes. If the value is set to "2", system reads up all routes including dynamic routes (osfp, bgp). NOTICE: The value "2" may cause larger loading of the server because of more records in route tables.

MIKROTIK - SUPPORTED VERSIONS

   after the first login-in to the system there are displayed two tables with information about Supported and Unsupported versions of Mikrotik. This information will be downloaded from our server after login-in in to the system to have Up to date database of supported and unsupported versions. As you can see, it is obvious what is Supported (green) and what is unsupported (red) version. If the table doesn't contains requested version so it means that version has not been tested yet. This tables won't be displayed after the next login until the next update of the list from our server. Rollover the version the detailed description will be displayed.

   When the system find out any router with "unsupported" version, so it will display Notice on the top of the page Routers with detailed description of the reason.

MOTOROLA CANOPY

   Released support of Motorola Canopy devices. For now the communication is tested on firmware version 11.

   Support is in the experimental stage so if you find any incorrect behavior please contact us to This email address is being protected from spambots. You need JavaScript enabled to view it..

   System now reads data via SNMP ( nothing is written )

   In the menu Routers there is possible to select Canopy as a new Typ of the Router

   When the Canopy router is chosen it is possible to fill password for SNMP ( unit must contain it as well ) and the port, which set to 161 as a default value

   The system will also manage rebooting of the unit regarding the defined parameters when the checkbox "Router reboot" is enabled.

   The system now reads up information from Canopy like - Temperature, Uptime, Firware version, Interfaces including detailed information like Frequency, encryption, MAC address and it also displays Graphs of transfers on each interface

   Rollover the name of interface will display detailed information about the Wifi part

   In the menu Routers / Router status there is possible to display detailed information about Canopy units ( Uptime, Firmware version, temperature, etc. ) in the table.

   In the menu Routers thre is an option to assign another device ( bookmark "Add devices" in the heading of the router ) which are physically connected after this unit in topology.

INVOICING

   Income payment is now possible to add to the Client's credit after the import of statement from bank Billing / Bank /Import or after the automatic settling the payment from email in the case when the payment is assigned to the client (e.g. by client ID). This situation may occur in the case when client is sending payments as Standing order and earlier than the invoice is issued from the system and in this case it is not possible to settle the payment with any invoice. If the payment is added to the Client's credit and at the settings Billing / Settings / General the system variable "preplatky"is set to value "1", so when the new invoice is issued the system will count the overpayment on it automatically.

   When adding new rows on the standalone invoice, the system now show overview of total amount for columns "price with VAT / TAX", "price without VAT / TAX" and "VAT / TAX".

   The standalone invoice now contains more rows to add up to 15 items on it.

   In the menu Client card / Invoicing in the detail of the invoice there is a new button "Issue a copy of the invoice". By clicking on it the system displays pop-up window where are all rows from original invoice already copied. This function is mentioned for cases when issuing a new invoices e.g. for two months with larger number of rows which are repeated.

   In the menu Billing / Overviews / Billing there is possible to search by total amount on the invoice or the within the defined range from - to. E.g. when it is filled from 10 CZK ('to is not set) so the system will search whole database for all invoices starting with 10 CZK.

   In the menu Billing / Settings / Invoice groups there is possible to set position of stamp on the invoice with check for each invocing group. This settings is now separated for clients which are using invoices with checks.

INVOICING - STAMP ON THE CASH PAYMENT DOCUMENT

   In the menu Billing / Settings / Invoicing groups there is possible to set a Stamp what will be displayed on the cash payment document.

   Recommended settings in millimetres:

   Width: 50,

   Stamp - cash payment document - Left margin: 130,

   Stamp - cash payment document - Top margin: 115

   When the stamp is set so it will be displayed on all next cash payment documents

INVOICING - ACCOUNT CODING

   Now it is possible to assign accounT code for each item on the standalone invoice. This option has to be enabled in the menu Billing / Settings using variable "predkontace".

   In the menu Billing / Settings / Account code there is possible to fill Code list of account code which will be used while issuing the standalone invoice for the client.

   The menu Billing / Overviews / Billing displays detailed statistic of invoiced amount regarding the account coding. It is viewable only when the checkbox View statistics for each service.

UBNT

   Now it is possible to assign additional device to UBNT router (located in the heading of each router "Add device"), it is the same as for Mikrotik router. There it is possible to add another Point-to-Point connections. If the MAC address is set it will be added to do MAC list in the UBNT router automatically.

   Added control if the update of the configuration of MAC list finished correctly. In the past, and in some cases, the update has not been finished successfully and the system didn't try to upload it again. No if the update fails the system will try it in period of 5 minutes.

   Information about unsuccessful communication with UBNT device is saved in the menu Statistics / Logger at the pop-up menu "Ubiquity errors".

   If the communication with UBNT device is unsuccessful, so the icon of SSH connection in the heading of the router is displayed in red. All routers with error is possible to display by clicking on Error button located below the search filed on the top of the page Routers

RADIUS

   Added graphs of the clients

   System now draw graphs also for clients which are authorized via Radius like for standard internet service. In the client card in the menu "Internet statistic" there are displayed graphs of transfered data.

USER PERMISSIONS

   The technician with permission "Main admin" (NOT "Master admin") now has access to followed menu items:

-- Others / Backups / Routers

-- Update of configuration for all routers

-- Statistics / Server stats / Processes

-- Statistics / Syslog

CENTRAL STORE

   Re-programmed adding of warranty of the goods. To simplify managing there is possible to fill number of months instead of whole date. This information is also displayed in the detail of the goods. Goods in old date format will be automatically converted to appropriate number of months after the update.

   In the menu Settings / Sys. settings / Central store the variable "central_store_warranty" is no longer displayed in years but in months now.

   In the menu Central store / Store there is a button "Assign" located on the top of the table to avoid scrolling when the list is too long.

   When the goods is assigned to any client there is also displayed his Client ID.

   In the menu Central store / Store there is a new checkbox "'Show goods at the router" as additional option how to filter the content more detailed.

DVBC and IPTV Services

   Fixed bug , the package menu for DVBC service was not displayed correctly when choosing tariff

   Monthly cost now contains fees for packages, if they are active at service

   In the Client card menu IPTV set top box there is a new checkbox "Access to archive" and "Enable encryption".

SCHEDULING

   Emails for technicians from Scheduling module now contains internal note from the system and tickets sent to the end customers are logged in the History of already sent emails in the client card.

   Printed service list from scheduling module now contains information about date of task creation.

WIKI / Knowledgebase

   Newly added internal Wikipedia for creation of your own knowledgebase

   Located in the menu Others / Wiki.

   On the left side there is possible to create new folders to separate topics. Right click on the icon displays option to Add, edit or delete folder.

   Each folder can include a note with the name, text and option if the note is private or public. Public note is visible to all users. Private note is visible only to owner (author) of the note. Only the person who create the note is able to edit it! Users with Master admin can see all folders and notes, it doesn't matter if it is private or public BUT they are not able to edit the notes if are not an author.

   Unlimited attachments shall be assigned for each note.

   If the folder contains any note, so the system will display the list of notes included with the name, author and the date of last edit

   Each note include history of editing by clicking on the icon. It will display all versions of the note with the date of the update

   It is also possible to search through the list and notes using the fulltext seach option.

EXTERNAL LINK IN THE CLIENT CARD

   Newly it is possible to display external link to another web application. This link is usable e.g. for connection with PBX when by clicking on the link the system will call client directly.

   In the menu Settings / Sys. settings / General using the variable "external_client_link", where is possible to define this external link. It is also possible to use System variables like for creating of contracts is. List of system variables could be displayed e.g. in the menu Settings / Contracts.

   External link would looks like following example: http://www.ispadmin.eu?phone=$&mobile_phone=$

   External link is located in the client card "Information".

REQUEST FOR PAYMENT VIA SMS

   Newly added function of automatic sending requests for payment via SMS.

   Sending of SMS is provided via online service http://www.sms-brana.sk and also via HW SMS Gateway connected to the server.

   In the menu Billing / Settings / Reminders there is possible to define if the request for payment will be send by email, SMS or both ways.

   For each way there is a special window to define text of the request of payment.

   The option to send request for payment via SMS containcs information about chars and total number of SMS which will be send for one customer with one message.

   In the list of requests of payment there is graphically displayed if the request was sent via SMS or via email.

   If the request of payments sent from the system manually Billing / Reminders so the way How to send it (email, SMS) is defined according to selected template.

CMTS

   Displaying of back channels for ARRIS C4 headend has been fixed.

   Added displaying of detailed information of back channels for ARRIS C4 headend.

Localization IE ( Ireland )

   Added a new field "County" in the information page about client .

   Postcode code is not necessary to fill now.

Localization HU ( Hungary )

   The check displayed the wrong price in the case when the overpayment was debited from the invoice

   Fixed bug, when the system wrote the incorrect Client's name to the cancelled invoice.

   Field for Bank account number in the client card has been extended to 24 chars.

--- End ofChangelog_3.58-beta1"

3.58 beta2 - 26.10.2011 ENGLISH

BUGS

   Fixed some minor bugs reported by users.

--- End ofChangelog_3.58-beta2"

3.58 - 1.11.2011 ENGLISH

STABLE version

Stable version contains all changes and new functions reported in versions:

   3.58 beta1

   3.58 beta2

--- End ofChangelog_3.58"

Contents

   1 3.57-beta1 - 1.9.2011 ENGLISH

       1.1 BUGS

       1.2 NEWS

       1.3 MIKROTIK

       1.4 UBIQUITY

       1.5 INVOICING

       1.6 IPEX VoIP operator - automatic data (calls) import

       1.7 SCHEDULING

       1.8 CMTS

       1.9 CENTRAL STORE

       1.10 HU localization

3.57-beta1 - 1.9.2011 ENGLISH

BUGS

   Fixed some minor bugs reported by users.

   Fixed bug when it wasn't possible to pay through PayPal from user interface. PayPal changed some important values in the source code.

   When "Additional item" on the invoice was copied, so in this case system fill the price to the wrong column.

   Fixed bug for invoice preview in the client card ( mouse rollover ) where were uncorrectly displayed some items for General service.

NEWS

   In the menu with technician permissions Settings / Administrators there is a new checkbox Send requests from UI. According this option is possible to choose which technician will receive requests from UI (User interface).

   The password to UI is generated automatically when the new client is added to the system. In the past it was necessary to fill it manually, but now there are both options.

   In the menu Users / Contacts fulltext now search through Client's bank account as well

   In the menu Users / Contacts added to filter clients Without GPS coordinates from pop-menu Details.

   The menu Routers has a new icon for router reboot (located at the header of each router next to the icon test connection). Only administrators with "Master admin" permission are able to see this icon. When Mikrotik router lost connection via SSH (with enabled API), so it is possible to reboot router directly from the system and reconnect SSH communication. When the API is disabled, system will try reboot via SSH. Rebooting of UBNT routers is possible only via SSH.

   DVBC service now contains some new items "Discount", "Monthly fee", "Installation fee" and "Refundable deposit".

   Date "Contract valid till:" is now displayed (if it is set) in the client card in the menu Internet statistics (bellow entry Connected from) and in the menu "Active services" (beloww entry Connected from).

   In the menu Settings / Code lists / End devices at the item Client's end devices there is possible to assign port on which is available web interface of the device. When adding Internet service with predefined device so in this case the szstem will fill PORT automatically.

   Information received through SNMP template (Settings / Others / SNMP OID) are transfered from STRING type to the numeric values and the system will try to draw graphs from these informations, if it is possible. Example: Now it is possible to add entry value "Temperature 25° C" and the numeric result is value "25".

MIKROTIK

   Sometimes when updating of configuration through web interface the system didn't finish update correctly and display only blank page. Now it is repaired.

   System now read whole route table what is possible to display in the menu Routers by clicking on the icon Routed nets. On the bottom of the page there are displayed Routed nets at the router. As a new item there is a checkbox Display whole route table. If the checkbox is active so it will display whole route table including dynamic routes (if it is used).

UBIQUITY

   System now provide automatic backups of configuration of UBNT devices (likewise backups of the Mikrotik routers). Configurations is possible to display in the menu "Others / Backups / Routers".

   Extended communication with UBNT units, where are MAC addresses of the clients applied to the ACL actively.

   While editting the Internet service there are displayed UBNT devices at access points which have in parameter QOS set this router. It means, that at first it is necessary to set up entry Do QOS at router correctly.

Procedure: Set QOS parameter - choose router for shaping ( Pop-up menu "Access point" now contains UBNT units) - select Access point - system apply MAC address of the client to the UBNT device.

   When the option show_hw_end_equipment is enabled in the menu Settings / Syst. settings / General, so in this case system display WiFi users with particular parameters.

   The system sets ACL in active communication with UBNT unit according to following rules:

       1) Do control and ACL MAC update at UBNT unit only in the case when MAC filter is enabled in the router settings. If the MAC filter is disabled, the system doesn't do any control or update and table persists without any changes.

       2) MAC filter enabled cause deleting of previous ACL configuration and uploading of the new one regarding connected users

       3) MAC filter enabled but no client has been found, so in this case the table stay unchanged

   UBNT router types have new button for manual restoration of configuration likewise Mikrotik routers have ( icon is located in the header of each router on the right side )

INVOICING

   Supported automatic settling of import from FIO bank via email payment notification. Email account for this purpose is possible to set in the menu Billing / Settings / Bank - email. In present the system supports automatic paymnet imports from these banks: ČSOB, Reiffeisen bank, Poštovní spořitelna and from FIO bank (detailed description in the changelog version 3.51).

   Pro-forma invoice now contains the client number as well (bellow VS - variable symbol).

   In the menu Billing / Settings / Invoice templates there is possible to set accounting code if this option is enabled in the menu Billing / Settings / General variable accounting_code. When the invoice template has set Accounting code, so in the case of issuing standalone invoice from Client card, the system will assign it automatically.

   In the menu with settings about administrator permissions (Settings / Administrators) there is a new permission Issue invoices for clients. If this option is enabled the administrator doesn't see menu Billing, but he is able to issue invoices (Client card / Invoicing) for individual customers.

IPEX VoIP operator - automatic data (calls) import

   Added function for automatic import of all call from IPEX VoIP operator what is realizes through IPEX SOAP gate.

   For proper functionality it is necessary to contact the IPEX company to create an account with Username and password for communication with the SOAP gate. Username and Password is necessary set up in the menu Settings / Syst. settings / General', variable voipex_username and voipex_password.

   When all settings are correct the system import calls from IPEX automatically every 15 minutes.

   Imported data with detailed description (call start / end, price, destination, ...) are displayed in the menu Others / VOIP import / Overviews and also in the client card in the menu Active services / VoIP service / Call list. For proper displaying of calls in hte Client card it is necessary to have right settings for VoIP service and telephone number as well because call imports are settled according to the telephone number.

 All information about automatic import is possible to display in the menu Statistics / Logger pop-up menu Communication with the IPEX SOAP gateway.

SCHEDULING

   When choosing task there is a possibility to select a service. If the client has only one service so it is selected automatically.

CMTS

   system now display all Downstream and Upstream from headend CISCO UBR 722x correctly. In the past there was only data from interface Cable3/0. System now detects all installed interfaces automatically and displays received values including SNR from individual Upstream.

CENTRAL STORE

   Goods from Central store is now possible assign even for routers and not only for clients. Goods is possible to display in the menu Central store / Store, pop-up menu Stats.

HU localization

   OC31 cheque support finished.

   Corrected displaying of cheque.

--- End ofChangelog_3.57-beta1"

3.57 - 9.9.2011 ENGLISH

STABLE VERSION

Stable version contains all changes and new functions reported in versions:

   3.57 beta1

--- End ofChangelog_3.57"

Contents

   1 3.56 beta1 - 1.8.2011 ENGLISH

       1.1 BUGS

       1.2 INVOICING BUG

       1.3 NEWS

       1.4 PROCESS MANAGER

       1.5 MIKROTIK

       1.6 PODPORA MIKROTIKU VERZE 5

       1.7 FAKTURACE

       1.8 FAKTURACE PÁROVÁNÍ PLATEB Z EMAILU Z RAIFFAISEN BANKY

       1.9 FAKTURACE DOBROPISY

       1.10 UPDATE ROUTERŮ

        1.11 CENTRÁLNÍ SKLAD

       1.12 PLÁNOVÁNÍ

       1.13 UKLÁDÁNÍ DOKUMENTŮ

3.56 beta1 - 1.8.2011 ENGLISH

BUGS

   Fixed some minor bugs reported by users

   In the Client card section while adding new additional item on the invoice there was a bug when trying use comma as a number separator. Now it is corrected and functional for comma and point sign as well.

   Fixed bug about bank import statement in ABO format from GE Money Bank. At the end of each file there were several blank rows which caused incorrect import of this statement type.

   When the system identified any API failure on the router, it will display red icon API but when communication via API was disabled (only SSH enabled) so the red icon didn't disappear. Now it's repaired.

INVOICING BUG

   Corrected function about invoicing of services which are automatically stopped regarding to specified date. In the Client card / Active service / edit Internet service there is an entry Automatically stop service:. Now invoicing for the client is inactive between specified dates.

   In the past system didn't display description of tariff on the invoice correctly when in the Internet service the tariff was selected as Unlisted.

   In the case when pro-forma invoice was released and before it was paid someone edited annex of this invoice (text on the bottom of document) so the text was not edited on the pro-forma invoice but on the original invoice. Not it is corrected.

NEWS

   In this version is possible to set max. number of sent SMS from user interface ( more in changelog version 3.53 beta1 ). In the menu Settings / Syst. settings / User interface variable "sms_gateway_msg_per_month" which allows specified number of SMS per month sent from User interface and variable "sms_gateway_msg_length" which specify max. length of one SMS sent from UI. In the client card there is possible to set up number of SMS per month for each client manually (Client card / Information).

   In the menu Users there are two new options to select from the Details menu, it is "Company customer" and "Private person".

   In the menu Routers / Router status / WiFi clients there are two new columns "Frequency" and "SSID". Whole table can be filtered regarding these columns.

   V uživatelském rozhraní pro klienty je zakázána možnost změnit si své jméno a příjmení a nově je přidána možnost zaškrtnout "Faktury emailem", kde si zákazník může nastavit formu zasílání faktur. Každá změna nastavení je logována a zobrazuje se v historii každého klienta.

   V menu Uživatelé / Internet je nově možné zobrazit sloupce "Poznámka" a "HW koncového zařízení". Jejich zobrazení je možné nastavit v menu Nastavení / Syst. nastavení / Zal. Internet.

   Okamžitou zálohu systému ISPadmin je možné spustit příkazem "ispadmin_backup". Jedná se o link na zálohovací script "/usr/local/script/ispadmin/backup_system.pl".

   V případě že nepoužíváte evidenci materiálu ( v kartě klienta záložka "Materiál" ), tak je nyní možné vypnout použití materiálu v systému. To uděláte v menu Nastavení / Syst. nastavení / Obecné / klíč "material".

   Pokud se v kartě klienta odesílá email ( "karta klienta / Informace / Odeslat email" ), tak je nyní možné přiložit maximálně 5 souborů jako přílohu. Původně bylo možné přiložit pouze 3 soubory.

   V případě že se pro připojení klientů používá PPPoE ( nikoli RADIUS ), tak se automaticky vyčítá z aktivního PPPoE spojení hodnota "Caller ID", která se propíše do aktivní služby "Internet" jako MAC adresa klienta a tím se na klienta aplikují standardní pravidla firewallu.

PROCESS MANAGER

   Ve verzi 3.54 byla přidána nová funkce zobrazení aktuálně běžících procesů včetně dostupných podrobností ( router, se kterým proces komunikuje, doba běhu procesu ...)

   Zařízení Ubiquity občas nestandardně ukončí komunikaci a také například při chybovosti na lince může nastat stav, kdy spojení na router je stále navázáno, ale žádná komunikace neprobíhá a proces stále na serveru běží a spotřebovává čas CPU. Nově byla implementována fukce "Process manager". Tento process manager každému startujícímu procesu, který komunikuje s routerem přidělí přesně určené "časové okno", ve kterém musí být komunikace korektně ukončena. Pokud k tomuto ukončení nedojde, tak je proces ps managerem ukončen, aby nedocházelo ke zbytečnému zatěžování CPU serveru a tím zpomalení celého systému. V případě "násilného" ukončení procesu systémem je možné odeslat email a událost je zaznamenána do logu. Díky process manageru by se nemělo stávat, že bude CPU extrémně vytížen ani v případě opakované chybné komunikace s routery.

   V menu Nastavení / Syst. nastavení / Obecné je možné aktivovat odeslání informací o neukončených procesech na email. Pokud se nastaví klíč "ps_manager_send_info" na hodnotu 1, tak se bude odesílat info emailem na emailovou adresu uvedenou v klíči "admin_email".

   Informace o neukončených procesech se ukládá do menu Statistiky / Logger, kde je možné je zobrazit přes pop-up menu v položce "Process manager".

   V menu Statistiky / Stat. Serveru / Procesy je nově přidáno přepínací tlačítko pro zobrazení pouze procesů ISPadmin a nebo pro zobrazení všech procesů. Výchozí nastavení je zobrazení pouze běžících procesů systému ISPadmin.

MIKROTIK

   Byl upraven script na ukládání binárních záloh Mikrotiku, kde se občas binární záloha přestala ukládat. Většinou ukládání binárních záloh bylo přerušeno po výměně hardware nebo po změně verze mikrotiku, kdy se změnily SSH klíče pro komunikaci. Nyní by tyto věci měly být eliminovány a binární zálohy by měly fungovat i po změně HW nebo verze Mikrotiku.

   Přidána kontrola duplicitních pravidel, která se v mikrotiku občas objevily ( například při nekorektně ukončeném nebo přerušeném spojení ). Pokud systém objeví duplicitní pravidla, tak je odstraní.

PODPORA MIKROTIKU VERZE 5

   I ve verzi 5.x se stále objevují problémy s komunikací přes SSH. Mikrotik tyto věci prozatím neřeší a ani v posledních verzích se situace nijak nezměnila. Detailním rozborem jsme zjistili, že k přerušení komunikace dojde vždy v případě požadavku na změnu velikosti TCP "okna" při SSH komunikaci. Tuto změnu velikosti provádí pouze mikrotik verze 5.x, starší verze Mikrotiku ( 3.x a 4.x ) tuto změnu neprovádějí a proto pravděpodobně komunikace funguje.

   Provedli jsme úpravu systémových knihoven na serveru, které by měli změně velikosti okna ze strany mikrotiku zamezit a tím by měla komunikace korektně fungovat i na mikrotiku verze 5.x .

FAKTURACE

   V kartě klienta v přehledu vystavených faktur je možné zobrazit celkový náhled položek faktury najetím myší na číslo faktury. Po najetí myší na číslo faktury se zobrazí všechny položky na faktuře, takže pro rychlý náhled ( například pokud vyhledáváme nějaký údaj na faktuře ) není nutné jednotlivé faktury otevírat v PDF.

   V menu Fakturace / Přehledy jsou zobrazeny fakturované částky za jednotlivé měsíce. Nově je v levém horním rohu tabulky nový checkbox "Zobrazit statistiku za jednotlivé služby". Po označení tohoto chekboxu se tabulka rozšíří o detailní rozpis fakturovaných částek za jednotlivé služby ( Internet, Obecná služba, CATV .... ) v daném měsíci.

   Přidána nová položka do Fakturace / Nastavení / Obecné klíč "reminder_additional_item_desc". Zde je možnost nastavit popis průběžné položky vytvořené při generování upomínky, která se přidá v případě zpoplatnění odesílané upomínky.

   Při fakturaci služby CATV je zde nová položka "Fakturovat od" podobně jako u služby Internet.

   V nastavení fakturace ( Fakturace / Nastavení ) je nová položka "proforma_invoice_number". Pokud je nastavena na 0, tak na zálohové faktuře je vždy uvedeno číslo faktury jako číslo klienta. Pokud je nastavena hodnota 1, tak se vytvoří 10ti místné číslo faktur, kde pro první 3 místa systém použije nastavený prefix pro zálohové faktury z položky "proforma_prefix" v nastavení fakturace a zbylých 7 míst je počet vystavených faktur doplněných zleva nulami.

   Pro lepší orientaci jsou očíslované řádky v menu Fakturace / Přeplatky a také se zde nezobrazují již započtené přeplatky.

FAKTURACE PÁROVÁNÍ PLATEB Z EMAILU Z RAIFFAISEN BANKY

   Přidána funkce párování plateb z emailů, které banka zasílá při připsání platby na účet, podpobně jako párování plateb z banky ČSOB ( viz. verze 3.51, kde jsou uvedeny podrobnosti nastavení pro párování plateb z emailu ).

   Reiffeisen banka umožňuje nadefinovat přesnou strukturu emailu, podle kterého je později zasíláno oznámení o příchozích platbách. Tento template musí být správně nastaven, jinak automatické párování nebude fungovat správně!

   Template musí vypadat následovně

   Info_o_platbe

   Jmeno_Z: %DAN%

   Z: %DN%

   Na: %CN%

   Realizovano:%RA%

   Mena: %CC%

   Dne: %RD%

   Ks: %TCS%

   Vs: %CVS%

   Ss: %TSS%

   Zprava: %CI%

FAKTURACE DOBROPISY

   Přepracován systém vystavování a práce s dobropisy.

   Nově se dobropis jmenuje "Opravný daňový doklad".

   Dobropis je možné vystavit v kartě klienta v menu "Fakturace" a kliknutím na "detail faktury". Zde je odkaz "Vystavit opravný daňový doklad".

   Při vystavení dobropisu se zobrazí seznam všech položek na dobropisované faktuře, kde je možné označit jednotlivé položky, které mají být dobropisované. Také je možné změnit počet kusů ( například pokud se z roční faktury dobropisuje pouze několik měsíců provozu Internetu ). Dále je možné připsat dobropisovanou částku do kreditu ( kterým se dá případně uhradit jiná faktura ) v případě, že se dobropisovaná částka neodesílá zpět na zákazníkův účet. Je možné nastavit datum vystavení a vypsat "důvod dobropisování", což je popis a důvod vystavení dobropisu ( povinná položka ).

   Po vystavení dobropisu je možné jej vytisknout a zaslat klientovi, který jej musí vrátit podepsaný zpět.

   Pokud se vrátí od zákazníka podepsaný dobropis, tak je možné provést "Potvrzení opravného daňového dokladu" v detailu dobropisu. Při potvrzení dobropisu je možné nastavit datum vrácení a také případně číslo účtu, kam budou zaslány peníze zpět ( v případě, že nebyla částka připsána do kreditu ).

UPDATE ROUTERŮ

   V předchozích verzích se při změně jakéhokoliv routeru prováděl update konfigurace všech routerů, což bylo časově náročné a zatížení CPU při větším počtu routerů bylo také celkem vysoké.

   Nyní se při změně parametrů routeru ( změna komunikace na API/SSH, změna IP atd... ) provede update konfigurace pouze editovaného routeru a ostatní routery zůstanou nedotčené.

   V případě potřeby je možné spustit update konfigurace všech routerů kliknutím v menu Routery na odkaz "Update všech routerů". Tímto se na pozadí spustí kontrola a případný reload konfigurace na všech routerech.

CENTRÁLNÍ SKLAD

   Stornované zboží z centrálního skladu je možné úplně odstranit ze systému. Toto je možné v záložce Nastavení / Syst. Nastavení / Centrální Sklad kliknutím na tlačítko "Odstranit stornované zboží ze systému".

PLÁNOVÁNÍ

   Nyní je možné k úkolu v Plánování připojit soubor. Soubor lze nahrát při přidávání a editaci úkolu v Plánování. Lze jej potom také smazat. Vše se ukládá do historie k danému úkolu.

   Nyní je možné zobrazit úkoly již odstraněných techniků. V menu Plánování / Přehled v pop-up menu "Technik" se zobrazují i odstranění technici. Je to z důvodu zobrazení úkolů, které například technik nestihl splnit.

   V nastavení Plánování ( Nastavení / Syst. Nastavení / Plánování je možné nastavit nový klíč "planning_email_from", který nastaví při odesílání ticketů klientům emailovou adresu odesílatele ( pro odpověď ) a klíč "planning_email_from_txt", který nastaví "jméno" emailu, ze kterého je ticket odesílán ( například "Servisní oddělení" ).

   Přidána možnost nadefinovat si předmět emailu při přidání, úpravě a odstranění úkolu v Plánování. Předmět je možné nadefinovat v Nastavení / Syst. nastavení / Plánování klíč "planning_email_subject_add", "planning_email_subject_edit" a "planning_email_subject_end". V předmětu emailu je také možnost použít systémové proměnné pro klienta tak, že je možné do předmětu emailu propsat například jméno klienta, telefon.

UKLÁDÁNÍ DOKUMENTŮ

   Vzhledem k tomu, že u některých providerů se časem nashromáždilo několik tisíc dokumentů ( v kartě klienta záložka "Dokumenty" ), které byly původně uloženy v databázi, došlo ke zpomalení systému při práci s těmito dokumenty. Z tohoto důvodu došlo ke změně interního ukládání dokumentů, kdy se dokumenty neukládají do databáze, ale ukládají se jako soubory na disku.

   Při updatu dojde k automatické konverzi dokumentů, která může v případě velkého počtu dokumentů trvat déle ( cca 20-30 minut při několika tisících dokumentů - 30GB ). V této době může být systém hodně vytížen.

--- End ofChangelog_3.56-beta1"

Contents

   1 3.56 beta2 - 3.8.2011 ENGLISH

       1.1 BUGS

       1.2 NEWS

       1.3 MIKROTIK

       1.4 SMS

3.56 beta2 - 3.8.2011 ENGLISH

BUGS

   Updated limits for PROCESS MANAGER for correct running of individual scripts.

   Corrected minor bugs reported by users about creating credit note ( Repaired VAT document ).

NEWS

   In the Client card section / menu item "Internet statistic" there is a new field for client's mobile phone numbet ( In the past there was only land line number ).

MIKROTIK

   In the menu tab Settings / Sys. settings / General there is a new configuration variable "modemip_fw_use". When it is enabled (value 1 as a default setting), so then the system adds also IP addresses for HW devices ( allow communication ). When the variable is set to 0 value so IP addresses are not added to the Firewall.

   BEWARE !!! If the IP address is from user range for WiFi, so the maintenance will not get there because DROP rule is applied for the whole subnet assigned for users. This setting is possible to use only in the case when devices for clients are in different range than clients are.

SMS

   Implemented functionality about sending of SMS from the system ISPadmin through the gateway http://www.sms-brana.sk. to enable this function is simply enough to create an account and after it fill Username and Password to the ISPadmin in the menu Settings / Sys. settings / General variable "sms_api_login", "sms_api_password", "sms_api_country_code" and item "sms_notify" set to the value "2".

   If the settings is correct so the system will send all SMS ( except notifications from NAGIOS ) through this SMS gateway.

--- End ofChangelog_3.56-beta2"

Contents

   1 3.56 - 8.8.2011 ENGLISH

       1.1 STABLE VERSION

       1.2 STABLE VERSION

       1.3 BUGS

3.56 - 8.8.2011 ENGLISH

STABLE VERSION

STABLE VERSION

Stable version contains all changes and new functions reported in versions:

   3.56 beta1

   3.56 beta2

BUGS

   Fixed bug when while editting of additional item on the invoice the system add second VAT on the same price and it caused double VAT price.

--- End ofChangelog_3.56"

3.55 - 31.5.2011 EN

STABLE version

BUGS

   Fixed bug when, in some case, system did not send reminders.

   Fixed bug when system did not do encryption of backups in the case when the password for encrypting was set.

--- End ofChangelog_3.55"

Contents

   1 3.54-beta1 - 3.5.2011 ENGLISH

       1.1 BUGS

       1.2 NEWS

       1.3 DISPLAYING OF BETA VERSIONS, UPDATES

       1.4 SYSTEM BACKUP ENCRYPTION

       1.5 SEARCH ROUTER BY SSID

       1.6 SYSLOG

3.54-beta1 - 3.5.2011 ENGLISH

BUGS

   Fixed some bugs reported by users

   When the type of the router was changed from Mikrotik to UBNT (device change), the system did not delete original interfaces and it was impossible to delete it.

   When system and router configuration backups are not encrypted (we strongly recommend it) so in this case there was no information about binary backup of the Mikrotik router in the menu "Others / Backups / Routers".

   Fixed some minor bugs about DVBC service

NEWS

   In the menu "Users / Contacts" there is new option "Do not stop" to choose from "Details" menu. By choosing this option the system display all clients who have set "Do not stop" in client card in the case of unpaid invoice(s).

   In the menu "Settings / Info page" system now checks right format of IP address because when provider filled there text string without any sense so the problem has occured when the system try to write it to Mikrotik.

   In the client card (Information page) there are two new fields "Internal note 1" and "Internal note 2". It serves for additional internal information which can be displayed in contracts (E.g. special number of contract, etc.)

   In template of the contract is possible to add these new Internal notes as variables $INTERNAL_NOTE_1$ and $INTERNAL_NOTE_2$

   In template of the contract is possible to add new variable $USER_GOODS$. This variable will display all goods delivered to client. Template is possible to create in the menu "Settings / Contracts" and contracts with goods is possible to create in the menu "Client card / Goods from store / New contract".

DISPLAYING OF BETA VERSIONS, UPDATES

   After login in to the system there is information about current STABLE version of the system and next to it is current BETA version. Available Beta version is displayed only in the case when the variable "dont_show_beta_version" is set to "0" value (Settings / Sys. settings)

   now it is possible to choose what version will be installed Stable or Beta. When the command for update is written the system displays hint about available Stable and Beta version and using right parameter is possible to choose needed version to install.

   STABLE version command "ispadmin_update stable"

   BETA version command "ispadmin_update beta"

SYSTEM BACKUP ENCRYPTION

   Since the version 3.47 was released it is possible to encrypt system and router backups. Provider what could not remember the password was not able to reload system from these backups so regarding these experiences system requires email address where is possible to send password in the case of lost or forgotten password. To change or set password is possible to use command:

"/usr/local/script/ispadmin/ispadmin_backup_crypt.pl" We strongly recommend to set password again to avoid above mentioned cases.

SEARCH ROUTER BY SSID

   Page with information about service Internet now contains the new Item "Search router by SSID". It is usable e.g. when technician measure signal of the client but do not know what router is SSID assigned for. By clicking on the new item (below the selected router while adding or editing service Internet) system display new window with all available SSID. Choosing one of them the system fill correct Router to do field automatically. Fulltext searching by SSID is also available. Router where the clients is connected for is possible to choose from pop-up menu like in the past.

SYSLOG

   When the Syslog is disabled in the menu "Settings / Sys. settings / Syslog" system delete all stored records from Mikrotik ("System / logging")

   In the menu "Statistics / Syslog" there is the new button "Delete records". Only "Master admin" has permission to see this option to delete selected records from database (e.g. for some router). It is usable while system stored more records than needed.

   page flipping is available now on the top and on the bottom of the page.

--- End ofChangelog_3.54-beta1"

Contents

   1 3.54-beta2 - 22.5.2011 EN

       1.1 BUGS

       1.2 NEWS

       1.3 SYSTEM PROCESSES MONITORING

      1.4 VPN SERVER

       1.5 WIFI LINES MONITORING

       1.6 INVOICING - AUTOMATIC BANK STATEMENT PAIRING FROM DIRECTORY

       1.7 CENTRAL STORE

3.54-beta2 - 22.5.2011 EN

BUGS

   System did not provide recalculation of "main" Queue tree when time for tariff with aggregation (not 1:1) was changed ("Settings / Tariffs")

   System now gets settings of frequency of Mikrotik WiFi card from "/interface wireless monitor" where is always current frequency. In the past system got this information from "/interface wireless" but in case when card was in station mode the frequency is set by sender side.

   Fixed bug in invoicing module where in the case of using " (comma mark) system print only part of the text on invoice before this comma mark.

NEWS

   In the menu "Settings / Info page / Allowed pages" system now check correctness of the page IP address. Field for IP now accept only correct IP address.

SYSTEM PROCESSES MONITORING

   In the menu "Statistics / Server stats" there is the new menu item "Processes". List contains all running processes on the server like Process ID or CPU time. It is possible to display all processes or ISPadmin processes only. This state is in the first column.

   Some ISPadmin processes contains Router ID, name and process time. These information are available only for processes which communicates with Mikrotik routers or UBNT, eventually processes what updates configuration on routers.In the case when process is not terminated correctly (e.g. communication failure, unsupported version of router, etc.) information about this process time and name of the router is available in the list. It serves to diagnostic "Problem" routers in the case when server contains many running processes which are not terminated correctly.

   Table data is possible arrange by clicking on the name of column.

   In the next few version it will be possible to terminate processes manually and system will be able to terminate processes automatically as well.

VPN SERVER

   In the menu "Settings / Sys. settings" there is the new menu item "VPN server" where it is possible to define VPN server what provides option to connect dislocated network with the system ISPadmin. When it is set up correctly secured VPN PPTP tunnel coded by MPPE128. For connection it is possible to use PPTP client on the Mikrotik router or different OS.

   To create new VPN server is necessary to fill several information about connection like name, username, password, remote IP (set automatically). This IP address will get the opposite side of VPN tunnel when the connection is successfully done. At last there is possible to fill "Allowed IP for connection". It does mean IP address what servers for connection on the VPN server. Default value is "*". In this case it is possible to connect on VPN server from all IP addresses without restriction.

   When the VPN tunnel is ready so it is possible to set up routed nets from far distances. E.g. when the far distance network has IP range 10.3.0.0/16 for router and for end devices so this IP range is possible to assign to VPN tunnel and all operations from ISPadmin on this IP range will be redirected through this VPN tunnel to provide communication with devices at dislocated network.

   Parameter change is activated in 1 minute. Active VPN tunnel is necessary to disconnect and reconnect again to see parameter changes (e.g. routed nets).

   Page with defined VPN tunnels contains icon what defines online or offline connection (red or green icon).

   WARNING: All manual VPN connection located in configuration file will be DELETED , after setting up VPN tunnels in ISPadmin !!! So please keep it on mind.

WIFI LINES MONITORING

   In the menu "Routers / Router status" there is new menu item "WiFi lines". It contains realized connections between Mikrotik routers. System automatically checks both sides of lines by MAC address and SSID. The mentioned list of realized connection contains names of routers, SSID, frequency and SNR at both sides of the line.

   Next version will probably contains detailed graphs for both sides of the line.

INVOICING - AUTOMATIC BANK STATEMENT PAIRING FROM DIRECTORY

   Bank statements is now possible to pair from directory in ABO format (postfix .gpc). This function designed for external applications which are able to export statements to the defined directory and regarding it the ISPadmin is able to pair statements from defined directory automatically.

   To use this function it is necessary to ensure saving of bank statements (by external application) to the directory "/data/support/ispadmin/vypisy/autoload/". System checking new statement with .gpc postfix each 5 minutes (other files are ignored). After import system displays standard list of paired and unpaired payments in the menu "Billing / Bank / Import".

   Automatic import accept only ABO format files with .gpc postfix. Other type of files will be ignored !!!

CENTRAL STORE

   In the menu "Settings / Syst. settings / Central store" there is the new variable "central_store_invoice_date" to set date of invoicing when goods is assigned to the store. This value ("-1 or 0 or 2 etc.") affects Date of invoicing what is set by clicking on "Add goods" icon.

   Now it is possible to define items with more same units added to the system e.g. "Conector RJ45 - 100 units(same)". Units must be set to value "units(same)" to be able define any amount.

   Menu "Settings / Syst. settings / central store" now contains new variable "central_store_column_sale_price" to display Sale price.

--- End ofChangelog_3.54-beta2"

3.54 - 24.5.2011 EN

STABLE VERSION

Stable version contains all changes and new functions reported in versions:

   3.54 beta1

   3.54 beta2

BUGS

   System now displays correct graphs for Mikrotik v.5 on each interface when data flow is larger then 100 Mbit.

--- End ofChangelog_3.54"

Contents

   1 3.53-beta1 - 04.2.2011 ENGLISH

       1.1 BUGS

       1.2 GENERAL

       1.3 MIKROTIK

       1.4 SMS FROM USER INTERFACE

       1.5 SYSLOG

       1.6 EXCEED FUP - notification

       1.7 OBNOVA SYSTÉMU V PŘÍPADĚ HAVÁRIE

       1.8 SLUŽBA VOIP

       1.9 FAKTURACE

       1.10 FAKTURACE UPOMÍNKY

       1.11 CMTS

       1.12 CMTS - ZJIŠŤOVÁNÍ MAC ADRESY

       1.13 CENTRALNÍ SKLAD

3.53-beta1 - 04.2.2011 ENGLISH

BUGS

   Fixed some bugs reported by users.

   When option "Report failures from Nagios" was enabled system did not automatic refresh of the configuration and waited for next refresh, so it caused that client was displayed on the map later (after next refresh of configuration).

   In Firewall settings "Settings / Syst. settings / Security" system now sets PING block for each IP address correctly. In the past system set only default rule.

   When the search filter for Routers was set (e.g. by locality, type, etc.) and after click on the "Test connection" button the system provided test connection for all router not only for selected by filter.

GENERAL

   Fulltext searching in the menu "Contacts" now search also through notes assigned to client.

   In the router settings item "Routed nets" there is new checkbox "DHCP option". It serves for special settings of DHCP server (e.g. option ip-forwarding on;'). WARNING: Incorrect value may caused malfunction of DHCP server! This setting is available only for DHCP on Linux server, not for Mikrotik type routers.

   In the menu "Statistics / WiFi list" there is the list of all transmitters saved in the system and each of them contains detailed information like Name of the router, GPS coordinates, router address, SSID, frequency, type of the router and also type of used WiFi card. All of these information can be exported to CSV file for additional using.

   In the menu "Users / Contacts" is option to print details to PDF. Now it is possible to choose if in the PDF will be displayed land phone number or mobile phone number. Settings is possible to change in the bookmark "Settings / Syst. settings / General" variable zakaznici_pdf_phone

   Now it is possible to fill phone number and send SMS ("Others / Free SMS") also to numbers which are not assigned to the client. History of sent SMS is available in the menu "Statistics / Logger / Sent SMS".

   In the menu "Routers / Router status / WiFi clients" there are displayed clients' names who have set MAC address at the service Internet. Newly there is also displayed the name of the router. Name of the router is found according Interface MAC address what is written in the menu "Routers" bookmark "Routed nets". The system also check the right format of IP addresses and nets.

   In the client card "Active services / Show deleted services" there is also displayed total number of removed services from client. Removed services is possible to display by clicking on this link and of course each removed service is possible to re-enable.

   Searching by fulltext also search through "Clients number" in the menu "Users / CATV".

MIKROTIK

   System automatically synchronize time at all routers Mikrotik regarding the time of the server. This option is possible disable in the menu "Settings / Syst. settings / Mikrotik" by setting up variable "mikrotik_time_syn" to value "0". It is recommended to leave this option enabled (disabled in the case when synchronization is via NTP), because it is difficult to find any information when the provider use Syslog and time on routers and server is different.

   System now store information about CPU temperature and Voltage on Mikrotik routers, but only some models provide these information (e.g. RB450G, RB1100). If router provide this information system displays icon in the router card. By clicking on it is possible to display detailed information in graphs. These information are also available in the menu "Routers / Router status" at the end of the table in new column. Some routers reports incorrect voltage value (e.g. RB411) and in this case graphs are logically incorrect as well.

SMS FROM USER INTERFACE

   From user interface is now possible to allow send SMS for end customers but only in the case when SMS gateway is connected in. To enable this function go to menu "Settings / Syst. settings / User interface" and set variable "sms_gateway" to the value "1". When the value is set client can see new menu item "Send SMS" after next login in to the user interface.

   Sent SMS is stored in the client card in the menu "History".

   Option to send SMS from user interface is possible disable for each client as standalone function in the client card "Information" checkbox "Disable SMS from UI".

SYSLOG

   Storing of logs from Mikrotik via Syslog has been re-enabled. Origin Syslog server was upgraded by new Syslog-ng what is stable even in the case of large amount of data send from routers.

   Records in the menu "Statistics / Syslog" is visible only for administrators with "Admin" permission.

   Closer information about settings is available in changelog version 3.51

EXCEED FUP - notification

   If the client has set FUP and gets over FUP limit it is possible to set option to send notification about it to the client and also to administrator, if it is necessary. This option is available to set in the menu "Settings / Syst. settings" variable "checklimit_mail_msg" where is the content of email what will be send to the client and also variable "checklimit_mail_subject" where is defined topic of the email.

   To enable / disable this option is possible to change by setting variable "checklimit_mail" to "0 or 1" value.

OBNOVA SYSTÉMU V PŘÍPADĚ HAVÁRIE

   Přidán script, který obnoví všechna data ze zálohy v případě havárie serveru ( například v případě poruchy HW, kdy je potřeba provést reinstalaci systému ).

   Pokud jsou k dispozici nepoškozené zálohy, tak je stačí nakopírovat do jakéhokoliv adresáře a spustit script "restore_system.pl". Tento script se dotáže na umístění zálohy a na data, která si přejete obnovit. Pokud je záloha chráněna heslem, tak se script dotáže na heslo, které je nutné pro správné dešifrování.

použití "ispadmin_recover [PATH] [MODE]"

[PATH] Path to the ISPadmin's backup directory. Absolute or relative path can be used.

[MODE] Determine what part of a backup will be recovered:

all     - recover all files important parts of the ISPamin (auto mode for db, etc_conf, data)

db       - recover the MySQL database by MySQL import (only ispadmin db)

db_bin   - recover the MySQL database by MySQL binary files (all db in mysql structure)

etc_conf - recover only config files in /etc (hostname, hosts, rc.local, httpd.conf)

etc_full - recover all config files in /etc

data     - recover main ISPadmin data (/data) and all online graphs (RRD files)

First argument is required or second one is optional.

If recover MODE is not given, full recover will be executed as default!

And finaly, a simple example of usage for full restore system:

ispadmin_recover /data/backup/2010_12_24__03_00 all

   Doporučujeme mít nastaveno zálohování nejen na lokální server, kde běží také ISPadmin, ale také na FTP server, kam se zálohy automaticky odešlou. Nastavení FTP záloh je možné v menu "Nastavení / Syst. Nastavení" klíč "backup_system_ftp*"

SLUŽBA VOIP

   Pokud má zákazník aktivní službu VOIP, tak je v kartě klienta při zobrazení této služby v menu "Aktivni služby" zobrazena celková cena, kterou zákazník provolal za aktuální měsíc.

   V přehledu služby VOIP jsou zobrazena všechna telefonní čísla, která jsou k této službě přiřazena. Toto zobrazení slouží ke zlepšení přehlednosti, protože nyní jsou zde zobrazeny všechna telefonní čísla a není nutné klikat na odkaz "Další IP telefonu".

FAKTURACE

   Pokud se provádí stahování plateb přes email, tak je nyní možné v nastavení emailového účtu ( Fakturace / Nastavení / Banka - Email ) nastavit u jednotlivých účtů také protokol ( IMAP, POP3, IMAP SSL, POP3 SSL ).

   V menu "Fakturace / Nastavení / Fakt. skupiny" je možnost nastavit levý a horní okraj pro razítko, které se zobrazuje na splátkovém kalendáři.

   V kartě klienta v záložce "Fakturace" je nové tlačítko "Přeplatky". Po kliknutí na toto tlačítko je zde kompletní historie přeplatků s informacemi o vzniku a informací, na kterou fakturu se přeplatek nebo jeho část započetla.

   V kartě klienta v zobrazení detailu faktury ( kliknutím na tlačítko detail u jednotlivé faktury ) je možné provést zápočet přeplatku. Nyní je možné při zápočtu přeplatku také nastavit i datum, ke kterému se tento zápočet uskutečnil.

   Pokud je nastavena Slovenská lokalizace, tak je možné v menu "Fakturace / Nastavení / Obecné" klíč "invoice_sk_slozenka" nastavit formát tisku údajů na složenky. Hodnota může být "0" ( Tisk na prázdnou složenku, kde nejsou předvyplněny žádne údaje ) a nebo hodnota "1" ( Tisk na složenku, kde je předtištěno jméno firmy a číslo účtu )

FAKTURACE UPOMÍNKY

   Pokud se posílá upomínka, tak je možné v nastavení automatického odeslání upomínek ( Fakturace / Nastavení / Upomínky ) nastavit i zaslání souhrné složenky.

   Nově se při nastavené SK lokalizaci zasílá souhrná složenka Slovenské pošty.

   Je-li nastaveno přeposílání kopie automaticky odeslaných upomínek na email ( Fakturace / Nastavení / Obecné položka reminder_mail_copy ), tak se do předmětu emailu přidá jméno zákazníka, kterému se upomínka odesílá ( aby bylo na první pohled jasné, komu byla upomínka odeslána ).

   V menu "Fakturace / Upomínky" je nová záložka "Historie", kde je zobrazen přehled, které upomínky byli automaticky odeslané. Je možné rozkliknout detail, kde se zobrazí podrobný "denní" přehled s klienty, kterým byla upomínka odeslána. U každého zákazníka je v tomto přehledu možné zobrazit i text emailové zprávy, která se klientovi odesílala.

   V menu "Fakturace / Upomínky / Historie" je možné z pop-up menu zobrazit automaticky odeslané upomínky podle data a nebo typu upomínky.

CMTS

   U uživatelů připojených přes CMTS je v kartě klienta v menu "Statistika Internetu" u detailu kabelového modemu zobrazen odkaz "online info" ( odkaz je umístěn vede IP adresy modemu vedle odkazu "restart modemu" ). Kliknutím na tento odkaz se v samostatném okně otevře stránka s podrobnými informacemi, které se stahují online z kabelového modemu přes SNMP. V horní části stránky je možnost změnit interval obnovení dat.

   Zrychleno zjišťování stavu online/offline u kabelových modemů.

CMTS - ZJIŠŤOVÁNÍ MAC ADRESY

   Dříve bylo nutné zadávat MAC adresu klienta při vytváření nebo editaci služby. Tato MAC adresa byla použita pro nastavení DHCP serveru, aby se klientovi

na koncový počítač přidělila správná IP adresa. Problém však nastával v případě, že při instalaci nebyla IP adresa známa a nebo v případě, že si klient vyměnil počítač a novou MAC adresu neznal nebo nebyl schopen zjistit.

   Nyní nově není nutné zadávat MAC adresu klienta, stačí zadat pouze IP adresu, která se má klientovi přidělit. Po nabootování modemu je MAC adresa koncového počítače automaticky zjištěna ( pokud je tento počítač k modemu připojen ) a je automaticky doplněna ke službě Internet zákazníka. Následně je provedena obnova konfigurace DHCP a klientovi je při dalším pokusu přidělena správná IP adresa. Tento postup je možné použít také v případě, že došlo ke změně MAC adresy u klienta. V tomto případě stačí MAC adresu klienta ve službě Internet vymazat ( pole nechat prázdné ) a MAC adresa je opět automaticky načtena z kabelového modemu. Automatické načtení MAC adresy proběhne do 10ti minut. V případě, že si přejete tuto operaci urychlit, tak je možné ve statistice Internetu v kartě klienta kliknout na odkaz "Online info". V tomto případě je MAC načtena okamžitě ( pokud je modem online a počítač je připojen k modemu )

   Informace o úspěšném načtení MAC adresy je zaznamenána v menu "Statisitky" v pop-up menu "Historie modemu".

CENTRALNÍ SKLAD

   Při přiřazování zboží můžete vyplnit poznámku. Tato poznámka se propisuje v historii pohybu zboží.

   V Centrálním skladu je nyní možnost řadit tabulku podle MAC a výrobního čísla.

   Nově přidána kontrola duplicity MAC adresy a Výrobního čísla. MAC adresa musí být vždy unikátní a výrobní číslo musí být unikátní v rámci Typu zboží. Zboží může být uloženo bez vyplněné MAC adresy i Výrobního čísla!

   Při přidávání zboží je v pravém horním rohu ikona pro zkopírování prvního řádku na ostatní řádky.

   Fulltext prohledává i číslo faktury a číslo dodacího listu.

   Přidáno stránkování pro centrální sklad. Počet řádků na stránce lze nastavit v Nastavení / Syst. nastavení / Centrální sklad klíč: central_store_paging

   Přednastavená doba záruky je 2 roky, můžete si ji změnit v Nastavení / Syst. nastavení / Centrální sklad klíč: central_store_warranty.

   Dodělána kompletní historie změn ve zboží, zobrazuje se v historii zboží.

   Nyní je možnost si v "Nastavení / Syst. nastavení / Centrální sklad" vypnout zobrazování některých sloupců v centrálním skladu

   Přidáno nové právo pro administrátory "Spravovat pouze své zboží". Při jeho aktivování bude technik vidět pouze zboží u něj, bude moci jej přiřadit komukoli, kromě zpět na sklad.

   Nově si můžete v číselníkách u Typu zboží přidat čárový kód. Poté, při přidávání zboží, když vyplníte čárový kód, systém automaticky doplní druh a typ z číselníku (dopracováno hlavně pro vkládání čárového kódu pomocí čtečky těchto kódů).

--- End ofChangelog_3.53-beta1"

3.53-beta2 - 25.3.2011 ENGLISH

BUGS

   Fixed bug in the menu "Users / Contact" when searching by fulltext was slow in the case when clients have a lot of notes (in the last version was added searching in notes function) and loading of CPU was 100%.

   For this moment is function searching in the notes disabled.

--- End ofChangelog_3.53-beta2"

Contents

   1 3.53-beta3 - 30.3.2011 ENGLISH

       1.1 MIKROTIK - VERSION 5.X SUPPORT

       1.2 MIKROTIK - BURST FOR UPLOAD

       1.3 DISPLAYING OF BETA VERSIONS

3.53-beta3 - 30.3.2011 ENGLISH

MIKROTIK - VERSION 5.X SUPPORT

   Added EXPERIMENTAL support of Mikrotik version 5.x. Regarding the released test version v.5 we cannot not guarantee 100% functionality.

MIKROTIK - BURST FOR UPLOAD

   Now it is possible to set BURST limit also for Upload. Parameters are the same as for Download. It can be defined in the menu "Settings / Tariffs".

DISPLAYING OF BETA VERSIONS

   When the new "Beta version" is released the system display this information and procedure how to install it after login in to the system. On the same page it is possible to select checkbox "Do not display beta versions" and after next login information about beta versions will not be displayed. This setting will not affect displaying of stable versions.

--- End ofChangelog_3.53-beta3"

3.53 5.4.2011 ENGLISH

STABLE VERSION

Stable version contains all changes and new functions reported in versions:

   3.53 beta1

   3.53 beta2

   3.53 beta3

--- End ofChangelog_3.53"

Contents

   1 3.52 - 04.2.2011(ENG)

       1.1 BUGS

       1.2 MIKROTIK

       1.3 SYSLOG

       1.4 BILLING

3.52 - 04.2.2011(ENG)

BUGS

   fixed bugs reported by users

MIKROTIK

   According to detected bugs in API communication on Mikrotik side the new version of the system ISPadmin was released.

   If the system detect a problem in communication which affects correct run of the system so in this case the communication with router is closed. Routers with closed communication and the API icon are tinged in red (the menu tab "Routers"). Detailed description is located in changelog version 3.51.

   After login into the system there is a page with list of the routers which have problems with communication. These routers probably must be restarted.

   In the menu tab "Routers" below filtering options there is a row with information like Total number of routers, online, offline, etc. Next to these icons there is a new item "API error". By clicking on this icon the complete list of routers with communication problem will be displayed.

Mikrotik technical support sent a note that this problem with API will be solved in final version 5.0. After login into the routers via API there is a record about unfinished connection at /usr active but this connection does not exist. Mikrotik tech. support knows about this bug in the version 4.x and it will be also solved in version 5.0. According to the statement of MK tech. support these records are not against correct run and do not affect any resources. Records can be deleted only by reboot of the router.

SYSLOG

   The SYSlog function has been temporary disable according to increasing cases with overloading of the server. Problem is located in version of log daemon which is a part of Debian. Probably there is a bug which causes this extreme overloading and it will be necessary to change mentioned daemon to another one.

BILLING

   Repaired displaying of pro-forma invoices. In the past there was a problem in user interface where the pro-forma invoices were not displayed properly.

--- End ofChangelog_3.52"

Contents

   1 3.51 - 31.1.2011(ENG)

       1.1 BUGS

       1.2 NOVINKY

       1.3 UBIQUITY

       1.4 MIKROTIK

       1.5 MIKROTIK problemy komunikace API

       1.6 SYSLOG

       1.7 FAKTURACE - OBECNE

       1.8 FAKTURACE - ZALOHOVE FAKTURY

       1.9 FAKTURACE - AUTOMATICKE PAROVANI PLATEB Z EMAILU

       1.10 CENTRALNI SKLAD

3.51 - 31.1.2011(ENG)

BUGS

   fixed bugs reported by users

   when the router is set as "inactive" the router is not displayed in the Nagios bookmark

   in the menu tab Billing the system does not create timetable for repayment for clients which have set "Do not invoice" at active service in client card.

NOVINKY

   pri odesilani emailu a obecnem pouziti HTML editoru pro vkladani textu, je mozne pouzit pro vlozeni textu zkratku CTRL+V

   v karte klienta pri odesilani SMS je moznost si nyni zvolit na jaky telefon je mozno zpravu odeslat. Na vyber jsou cisla klienta a cisla administratoru. Odeslana SMS klientovi se loguje v historii v karte klienta, odeslana SMS technikovi se loguje ve "Statistiky / Logger / Odeslane SMS technikum"

   v karte klienta je nyni mozne obnovit jiz odstranenou sluzbu Internet. V karte klienta v menu "Aktivni sluzby" je mozne zobrazit vsechny odstranene sluzby ( odkaz vlevo nahore ). U kazde odstranene sluzby je zobrazena ikona pro obnoveni sluzby. Kliknutim na tuto ikonu je mozne doplnit nebo

zmenit potrebne udaje a sluzbu obnovit

   pri odesilani faktury z karty klienta ( menu "Fakturace" ) je nyni mozne k odesilane fakture prilozit az 3 soubory, ktere se odeslou jako priloha k PDF fakture

   pri odesilani hromadneho emailu z menu "Ostatni / Hromadny mail" je mozne vyber klientu pro odeslani mailu specifikovat do pole "Typ platby (bankovni prevod, SIPO, hotove ... )

   v menu "Uzivatele / Kontakty" se pri pouziti fulltextu vyhledava i podle "SuperCash Number"

   v menu "Statistiky / Data" jsou na sestave prenesenych dat zobrazeny celkove soucty prenesenych dat na konci tabulky

   pokud je u sluzby Internet v karte klienta vyplnena polozka "Nazev sluzby", tak se tento nazev sluzby zobrazuje take ve "Statistice internetu". V pripade, ze ma klient vice sluzeb, tak to zjednodussi identifikaci sluzby o kterou se jedna

   pri pridavani nebo editovani planu je mozno pri vyberu technika zakliknout "Zaslat SMS". Technikovi se odesle SMS ve tvaru: "Typ ukolu", "Jmeno klienta(klientske cislo)", "Adresa", "Datum planu", "Text". Odeslani teto SMS je logovano ve "Statistiky / Logger / Historie odeslanych SMS technikum"

UBIQUITY

   nove pridana podpora verze 3.5.7, ktera pouziva odlisny komunikacni format nez verze 5.2.x a to melo za nasledek nadmerne vyuziti procesoru na serveru a tim zpomaleni celeho systemu a chybne zobrazeni grafu a informaci z techto jednotek

MIKROTIK

   pokud se vytvari binarni zalohy routeru Mikrotik a zaroven jsou zalohy sifrovane, tak je nyni v archivu ulozeno i jmeno souboru ve tvaru YYYY_MM_DD_jmeno_routeru.backup. Puvodne byl v archivu ulozen pouze hash, ktery nebyl pro praci optimalni. Take bylo odladeno a otestovano ukladani vyslednych zaloh v IE, kde nekdy nebylo mozne soubor ulozit

   Pokud je na routery aktivovane API, tak se z mikrotiku vycita hodnota "System / Identity". Tato hodnota se zobrazuje v hlavicce routeru za typem HW mikrotiku v zavorce. Napr. RB433AH ( GW_router). Take se tato informace zobrazuje v menu "Routery / Router status", pokud je nastaven "Rozsireny vypis", kde se zobrazi podrobne informace

   u kazdeho routeru se v zalozce "Routery" zobrazuje aktualni obsazeni disku na routeru. Obsazenost disku se zobrazuje graficky jako "progress bar", kde je zobrazeno obsazeni disku v %. Graficky se rozdeluje obsazeni disku 0-60% - zelene, 60-80% oranzove, 80-100% cervene. Najetim mysi na progress bar se zobrazi informace o celkove velikosti disku a o obsazenem mistu v MB.

   v zalozce "Routery / Router status / Routery " je novy sloupec "Vyuziti disku"

MIKROTIK problemy komunikace API

   v posledni dobe se na nekterych verzich mikrotiku zacaly objevovat problemy v komunikaci pres API. U Mikrotiku, ktere bezely napriklad nekolik tydnu

nebo mesicu dochazelo k odmitani komunikace pres API. Pri testu spojeni probehl test na SHH bez problemu. Heslo bylo zadano spravne, ale test API skoncil chybou "cannot log in". Jedina moznost jak obnovit komunikaci pres API bylo restartovani routeru. Tento problem nebyl tak kriticky, protoze mikrotik systemu vratil chybovy kod a tim script dale s routerem nekomunikoval. To se provilo napriklad tim, ze se prestaly kreslit grafy wifi klientu. Nektere routery se vsak dostali do "kritickeho" stavu a to tak, ze na pokus o komunikaci pres API neodpovedeli standardni chybovou hlaskou ale misto toho donekonecna vraceli odpoved, ktera mela delku 0 bajtu. S takovou alternativou knihovny dodavane mikrotikem se nepocitalo a script se timto zacyklil. To melo za nasledek extremni vyuziti CPU a tim zpomaleni systemu. Problem byl take v tom, ze bylo velice problematicke tyto "postizene" routery odhalit. Z diskuzi na internetu vyplynulo, ze se jedna o bug v API mikrotiku, ktery by mel byt udajne vyresen ve verzi 4.11 a vyssi. Na zaklade techto problemu je nyni v systemu zapracovano eliminovani podobnych ( prozatim odhalenych ) chyb a vcetne hlaseni systemu.

   u kazdeho routeru se jiz drive zobrazovala, v pripade pouziti komunikace pres API, "zelena ikona API". Pokud je komunikace realizovana pres SSH, je zde zobrazena oranzova ikona "SSH", aby bylo zrejme, ze komunikace pres API neni aktivni.

   Pokud je komunikace realizovana pres API a dojde k vyse popsanemu problemu, ikona se zobrazi cervene, aby bylo na prvni pohled viditelne, ze na tomto routeru se objevil problem a komunikace byla nucene prerusena.

   Na ikonu "API" u kazdeho routeru je mozne kliknout a zobrazit pripadne chyby, ktere se zde objevily. Pokud je identifikovana "fatalni" chyba nezbyva nez router restartovat. Tim se opet komunikace obnovi :-(

   v menu "Statistiky / Logger" je v popup menu nova polozka "Mikrotik errors", kde je mozne zobrazit vsechny zavazne chyby pri komunikaci s routery

SYSLOG

   zapracovan centralni sber dat ze syslogu z routeru Mikrotik

   v menu "Nastaveni / Syst. nastaveni" je mozne nastavit prislusnou "facility" ( skupinu hlasek z routeru ), ktera se bude monitorovat. V nastaveni je mozne take nastavit, jak dlouho se maji data na serveru uchovavat ( defaultne 14 dni ) a je zde take moznost aktivovat/deaktivovat syslog server. Po instalaci je funkce syslogu VYPNUTA a je nutne jej AKTIVOVAT

   pro spravnou funkci je nutne mit spravne nastavenou promennou "server_ip" v menu "Nastaveni / Syst. nastaveni / Obecne". Zde musi byt uvedena IP adresa serveru, protoze na tuto IP adresu budou vsechny routery Mikrotik zasilat data pres syslog.

   IP adresa a port pro syslog musi byt pro vsechny routery dostupny. Je nutne povolit port pro syslog ( 514 UDP ) v nastaveni firewallu v menu "Nastaveni / Syst. nastaveni / Zabezpeceni"

   v nastaveni kazdeho routeru je k dispozici novy checkbox "Syslog monitor", kde je mozne explicitne vypnout zasilani dat pres syslog do systemu. Defaultne je nastaveno monitorovani pres syslog na vsech routerech. Pro aktivovani teto funkce je nutne pouzivat komunikaci pres API. Pokud router nekomunikuje pres API, tak neni mozne syslog vyuzit.

   V menu "Statistiky / Syslog" je mozne zobrazit veskere udalosti pro vsechny routery. Vsechny tyto informace je mozne prehledne tridit podle routeru, typu udalosti a nebo fulltextem.

   pokud je monitorovani pres syslog aktivni u konkretniho routeru, tak se v hlavicce routeru zobrazi ikona "SYSLOG". Tato ikona je zobrazena pod IP adresou routeru. Na tuto ikonu je mozne kliknout a tim se zobrazi vsechny udalosti na tomto routeru. Na teto strance je mozne hlasky tridit podle typu udalosti, podle routeru atd.... Pokud neni syslog pro tento router aktivni ( neni v nastaveni routeru aktivni "Syslog monitor" ) nebo je syslog globalne vypnut, tak se tato ikona zobrazi "sedou" barvou a neni na ni mozne kliknout

   stara data jsou automaticky z databaze odstraneny po prekroceni hodnoty "syslog_store_days"

FAKTURACE - OBECNE

   Vystavene faktury je mozne exportovat do ucetniho systemu CYBERSOFT i6

   pokud je automaticky sparovana platba uskutecnena Slovenskou postou pres elektronicky XML vypis, tak je mozne tuto sparovanou platbu "odparovat" a zpracovat platbu rucne

FAKTURACE - ZALOHOVE FAKTURY

   u zalohovych faktur se zobrazuje scoring ( pocet dni zaplacenych pred splatnosti nebo po splatnosti ) podobne jako u standardnich faktur

   v menu "Uzivatele / Kontakty" je mozne v menu "Podrobnosti" zobrazit klienty, kteri se fakturuji zalohovymi fakturami

FAKTURACE - AUTOMATICKE PAROVANI PLATEB Z EMAILU

   uvolnena nova funkce, ktera umoznuje automaticke parovani uhrad pres avizo, ktere zasila banka emailem pri kazde dosle platbe. Podminkou spravneho fungovani je moznost mit v bankovnictvi nastaveno automaticke zasilani kreditniho aviza pri dosle platbe. Pokud toto banka umoznuje, tak system kazdych 5 minut kontroluje nove prichozi zpravy a pokud souhlasi vsechny atributy emailu, tak provede automaticke sparovani uhrady s fakturou. V pripade, ze se jedna o zalohovou fakturu, tak automaticky vystavi danovy doklad a odesle jej klientovi ( pokud je takto system nastaven ). Tento system poskytuje velice rychla parovani plateb a temer online zpracovani. Z praxe je mozne uvest, ze pri hotovostnim vkladu na pobocce CSOB je informacni avizo zaslano za 10-15 minut.

1. Nastaveni emailu

   prozatim je automaticke parovani mozne nastavit pouze pro banku CSOB a.s. Ceska Republika a CSOB a.s. Slovenska Republika. Ostatni banky prozatim podporovany nejsou. Pokud pouzivate banku CSOB, tak je mozne pres internetove bankovnictvi nastavit zasilani aviz na urcenou emailovou schranku. Nastaveni je nasledujici: Po prihlaseni kliknete na menu "Informace o uctech / pohyby". V pravem hornim rohu na zobrazene strance je zobrazen odkaz "zasilani informaci na SMS a email". Po kliknuti na tento odkaz je mozne nastavit emailovou adresu, kam se bude avizo o zauctovane platbe posilat a take checkbox "avizo o zauctovani platby". Je potreba zde oznacit checkbox email a v nabizene moznosti "detail" aktivovat checkbox "pripsani castky". Po ulozeni nastaveni se bude avizo zasilat na zadany email. Doporucuje vytvorit specialni email pouze pro zasilani informaci z banky, ktery se nebude pouzivat pro zadnou jinou komunikaci a nebude se "stahovat" na zadnem pocitaci ( potom by v systemu platby schazely ).

   v pripade CSOB je podporovan Cesky a Slovensky jazyk. Ostatni banky prozatim podporovany nejsou.

   v pripade CSOB banky jsou podporovany veskere transakce ( prevody uctu v ramci statu, zahranicni prevody a hotovostni platby )

   v menu "Fakturace / Nastaveni / Banka - email" je mozne pridat postovni ucet, ze ktereho se budou zpracovavat informacni emaily o prichozich platbach. Je nutne vyplnit emailovou adresu, IMAP server a heslo. Emailove zpravy se stahuji protokolem IMAP, takze musi byt na cilovem serveru aktivni. V pripade, ze pouzivate napriklad vice bankovnich uctu a zasilate aviza na vice emailovych adres, je mozne zde pridat vice emailovych adres ze kterych se budou platby zpracovavat

   v seznamu emailovych uctu ( "Fakturace / Nastaveni / Banka - email" ) ze provadi "online" test, zda komunikace pres IMAP probehla na vsechny ucty spravne. Pokud jsou napriklad chybne nastaveny pristupove udaje, tak muze z duvodu testu zobrazeni stranky chvili trvat

2. Automaticke stahovani emailu

   system kazdych 5 minut kontroluje nove prichozi zpravy na vsech emailovych uctech

   pokud prijde novy email, tak je automaticky spracovan a v pripade, ze se jedna o spravny format emailu, tak je provedeno sparovani

   jeden email muze obsahovat vice plateb.

   vsechny stazene emaily je mozne zobrazit v menu "Statistiky / Logger" popup menu "Emaily z banky". Zde jsou zobrazeny veskere prijate emaily a je zde zobrazena textova cast emailu.

   vsechny prijate emaily je mozne zobrazit take v menu "Fakturace / Banka / Email". Zde jsou zobrazeny veskere prijate emaily a je zde take zobrazeno zda probehlo automaticke sparovani s fakturou ci nikoli.

   vzdy je zde zobrazen datum prijeti emailu, odesilatel, predmet emailu, banka ( napr. CSOB CZ, CSOB SK ). V pripade, ze jedna o platny email kreditniho aviza, tak je zde zobrazen pocet zaznamu, coz je pocet uhrad, ktere se nachazi v tomto emailu a take pripadne pocet sparovanych a nesparovanych plateb. Na "cislovku" celkovy pocet, pocet sparovanych a pocet nesparovanych plateb je mozne kliknout a tim se zobrazi podrobnosti o platbach.

   v pripade, ze se jedna o sparovanou platbu, tak se zobrazi jmeno klienta ke kteremu se platba sparovala. Na jmeno klienta je mozne kliknout a otevre se karta prislusneho klienta

   v pripade, ze se jedna o platbu, ktera se nesparovala automaticky ( napriklad z duvodu chybne castky, chybneho VS .. ), tak je mozne platbu sparovat manualne, a to kliknutim na odkaz "sparovat rucne". V tomto pripade je mozne zadat VS, SS nebo jmeno klienta ke kteremu se ma platba priradit

   v praxi se muze stat, ze na email je dorucen jiny email nez avizo o platbe ( napriklad spam, mesicni vypis ve formatu PDF ... ). Tato platba je potom oznacena jako nezpracovana, protoze system identifikoval, ze se nejedna o vypis realizovane uhrady. Takovyto email je mozne presunout do tzv. "Nezpracovanych emailu" kliknutim na podledni ikonu ( sipky ) uplne na konci radku vypisu.

   Tyto nezpracovane platby je mozne zobrazit v menu "Fakturace / Nastaveni / Banka - email", kde je vlevo nahore umisten odkaz "Nezpracovane emaily". Kliknutim na tento odkaz je mozne zobrazit nezpracovane emaily a pripadne je obnovit

   v seznamu prijatych emailu je u kazdeho emailu "zelena ikona". Najetim mysi na tuto ikonu je zobrazen obsah emailu, takze je mozne overit zda system identifikoval spravne vsechny obsazene platby

   pokud dojde k jakekoli chybe pri zpracovani emailu ( chybne heslo do emailove schranky, neplatny vypis, apod. ), tak je tato chyba zaslana na email, ktery je uveden v nastaveni fakturace v menu "Fakturace / Nastaveni / Obecne" polozka "billing_mail"

3. Automaticke odeslani faktur na email

   pokud je zalohova faktura uhrazena, tak se automaticky vytvori danovy doklad. Tuto fakturu je mozne zaslat automaticky klientovi. V menu "Fakturace / Nastaveni / Obecne" je klic "proforma_automatic_send", kde je mozne zasilat fakturu pouze zakaznikovi ( hodnota 1 ), zasilat fakturu pouze na kopii mailu, ktera je uvedena v promenne "proforma_mail_copy" ( hodnota 2 ) a nebo ji zaslat klientovi a take na kopii mailu ( hodnota 3 )

   v pripade, ze klient nema uvedenou emailovou adresu a nebo nema nastaveno odesilani faktur emailem ( v karte klienta ), tak se po vystaveni danoveho dokladu ( pokud je nastaveno automaticke odesilani ) odesle tento doklad ( faktura ) na email uvedeny v "proforma_mail_copy" s predmetem "VYTISKNOUT A ZASLAT KLIENTOVI". Tato funkce je zde z duvodu, aby fakturant vedel, ze klient mema nastaveno odebirani faktur emailem a je nutne fakturu vytisknout a zaslat pozemni postou

CENTRALNI SKLAD

   v rozbalovacich menu se zaznamy nyni radi abecedne

   pridana nova polozka "Carovy kod"

   v menu "Nastaveni / Ciselniky / Centralni sklad" je nyni mozne pro kazdy "Typ zbozi" vybrat i jemu nadrazenou skupinu "Druh zbozi", do ktere spada. V hlavnim menu "Centr. sklad / sklad" je tedy mozne filtrovat seznam jednotlivych "Typu zbozi" vyberem skupiny "Druhu zbozi" z popup menu

   v centralnim skladu "Centr. sklad / Sklad" jsou checkboxy pro prirazovani zbozi a nyni jsou doplneny o sipky, kterymi je mozne oznacit (nebo zrusit oznaceni) pro vsechny radky najednou

   pri prirazovani zbozi a pridavani noveho zbozi je nove moznost nastaveni vlastniho datumu tohoto kroku

   pri pridavani zbozi je na konci kazdeho radku odkaz na duplikaci / kopirovani tohoto radku na dalsi radek. Nyni se timto kopiruje i datum "Zaruka do"

   v menu "Nastaveni / Administratori" je mozne nstavit opravneni pro centralni sklad ( Sekce Centralni sklad )

   Administrator s opravneni "Master admin" muze ve skladu delat vse, u ostatnich administratoru je moznost si nastavit prava na cteni, zapis, prirazovani zbozi a viditelnost prodejni a nakupni ceny

--- End ofChangelog_3.51"

3.50 - 3.1.2011 (EN)

BUGS

   Fixed bugs reported by users

BILLING

   Fixed bug in billing module where, in some cases, the system did not create invoices for January 2011 properly. Some of the first generated invoices had the same variable symbol.

--- End ofChangelog_3.50"

Contents

   1 3.49 - 20.12.2010 [EN]

       1.1 BUGS

       1.2 SUPPORT OF UBIQUITY DEVICES

       1.3 NEWS

       1.4 SCHEDULING

       1.5 FAKTURACE

       1.6 FAKTURACE VRACENI PREPLATKU

       1.7 ZABEZPECENI FIREWALL

       1.8 CENTRALNI SKLAD

       1.9 PL LOCALIZATION

3.49 - 20.12.2010 [EN]

BUGS

   fixed bugs reported by users

   fixed bug in the menu "Billing / Settings" item "vernostni_sleva". When this value was changed the system displayed still original text.

   fixed bug, in the menu "Others / Mass document / Generate" there was "User type" set to "Cable user" as default. Now the default value is set to "All users".

SUPPORT OF UBIQUITY DEVICES

   provided support of all available units including NanoStation2

   provided support of FW 5.2.5 and the newest, where is the different communication between units

   while adding or editing of UBNT device there is possible to add SSH port (default value is 22)

NEWS

   in the menu tab "Others / Backups / Routers" there is possible to sort the router list by columns (clicking on the name of column), also there are some new informations like Router ID, Software version of the Mikrotik or UBNT router.

   Export file (with clients) in the menu tab "Others / Export" contains new item, client's mobile phone number.

   The system now saves all preferences ("Routers / Router Status") and after next login into the system there is no longer necessary to set up all preferences again.

   The menu tab "Routers / Router Status / WiFi clients" contains new checkbox "Online / Offline clients" to display detailed information about connected clients.

   In the menu tab "Settings / Syst. settings / General" there is possible to set up type of displayed and used routers. When the type is set to value "1" in this case the system can works with Mikrotik and UBNT devices now (there was only Mikrotik in the past).

   In the menu tab "Routers" there is possible display graphs of all routers (icon next to the test connection) which now contains another graph of CPU and PING statistic. Now there is a complete list of all CPU graphs, PING and transfers on each interface. By clicking on each graph is is possible to display detailed graphs (daily, weekly, monthly, yearly).

   Contracts now contains variables for DVBC service e.g.: like the service Internet has. The complete list with system variables can be displayed in the menu tab "Settings / Contracts".

SCHEDULING

   pokud se rozesila email technikum, tak se nyni do tela mailu prida informace o pripadnych "castecnych" resenich tohoto ukolu, aby technik mel prehled v jakem stavu se reseni ukolu nachazi

   v menu "Planovani / denni" je mozne zobrazit denni plan technika v PDF ( treti ikona u technika ). Nyni se nove zobrazi v pdf dokumentu take pripadne reseni ukolu. Kazdy ukol je na jedne strance ( servisni list ) a na dalsi strance je zobrazen postup reseni tohoto ukolu

   v menu "Planovani / Volne" je v prehledu u techto volnych ukolu zobrazen datum, kdy byl ukol do systemu zadan.

   pokud je ukol jiz uzavren, tak uzivatel s opravnenim "MasterAdmin" muze zmenit cenu za vykon tohoto ukolu

   pokud je vytvoren ukol jako "servisni zasah na routeru" a je vybran router, tak v "Planovani / Prehledy" se tento nazev routeru vyhledava ve fulltextovem vyhledavani.

   pokud je vytvoren plan a je mu prirazena konkretni sluzba, tak se v servisnim listu ( prostredni ikona v dennim planu technika ) zobrazi take adresa instalace teto sluzby

   je mozne zmenit nadpis servisniho listu v menu "Nastaveni / Syst. nastaveni / Planovani" polozka "planning_service_message_title". Tento nazev bude uveden jako nadpis servisniho listu

   do servisniho listu je pridana polozka "pocet ujetych kilometru", ktery je nyni mozne do servisniho listu zaznamenat

   pokud je ukol vyresen, tak je mozne jej pri uzavirani take vyfakturovat. Pokud je v zadani ukolu uvedena pri vytvareni "cena vykonu", tak se tato cena zobrazi v prvnim radku pro vyfakturovani ukolu a neni tedy nutne tento udaj opisovat rucne

FAKTURACE

   pokud je v karte klienta nastaveno, ze se fakturuje zalohovymi fakturami, tak pri rucnim vystaveni faktury se automaticky oznaci checkbox "Zalohova faktura" a faktura se vystavi jako zalohova

   v menu "Fakturace" jsou vsechny prehledy rozdelene podle typu faktur. Je mozne vybrat zobrazeni pro "Zalohove faktury", "Klasicke faktury" a nebo pro "Vsechny faktury". Ttto rozdeleni je potreba pro zobrazeni vsech prehledu oddelenych na zalohove a standardni faktury.

   pri exportu faktur do ucetnich systemu se neexportuji zalohove faktury ( protoze se nejedna o danove doklady ), ale pouze standardni faktury. ( po uhrade se ze zalohove faktury stane standardni faktura )

   v menu "Fakturace / Preplatky" jsou zobrazeny vsechny preplatky a pripadne zapocty klientu

   zmenseno radkovani pri zobrazeni dodatku na fakture. Tim je mozne do dodatku faktury zobrazit vice informaci. Moznost nastaveni dodatku, ktery se zobrazuje na fakturach je v menu "Fakturace / Nastaveni / Fakturacni skupiny"

   v pripade, ze se delaji uhrady rucne pres menu "Fakturace / Uhrady" a nikoli elektronicky je mozne u kazde uhrady klienta zmenit stav uzivatele z popup menu. Tento stav uzivatele se zmeni v take v karte klienta

   v menu "Fakturace upominky" je nove, u rucne vygenerovanych upominek, v prehledu novy sloupec "Detail" ( ikona lupy ). Kliknutim na tento detail se zobrazi podrobnosti o odeslanych upominkach. Jsou zde zobrazeni klienti, castky a je mozne zobrazit take upominku, ktera byla odeslana klientovi.

   pokud klient zaplati drive, nez je vystavena a odeslana tomuto klientovi faktura, tak nebylo mozne platbu ke klientovi sparovat a priradit. Nyni je v tomto pripade nabidnouto prirazeni teto platby ke klientovi jako preplatek. Pokud je nasledne vystavena faktura, tak se automaticky z tohoto preplatku uhradi. Funkce zarazeni nesparovane platby do preplatku klienta je prozatim umoznena pouze v pripade parovani plateb pres importovany elektronicky vypis v menu "Fakturace / Banka"

   v karte klienta v menu "Fakturace" je mozne zobrazit detail kazde faktury. Nyni se v tomto detailu zobrazuje z jakeho bankovniho vypisu byla faktura uhrazena. Kliknutim na nazev tohoto bankovniho vypisu se zobrazi detailni rozpis vsech plateb, ktere byly importovany. Toto plati v pripade, ze je importovan elektronicky bankovni vypis v menu "Fakturace / Banka"

FAKTURACE VRACENI PREPLATKU

   v pripade, ze kpient na napriklad na konci roku preplatek a neprejete si provadet zapocet preplatku na dalsi fakturu, tak je mozne preplatek klientovi vratit ( odeslat na klientuv ucet ). V karte klienta v menu "Fakturace" je mozne klinout na odkaz "Vratit preplatek". Zde se automaticky predvyplni castka ( preplatek zakaznika ) a cislo uctu, pokud jej ma klient uveden v karte klienta. Je take mozne doplnit poznamku s podrobnym popisem platby. Na teto strance je take zobrazena kompletni historie vsech vracenych preplatku

ZABEZPECENI FIREWALL

   nyni je mozne v menu "Nastaveni / Syst. nastaveni / Zabezpeceni" povolit nebo zakazat odpoved na PING

CENTRALNI SKLAD

   spusten "centralni sklad", ktery umozni evidenci zarizeni a zbozi, ktere je expedovano klientum. Zalozka "Centralni sklad" je umistena v hlavnim menu

   poud si neprejete centralni sklad pouzivat, tak je mozne zobrazeni tohoto menu vypnout v "Nastaveni / Syst. nastaveni" nastavenim hodnoty "central_store" na 0

   pro spravne pouziti centralniho skladu je nejdrive nutne vyplnit prislusne ciselniky v menu "Nastaveni / Ciselniky / ", "Nastaveni / Ciselniky / Centralni sklad / Dodavatele" - zde je mozne vyplnit jednotlive dodavatele od kterych je zbozi nakupovano "Nastaveni / Ciselniky / Centralni sklad / Sklad. mat."

   zde je mozne vyplnit jednotlive Skupiny zbozi ( napr. Switche, Routery, anteny ... ), ktery bude expedovano k zakaznikum "Nastaveni / Ciselniky / Centralni sklad / Typy materialu" - nastaveni konkterniho typu zbozi ( napr. Nanostation M5, RB433 ... ) "Nastaveni / Ciselniky / Centralni sklad / Typ skladu" - jednotlive "Sklady" na ktere je mozne prevadet zbozi. Tento ciselnik obsahuje systemove polozky (sklad, technik, klient, lokalita a prodej mimo klienty). Systemove polozky nelze menit a mazat.

   prehled zbozi podle roku a mesicu: najdete v zalozce "Centralni sklad / Prehled"

   statistika zbozi: najdete v zalozce "Centralni sklad / Statistika"

   zbozi u klienta: zbozi prirazene klientovi najdete je zobrazeni v karte klienta v levem menu "Zbozi ze skladu"

Pridavani zbozi do centralniho skladu

   v menu "Centralni sklad / Sklad" je moznost pridavat zbozi presne tak, jak jej nakupujete. Mate fakturu nebo dodaci list za nakup zbozi, vyplnite udaje z faktury (cislo faktury, dodaciho listu, dodavatel) a pocet polozek na fakture.

   pri pridavani je mozne u Druhu, Typu a Dodavatele moznost primo zde doplnit rozbalovaci seznam kliknutim na tlacitko "+" vedle daneho policka

   pri pridavani je na konci kazdeho radku tlacitko Kopirovat, tim zkopirujete radek na dalsi

   zmenite-li MJ z ks na metry, mate moznost zadat pocet metru

   smazanim zbozi ze skladu dojde ke stornovani zbozi, tohle zbozi je mozne dohledat v menu "Centralni sklad / Sklad" oznacenim chekboxu "Stornovane"

Prirazovani zbozi

   pridane zbozi v centralnim skladu muzete ruzne rozdelovat mezi kliety, techniky, lokality a take na mista ktere si nadefinujete (ciselnik Typy skladu), dale take mimo klienty firmy a take zpet na sklad

   v Centralnim skladu je mozne pomoci ruznych filtru zobrazit zaznamy, ktere potrebujete. Na kazdem radku je checkbox, ktery oznaci zbozi. Oznacene zbozi muzete priradit klientum atd.

   priradit zbozi muzete take z karty klienta v menu "Zbozi ze skladu"

   v karte klienta je take moznost zbozi vratit na sklad

   jestlize zbozi prodavate, mate moznost jej priradit tzv. Mimo klienty firmy. To znamena, ze se oznaci jako prodane mimo klienty s vami zadanou poznamkou a cenou. Tato volba sloupzi pro pripad, ze je zbozi prodano klientovi, ktery nema zadnou kartu klienta ( neni pripojen na internet nebo neodezira zadnou sluzbu ) Takove zbozi je mozne dohledat pod filtrem Stav->Prodane mimo klienty

Historie skladu

   kazde zbozi, ktere naskladnite, ma svou historii pohybu. Histori je mozne zobrazit v Centralnim skladu, ikonka Historie a take v detailu zbozi. Detail zbozi je dostupny i z karty klienta

Fakturace zbozi

   v karte klienta je moznost klientovi zbozi vyfakturovat. Oznacite checkboxy, ktere zbozi si prejete vyfakturovat a pri potvrzeni se klientovi vytvori

prubezne polozky ktere se pozdeji pri pravidelne fakturaci vyfakturuji. Zbozi se oznaci jako vyfakturovane a neni mozne je znovu vyfakturovat.

Smazanim

   prubezne polozky se smaze zaznam o vyfakturovani a moznost vyfakturovat zbozi se opet povoli

Tisk do PDF

   v Centralnim skladu je moznost aktualni sestavu vytisknout v PDF. V dokumentu se zobrazi i jmeno technika, ktery je prihlasen a presny datum vytisknuti.

   take se zde zobrazuje aktualne nastaveny Filtr, aby bylo jasne, jaka sestava byla tisknuta

Prehled skladu a statistika

   zde je moznost vybrat Typ prehledu (napr.: Naskladnene zbozi), mesic a rok a zobrazi se zbozi, ktere bylo v tomto obdobi naskladneno a jaka byla nakupni cena. Ve statistice jsou podobna data, ale serazena do prehlednejsi tabulky s nakupni a prodejni cenou.

PL LOCALIZATION

   in Polish localization an invoice contains information about Flat number

--- End ofChangelog_3.49"

Contents

   1 3.48 - 02.11.2010 EN

       1.1 BUGS

       1.2 NEWS

       1.3 Support of Ubiquity units

       1.4 MIKROTIK

       1.5 Security - FIREWALL

       1.6 SCHEDULING

       1.7 INVOICING

       1.8 INVOICING Pro-forma invoices

       1.9 NETFLOW

       1.10 CMTS

3.48 - 02.11.2010 EN

BUGS

   fixed minor bugs reported by users

   in the case when import from Post contains more companies the system will import all data correctly. In the past there was a bug which caused that only first company in the list was imported

   it is no longer possible to left empty field of client's name in the client card while adding a new client into the system( In the past it was possible to save without name but not to edit )

   fixed bug in billing module. In last version it was possible to set up date "Invoice from" without second part "Invoice to" and system created an invoice for whole month.

NEWS

   when the WiFi client is non-active longer than 30 days and monitoring of WiFi signal is enabled so in the case old graphs are deleted to save free space on HDD

   it is possible to set periodic restart for the Router (Mikrotik, UBNT) by selecting the checkbox "Restart of the router" and choosing period (Daily, weekly, monthly). When daily period is enabled it is possible to set specific time for restart. When weekly period is enabled it is possible to set specific day (Monday - Sunday) for restart. When monthly period is enabled it is possible to set specific day (1 - 31) for restart.

   in the menu tab "Routers" there it is possible to check connection to the router to see type of the router, SW version, CPU, etc.

   for each router (menu "Routers") there is displayed version of HW (e.g.: RB411, RB433AH, etc.), HW version information lies below name of the router.

   the menu tab "Routers / Mikrotik status" renamed as "Routers / Router Status"

   the menu tab "Other / Maps" is now available for all administrators. In the past this function was visible only for "main admin" or "master admin".

   printing the settings (in "client card / Information / Print settings") always contains name of router what the client is connected on.

   each photography in client card is resized to fit the screen. larger view is available by clicking on the photo.

Support of Ubiquity units

   in the menu Tab "Routers" there is possible to add a new type of router "Ubiquity". If it is chosen there is option to set SSH username and password. Communication within is provided only through SSH so it must be enabled on Firewall.

   When a Ubiquity device is added to the system so in the case there is possible to "check connection" by clicking on icon. It is the same as check connection on Mikrotik devices.

   if communication through SSH is sucessful the system starts to read interfaces (ath0, eth0) automatically and also starts to draw graphs of transmition on individual interfaces. By clicking on the graph icon there is possible to display detailed information about data transmission. The system also draws CPU loading, Ping, current uptime from hte last reboot of the system.

   below the Ping graph icon there is an information about Ubiquity unit SW version

   when the mouse cursor rollover name of ath0 interface the system displays detailed information about WiFi interface (like SSID, frequency, distance, etc.).

   next the name of the interface is an information about number of clients and SNR reported by unit. Next these informations is an icon to display detailed graph. The graph contains informations like Signal, Noise, CCQ, etc. If an unit has enabled "Airmax" mode so in the case system can display "Airmax quality" and "Airmax capacity" reported by unit in percentage.

   in the menu tab "Routers / Router status" there is a popup menu to choose type of the router (Mikrotik / Ubiquity).

   in the menu tab "Routers / Router status" each router has icon (Mikrotik / Ubiquity) for simpler identification.

   if the communication with Ubiquity unit is successful in the case the SSH icon is green, in opposite the icon has red color and the system displays an error message in "HW version" column.

   the system displays current verion of firmware, CPU type, unit type (e.g.: Rocket M5, NanoBridge M5, etc.) for each UBNT unit.

   in the menu tab "Routers / Router status" there is displayed current number of online WiFi clients. By clicking on this number it is possible to display detailed information about clients including Signal graphs of each client.

   for present the system supports only passive mode (monitoring of UBNT units). Full management of Ubiquity units will be released in next version (3.49).

   Implementation of Ubiquity devices is in the experimental phase so small bugs may occurs.

MIKROTIK

   settings of tariff (menu "Settings / Tariff") contains an option to set not only FUP limitation for decreasing connection speed but in this version it is also option to set limitation at Burst (download, upload, priority).

Security - FIREWALL

   from version 3.47 is possible to set firewall parameters to restrict access for individual services in the system (menu "Settings / Sys. settings / Security".

   from version 3.48 the active firewall is requested and after each login the system makes a control. If firewall is inactive so the system displays information page with description how it is possible to set it up.

   if provider doesn't care of mentioned security reasons or doesn't want to use integrated firewall (e.g. Firewall is provided as central or by own scripts), so in this case it is possible to disable infopage after login-in to the system. Go to menu tab "Settings / Sys. settings / Security" and add a new rule:

IP address = "127.0.0.1"

Rule description = "Disabled"

   when the firewall is deactivated the system delete all firewall rules on the server and in the case of using own firewall it is neccessary to set it up again.

   detailed information about firewall settings are available in changelog v. 3.47.

SCHEDULING

   in the menu tab "Scheduling / Daily" there is information about total number of pending tasks.

   when adding a task there is an option to check Client number. For simpler searching there is possible to type name of the client and system will display possible results automatically. Search option works even if you type name withou diacritical marks.

 in the tab "Scheduling / Free" there is a checkbox "Show this page after login" to see pending tasks after logining-in to the system.

   in the menu tab "Settings / Code lists / Plan type" there is possible to define code-book for tasks in Scheduling. There is also possible to define different colors for each groups of tasks and defined color will be highlighted in the plan.

INVOICING

   now it is possible to set VAT / TAX rate with two decimal points (e.g.: 13,50) in the menu tab "Billing / Settings" vatiable "dph". (Ireland localization)

   now it is possible to invoice VoIP data once for 2 months period back. It is possible to set in the menu tab "Settings / Sys. settings" variable voip_offset" and set value to "2".

   for faster work with cash payments the system offers print and display options of TAX document when receive cash payment.

   in client card in the Bookmark "Invoicing" there is an information, next to invoices, about payment method (bank transfer, cash, PayPal, etc.)

   system now doesn't recognize between private or legal person and display Company ID and VAT ID on each invoice.

INVOICING Pro-forma invoices

   each Invoice group has an option to create pro-forma invoices. In the menu tab "Billing / Settings / Invoice groups" there is the checkbox to active this funcitons for each group.

   below the checkbox it's possible to set "Name of pro-forma invoice". This text will be displayed on invoice as watermark. Default value is "Vyzva k platbe" (in Czech) and it means "Call for payment".

   in detail of each invoice group "Billing / Settings / Invoice groups" there is possible to send note which will be displayed only on pro-forma invoice. When the pro-forma invoice is paid so on the normal Invoice this note is not displayed. In this text it is possible to use system variables (e.g.: $EMAIL$ - will be displayed as real client's email address from client card).

 there is no due date on pro-forma invoice (cause it isn't a TAX document), number of invoice and specific symbol

   When the pro-forma invoice is paid so in the case system creates standard invoice atuomatically (TAX document), with all requirements. At bottom of the invoice there is information about price which will be paid by pro-forma invoice and also number of pro-forma invoice to check. In the most case the price result on invoice is 0. In the case when client pay less money than needed so the invoice is still marked as outstanding.

   when the payment is succesfull the system creates an invoice in 5 minutes and send it to client's email, but only in case when it is filled in client card and client has enabled "Sending invoices by email".

   in the menu tab "Billing / Settings / General" there is possible to set variable "proforma_mail_copy". If there is filled an email address so in the case the system sends all created invoices as email copy to this email.

   in the menu tab "Settings / Other / Email templates" there is possible to set one template as default. This default template will be used when the system creates invoices (based on paid pro-forma invoice) and send to the email address as copy.

   in the menu tab "Billing / Settings / General" there is a variable "proforma_prefix" used as variable symbol for pro-forma payments. Variable symbol is random 10 points number which start with defined prefix.

NETFLOW

   in the menu tab "Settings / Sys. settings / General" there is a variable "netflow_datastore_days", what defines how long does the system keep data from NETflow on HDD. Default value is 365 days.

CMTS

   full integration of headend ARRIS C4

   system now reads all informations about upstream and downstream installed on headend. For each downstream are displayed detailed information about logical channel, modulation, frequency, bandwidth, power of transmission and SNR.

   for each downstream system displays number of online clients and un-registered users on headend. Rollover this number by mouse will display detailed information about number of connected users.

   for each downstream the system draws SNR graph.

   in the menu tab "Routers" there is well-arranged displaying "SNR of all headends".

--- End ofChangelog_3.48"

Contents

   1 3.47 - 13.09.2010 EN

       1.1 BUGS

       1.2 NEWS

       1.3 ZABEZPECNI OBECNE

       1.4 ZABEZPECENI - nastaveni firewallu

       1.5 ZABEZPECNI - omezeni prihlaseni administratoru z urcitych IP adres

       1.6 ZABEZPECNI - sifrovani souboru

       1.7 PING NA ZARIZENI a KLIENTY

       1.8 FAKTURACE

       1.9 FAKTURACE - ZALOHOVE FAKTURY ( vyzva k platbe )

       1.10 ZPRACOVANI SLOZENEK SLOVENSKE POSTY

       1.11 PLANOVANI

       1.12 CMTS

       1.13 Mezinarodni lokalizace

3.47 - 13.09.2010 EN

BUGS

   fixed some minor bugs reported by users

   fixed bug in the menu tab "Routers / Mikrotik status / WIFI clients", there was problem with displaying graphs of wifi signals for all users

NEWS

   before sending email or SMS ("client card / Information") you can choose from pop-up menu the type of active service and the system will apply system variables according to selected service.

   optimalization of the invoice size in PDF (60% off).

   added the new system variable $ASSIGN_VS_1$ which define the first free variable symbol.

   v zalozce routery je mozne primo zobrazit aktualni zalohy routeru mikrotik ( pokud jsou vytvoreny ). Zalohy se zobrazi kliknutim na ikonu "diskety", ktera je umistena v hlavicce routeru vedle ikony pro "otestovani spojeni"

   v nastaveni ciselniku stavu uzivatele "Nastaveni / Ciselniky / Stavy uzivatelu" je nyni mozne, ke kazdemu stavu uzivatele, priradit barvu. V seznamu klientu ( "Uzivatele / Kontakty" ) je sloupec "stav uzivatele", ktery bude podbarven zadanou barvou.

   V karte klienta v menu "Informace" je tento stav odlisen barevne vedle nazvu stavu uzivatele do ktereho klient patri v nastaveni ciselniku stavu uzivatele "Nastaveni / Ciselniky / Skupiny uzivatelu" je mozne nastavit barvu pro kazdou skupinu. Zobrazovani funguje stejne jako v predchozim pripade "nastaveni stavu uzivatelu" pri odeslani hromadneho emailu a hromadne SMS ( v menu "Ostatni" ) je mozne odesilat informace pouze pro klienty, kteri jsou pripojeni k routeru ktery je offline. Je zde checkbox "Pouze na offline routery", ktery v pripade, ze je oznacen odesle mail nebo SMS pouze klientum kteri jsou k tomuto offline routeru pripojeni

   v menu "Statistiky / IP adresy" je zobrazena statistika vyuziti IP adres. Zobrazuje se zde informace, kdy byla IP adresa klientovi pridelena a pripadne kdy byla IP adresa odebrana nebo zmenena. To je vhodne napriklad v pripade poruseni autorskych prav nebo pri spolupraci s policii, kdy je nutne zobrazit prehled IP adres, ktere byly v urcitem casovem obdobi pouzivany. V seznamu IP adres je mozne vyhledava fulltextem

   pri prihlaseni klienta do systemu se provadi kontrola konzistence MySQL databaze. V pripade, ze jsou zjisteny poskozene SQL tabulky ( napriklad po vypadku elektriny, nebo vypnutim serveru bez korektniho ukonceni ), tak je zobrazena chybova hlaska a je zobrazen popis jaky zpusobem je mozne SQL tabulky opravit

ZABEZPECNI OBECNE

   vzledem k mnozicim se utokum na systemy ISP admin byly dopracovany nove bezpecnostni prvky a nove moznosti zabezpeceni. Vyrazne doporucujeme techto moznosti maximalne vyuzit.

   pokud na serveru mame zrizen systemovy ucet pro pristup, je aktivovano omezeni prihlaseni pouze z povolenych IP adres. Jedna se o IP adresu 88.103.224.215 ( Nase kancelar ) a 95.173.193.40 ( VPN server ). Z ostatnich IP adres je pristup blokovan.

   smluveny systemovy ucet naseho support teamu je zmenen na "netservice" a v pripade pozadavku na zasah se bude pristupovat pouze z nej. Doporucujeme tedy ostatni neaktualni ucty smazat.

ZABEZPECENI - nastaveni firewallu

   nyni je mozne nastavit firewall na urovni iptables

   nastaveni firewallu je mozne provest v menu "Nastaveni / Syst. Nastaveni / Zabezpeceni"

   zde je mozne pridat jednotlive IP adresy nebo site ( napriklad s maskou /24 ). I u kazde IP adresy je mozne individualne aktivovat nebo zakazat sluzby HTTP, HTTPS, SSH, SMTP, POP3, IMAP, FTP a MySQL. Kliknutim na prislusnou ikonu se zmeni stav ( aktivni / neaktivni )

   Na poslednim radku je mozne nastavit "Vychozi nastaveni" pro jednotlive sluzby. Napriklad je mozne globalne zakaznat SSH a povolit jej pouze z definovanych IP adres

   Kliknutim na tlacitko "Aktivovat zmeny" se behem 5ti minut provede nastaveni aktualni verze firewalu. Dokud neni ulozena zmena tlacitkem "Aktivovat zmeny", tak se zmeny FW neprovedou a je tedy mozne vse v klidu nastavit

   Pokud firewall neobsahuje zadne zaznamy pro IP adresy, tak se neaktivuje. Tato moznost slouzi predevsim k tomu, aby bylo mozne FW (automaticky nastavovany systemem) vypnout a pripadne si nastavit individualni FW na urovni operacniho systemu

   toto nastaveni muze provadet administrator s opravneni "Master admin"

ZABEZPECNI - omezeni prihlaseni administratoru z urcitych IP adres

   nove je moznost omezit administratorum pracujicim se systemem prihlaseni pouze z urcitych IP adres.

   z menu "Nastaveni / Administratori" je u kazdeho administratorskeho uctu ikona "zamek", ktera zobrazuje zda je zabezpeceni uctu aktivni ( ikona zamku je zobrazena barevne ) nebo neaktivni ( ikona zamku je zobrazena cernobile ). Kliknutim na tuto ikonu je mozne se dostat do nabidky nastaveni zabezpeceni uctu, kde je mozne aktivovat nebo deaktivovat zabezpeceni uctu.

   pokud je zabezpeceni aktivni, tak je zde mozne pridat povolene IP adresy, ze kterych je mozne se na tento administratory ucet prihlasit. Zde je mozne zadavat IP adresy nebo cele podsite ( napr. 192.168.1.0/24 ). Z nepovolenych IP adres nebude mozne se na dany ucet prihlasit a prihlaseni bude odmitnuto se stejnou hlaskou jako v pripade zadani chybneho hesla

   Informace zda je ucet zabezpecen je zobrazena v horni liste vedle ikony pro nastaveni sirokouhleho zobrazeni

   neuspesne prihlaseni z nepovolenych Ip adres se ukladaji v loggeru udalosti ( "Statistiky / Logger / Prihlaseni uzivatelu * Administratori" )

   toto nastaveni muze provadet pouze uzivatel s opravnenim "Master admin"

ZABEZPECNI - sifrovani souboru

   vzhledem k tomu, ze zalohy systemu a vsech routeru jsou nesifrovane, tak je administrator s opravnenim "Master admin" schopen tyto zalohy ulozit na lokalni disk a muze si tyto zalohy rozbalit. Take binarni zalohy jsou na disku ulozeny nezasifrovane a vzhledem k tomu, ze po internetu "koluje" utilita, ktera je schopna z binarni zalohy routeru Mikrotik ziskat vsechny hesla ( z duvodu nedostatecneho zabezpeceni hesel ze strany vyrobce Mikrotiku ), z toho duvodu byla implementovana moznost zasifrovani zaloh. Doporucujeme teto moznosti vyuzit a vsechny zalohy sifrovat

   pokud neni sifrovani zaloh nastaveno, tak se po prihlaseni do systemu zobrazi varovna hlaska, kde je doporuceno sifrovani zaloh zapnout.

   Sifrovani zaloh je mozne aktivovat spustenim prikazu "/usr/local/script/ispadmin/ispadmin_backup_crypt.pl". Tento prikaz je z bezpecnostnich duvodu mozne spustit pouze z prikazove radky na serveru. Po spusteni scriptu se spusti pruvodce nastavenim, kde budete v nekolika krocich vyzvani k povoleni sifrovani, nastaveni hesla a ulozeni hesla do systemu. Pokud je heslo ulozeno do systemu, tak pruvodce nabidne moznost zasifrovani stavajicich zaloh. Vyrazne doporucujeme z duvodu bezpecnosti stavajici zalohy zasifrovat!

   Heslo, ktere jste zadali do systemu si ZAPAMATUJTE, protoze bez tohoto hesla NEBUDE mozne zalozhy rozbalit!

 Pokud si presto neprejete provadet sifrovani ulozenych zaloh na disku, tak je mozne nastavit heslo do systemu na hodnotu "-1". Tim se system sifrovani zaloh vypne a pri prihlaseni se nezobrazuje chybova hlaska

   pokud jsou zalohy sifrovany, tak pri pokusu o rozbaleni je nutne zadat heslo k archivu. Bez tohoto hesla neni mozne zalohu rozbalit. K sifrovani zaloh se pouziva Postcode, takze je mozne jej bez problemu rozbalit ( po zadani spravneho hesla ) temer na kazdem pocitaci

PING NA ZARIZENI a KLIENTY

   pokud byl v systemu zadan vetsi pocet zarizeni nebo bylo nastaveno monitorovani na vetsi pocet koncovych klientu, tak ping, ktery provadel testovani dostupnoti a kvality linky ( ktery se kresli do grafu ) nestihl otestovat vsechny zarizeni a klienty behem 5ti minut a tim se do grafu zakreslovali hodnoty v delsim casovem useku ( zmena hodnoty grafu probihala napriklad 1x za hodinu ). Z tohoto duvodu byl system testovani klientu a zarizeni kompletne prepsan a vyuzitim utility fping, ktera je pro tyto ucely mnohem vhodnejsi, protoze dokaze testovat nekolik hostu soucasne a tim se vyrazne snizi cas potrebny k otestovani vsech hostu

   pokud je v karte klienta aktivovano "monitorovani klienta", tak se provadi ping na IP adresu klienta. Pokud vsak ma uvedeno koncove zarizeni u sluzby internet ( priklad ubnt v bridge ), tak se privadi ping na toto koncove zarizeni a nikoli na IP adresu klienta, protoze koncove zarizeni je temer vzdy zapnute a neni zde aplikovan FW, takze je mozne provadet test na kvalitu linky

   v karte klienta v menu "Statistiky" je zobrazen ping na klienta ( nebo koncove zarizeni ). Nyni je mozne na tento graf kliknout a tim se zobrazi podrobne statistiky za delsi casove obdobi

   pri zobrazeni grafu pingu, je primo v grafu uvedena IP adresa na kterou se ping provadi

FAKTURACE

   u jakekoliv sluzby je mozne nastavit dvoumesicni fakturacni obdobi. Nyni je tedy mozne sluzbu fakturovat mesicne, dvoumesicne, ctvrtletne pololetne a rocne

   Pokud je pouzit system plateb pres superCASH, tak je v menu "Fakturace / Banka / superCASH" prehled realizovanych transakci. Je zde uvedeno "Cislo superCASH klienta" a "cislo transakce". Tyto udaje jsou zaroven uvedeny na vypise, ktery obdrzite od spolecnosti MANUM ( provozovatel systemu ) a je tedy mozne jednotlive polozky porovnat

   v menu "Fakturace / Nastaveni / Obecne" pridana systemova promenna "payment_schedule_date_type". Je-li hodnota "0", DUZP (datum ucetniho zdanitelneho plneni) bude prvni den v mesici, bude-li hodnota nastaven na "1", DUZP bude posledni den v mesici

   v menu "Fakturace / Nastaveni / Upominky" je nove pridano pridano rozbalovaci menu "Skupina uzivatele" podle ktereho je mozne upominky odesilat

FAKTURACE - ZALOHOVE FAKTURY ( vyzva k platbe )

   nove implementovana moznost vytvareni zalohovych faktur. Pri vystaveni zalohove faktury je vystavena "vyzva k platbe", ktera neni danovym dokladem. Vyzva k platbe se stava danovym dokladem az v okamziku zaplaceni ze strany koncoveho zakaznika, kdy se stane standardni fakturou. Do doby zaplaceni vyzvy k platbe tedy nevznika povinnost platit DPH, dan z prijmu, apod.

   Vystavovani zalohovych faktur je nutne povolit v nastaveni fakturacni skupiny ( "Fakturace / Nastaveni / Fakt. skupiny" ), kde je nutne zakliknou polozku "Vystavovat zalohove faktury".

   Pokud ma fakturacni skupina priznak "vystaveni zalohovych faktur", tak se pri hromadnem vystaveni faktur vystavuji pouze zalohove faktury a nevystavi se standardni faktury, takze fakturacni skupina muze bezet pouze v rezimu standardnich faktur nebo v rezimu zalohovych faktur. Kombinace obou neni mozna

   pri rucnim vystaveni samostatne faktury je mozne vystavit bud zalohovou fakturu ( zakliknutim checkboxu "Zalohova faktura" ) nebo standardni faktury ( pokud checkbox zustane prazdny )

   po uhrade teto faktury koncovym klientem se z "vyzvy k platbe" stane standardni faktura. Datum vystaveni, datum splatnosti a datum zdanitelneho plneni se nastavi na den, kdy byla uhrada provedena

ZPRACOVANI SLOZENEK SLOVENSKE POSTY

   nove je implementovano zpracovani elektronickych vypisu Slovenske posty, ktera je schopna poskytovat elektronicke vypisy v XML formatu za transakce provedene slozenkou. Soucasti XML vypisu je u oskenovany ustrizek a zprava pro klienta, ktery byl na slozence vyplnen.

   v menu "Fakturace / Banka / SK Posta" je mozne naimportovat tento XML vypis, ktery Slovenska posta pravidelne zasila. Po uspesnem importu se provede sparovani uhrad s jednotlivymi fakturami vystavenymi v systemu ( podobne jako pri parovani bankovniho vypisu ) a faktury se oznaci jako uhrazene

   Po uspesnem sparovani je mozne kliknout na pocet sparovanych faktur ( cislo v prehledu importu ). Timto se otevre podrobny seznam sparovanych uhrad. U kazde uhrady je mozne zobrazit oskenovany ustrizek s adresou odesilatele platby a take cast slozenky, kde muze zakaznik vepsat "zpravu pro prijemce"

   Tato moznost je dostupna pouze pro klienty Slovenske posty, protoze Ceska posta podobny vypis neposila :-(

PLANOVANI

   v menu "Planovani / Volne" je nove pridana moznost zadavat ukoly bez prirazeneho technika. Tyto ukoly si pote mohou technici ve volnem case sami priradit a vyresit je :-)

   pridavat a prirazovat tyto ukoly smi pouze "Master admin" a nebo "Spravce planovani". Technik bez nastavenych opravneni si muze ukol priradit pouze sam sobe

   v menu "Planovani / Vykaz" je v jednotlivych radcich tabulky nahrazeno jmeno technika textem reseni ukolu. Jmeno technika je mozne zobrazit z pop-up menu.

   Umozneno razeni podle jmena klienta a datumu realizace. Vse je upraveno take v tisku do PDF.

   menu "Nastaveni / Ciselniky / Typy ukolu" je mozne u kazdeho typu ukolu zadat i cenu daneho ukonu, se kterou se pracuje v dalsich sestavach

   v menu "Planovani / Vykaz" je pridan novy sloupec "Cena vykonu". Pokud je k ukolu prideleno vice techniku, cena za ukon se rozdeli rovnym dilem mezi techniky

CMTS

   pridana kompletni podpora headendu MOTOROLA BSR2000. Nyni se zobrazuji podrobne informace ( frekvence, modulace, vysilaci vykon ) na vsech zpetnych kanalech a na doprednem kanalu

   pridana podpora headendu CISCO UBR 7225

Mezinarodni lokalizace

   pri importu dat VoIP volani pres IPEX se jiz nedoplnuje automaticky prefix 420 pred vsechna telefonni cisla, ale spravna predvolba daneho statu

--- End ofChangelog_3.47"

3.46 - 28.7.2010 EN

BUGS

   in the version 3.45 there was problem with counting of excess payment. Now it is repaired without any problem.

   fixed bug with Mikrotik version 4.x and dataflow above 106 Mbit when these two things caused incorrect graphs of transfer to interface.

--- End ofChangelog_3.46"

Contents

   1 3.45 - 22.7.2010

       1.1 BUGS

       1.2 NEWS

       1.3 NAGIOS

       1.4 RADIUS

       1.5 CMTS

       1.6 BILLING

       1.7 MIKROTIK

       1.8 LOCALIZATION

3.45 - 22.7.2010

BUGS

   fixed some minor bugs reported by users

   fixed bug at cable user (connected via CMTS), where it was possible to duplicate MAC address of the modem.

NEWS

   when the option "user monitoring" is active (in client card / active services) so in this case graph contains ping to client. Now this graph could be displayed in "Statistic of internet" as well.

   page with routers now has width 1200px for clearer view.

   After editing of network interface of the router, the system will save his position in the list of routers. In the past after save of changes system shown the first router from list.

   While the active service is selected in the Schedule and address of installation is different from client's address, the system will show this address in "Daily" and "Weekly plan" below the client's address.

NAGIOS

   added possibility to monitor end customers. Each service has option "Report drop-out for nagios". While selected there is option to select contact group which will be receiver of reports. Group can be defined in the tab "Settings / Code lists / Nagios". If the client is monitored by Nagios, the system tests online state automaticaly and send notification via email or SMS (active SMS gateway) while goes offline. Monitored client is also displayed on topology map in the tab "Nagios".

   in the tab "Customers / Internet" clients can be displayed according to selected option in pop-up menu "Ping monitoring" or "Nagios monitoring".

RADIUS

   there is possible to add special attributes to Internet services. This function must be activated in the tab "Settings / Sys. settings / Mikrotik" and set up the key "radius_sync_manually_added_attributs" to value "1".

   in the "Client card - Radius" there is the item "Manually added attributes" for adding special attributes (adding of the special attributes must be activated).

   individual attributes are displayed in the "Client card - Radius" for each Internet service.

   when the client is stopped in the case system add to the attribute "Auth-Type:= Reject" and client cannot log-in.

CMTS

   readjustment of statistics of each headend

   informations about downstream are loaded automatically. The system displays current frequency, bandwidth with setting of transmitted quality of the signal.

   informations about upstream are loaded automatically only in the case while they are separated to logical channels (headend must support it).

   for the physical channel the system displays frequency, bandwidth, Power level and current SNR on the actual upstream.

   for logical channel the system displays modulation, number of online / offline users. Roll-overing the number of users displays additional informations about users in followed states - online, offline, unregistered and rejected (in the case that headend supports it e.g. ARRIS C3).

   for each reverse channel there is possible to display the SNR graph.

   at the ARRIS C3 headend there is possible to edit "frequency, bandwith and Power level values" for each reverse channel. After click on save button the system apply changes in the headend in five minutes. This function is now available only for ARRIS C3 headend type.

   adapted displaying of SNR for client which are connected via CMTS

BILLING

   in the menu tab "Billing / Settlements / History" there is possible to display a list of settlements for defined period. Specify day could be selected from Pop-up menu.

   in the menu tab "Billing / Settings / Universal" there is a new item "matching_payment" which define the way how to match import from the bank.

There are two possible ways:

0 - Matching of payments by VS or SS (used in the past till the version 3.43 was released). Payment is successfully matched at least with one consistent symbol on the invoice.

1 - Both symbols (VS and SS) must be consistent with an invoice. In opposite case the system will not match payment and it will be necessary to match it manually.

   in the menu tab "Billing / Settings / Payment types" there is possible to change text heading for the item "Send an invoice by post" which will be displayed on invoice.

   possibility to count difference in excess which are lower than price on the invoice ( Partial payment of invoices)

   in the "Client card / Billing" there is overview of difference in excess of the client

MIKROTIK

   in the case when backup of the router does not works, so there is possible to start backup script in "the check mode" for displaying the procedure of backup and possible errors. Script (in the check mode) can be start by command:

/usr/local/script/ispadmin/backup_conf.pl debug

   eventually for specified router with ID parameter. This parameter can be found for each router in the menu tab "Routers":

/usr/local/script/ispadmin/backup_conf.pl debug

   by this command the system will backup configuration of specified router and also display procedure of the backup

   some version of Mikrotik have problem with communication via API and it causes "freeze" of the script which download data from Mikrotik. This scripts overload CPU of the server and the whole system goes slower. In according to this problem we have developed "check mode", which provide downloading data from Mikrotik. Script (in the check mode) is possible to start-up by the command:

       starts-up downloading data from Mikrotik:

/usr/local/script/ispadmin/get_data_from_mikrotik.pl all debug        

       starts-up downloading data from all routers with max. informations including communication with Mikrotik. Value is between 1-9 and depends on level of check mode:

/usr/local/script/ispadmin/get_data_from_mikrotik.pl all debug 9

       starts-up downloading data from all routers with max. informations:

/usr/local/script/ispadmin/get_data_from_mikrotik.pl debug 9

LOCALIZATION

   system is now fully localized for Spain

--- End ofChangelog_3.45"

Contents

   1 3.44 - 9.6.2010

       1.1 BUGS

       1.2 NEWS

       1.3 MIKROTIK WIFI STATUS

       1.4 GOOGLE MAPS

       1.5 PAYPAL

       1.6 NEW PAYMENT METHODE "SUPERCASH"

       1.7 CMTS

           1.7.1 NETFLOW

           1.7.2 RADIUS

           1.7.3 BILLING

           1.7.4 SCHEDULING

           1.7.5 REMINDERS

           1.7.6 HUNGARY LOCALIZATION

           1.7.7 BACKUPING THE SYSTEM

3.44 - 9.6.2010

BUGS

   system now reads comments from interfaces of Mirkotik router correctly. It works only when communication via API is active. Diacritical marks are not acceptable in the comment.

NEWS

   when the client is stopped, so in this case system will show him with red color "Users / Internet". When you rollover his name system will show infobox the reason of stopping.

   in the Tab "Settings / Code lists / Router groups" there you can arrange groups however you need and this saved arrangement will be applied into tab "Routers"

   added new variables $ADMIN_NAME$ and $ADMIN_PHONE$ which will display name of logged-in administrator and his phone (if it is set) to the contract

MIKROTIK WIFI STATUS

   system now read information about all wireless intefaces and graphically display loading of WIFI band

   menu tab for displaying of loaded WIFI band ("Routers / Mikrotik status / WIFI status"). Here is the list of routers with all Wireless interfaces and detailed parameters like SSID, transmitting frequency, used range, etc.

   records can be sorted by Locality, Router, Range and Fulltext. System remember settings automatically so after second login this settings persist

   by clicking on the name of interface system graphically display loading of WIFI band. It means displaying the graph (5GHz or 2.4GHz) with transmitting frequency of the interface

   marked checkbox "Extended preview" expand information about all interfaces and show graphs with engaged frequency for all Wireless cards

   by clicking on the router coordinate system will display Google maps centered to this router

   row with interface and graph of transmitting frequency have red color only in cases when interface has the same frequency or when frequency partly overlay router with different interface.

Control of these overlay frequencies is executed by one router within all Wireless interfaces and and also between routers in the case when routers have the same GPS coordinates

   Graph contains followed informations:

       Frequency range of available interface for transmitting

       Currently used frequency

       Allocated band ( depends on setting a width channel )

       Overlaying of transmitting frequency on interfaces which are at the same router or have same GPS coordinates

        Band of denied frequency (5GHz) is without grey background ( 5.315 GHz - 5.550 GHz )

   Mouse rollover name of interface display all details about Wireless interface. It is the same as in the Tab "Routers". There are also informations about all installed antennas with description of each type, antenna gain, flare angle, etc.

   In the tab "Routers / Mikrotik status / WIFI status" there is information how log is the client offline (in detail). Offline clients have grey background.

   In client's card in the Tab "Statistics" there are detailed informations about Wifi card of the client like SSID, his interface, SNR, uptime, etc.

GOOGLE MAPS

   above the main map there is the button "Remember". By clicking on ti system will save current position, zoom and typ of the map.

   For each router there is possibility to add "Planned antennas" (green icon with satellite motive). By clicking on it you can add planned antennas to the map (with grey background). It is usable for planned antennas which currently do not have own interface or device (it is not installed to the router - wifi card).

   When the button "Remember" is pressed, so in this case google maps will center to saved position when adding a new client.

   Displaying of planned coverage it is possible to switch (on / off)

   by clicking on router it will display name of the router and list of interfaces on the router

PAYPAL

   ISPadmin now supports payment methode PayPal.

   simple registration of your company at the address na www.paypal.com.

   in the Tab "Billing / Settings / Universal" there it is neccessary to set "paypal" value to "1" and also set your "paypal_account_id" what you will get after registration. In the most cases it is email address.

   Integration has been completed and now your clients can pay via PayPal or credit cards which are intergated to the PayPal system.

   Client can see this option in his user interface at each oustanding invoice. By clicking on the icon "PayPal" he can pay it online and provider will be informed about this transaction through his PayPal account.

   Benefits of this solution are:

- Simple integration, fast and easy way how to pay outstanding invoices, solution for paying online via most common credit cards for all services

NEW PAYMENT METHODE "SUPERCASH"

   CURRENTLY ONLY FOR CZECH PROVIDERS (in near future for Slovakia providers)

   replace standard cheque by barcode. Can be paid at Czech Post, Sazka terminals.

   Benefits of this solution are: Cheaper for end customers, faster way to pay, more places to pay

   detailed description can be found on the page provider of this service http://www.manum.cz/ (only in Czech language)

CMTS

   there is a nem item (while adding or editing tariff) "CMTS Filename". It serves for booting of modem with specific configuration file e.g. with VoIP support or special QOS.

   If it is filled the system sets this configuration file, for booting of modem, to DHCP automatically. This configuration file must be created by external utility and must be uploaded to the server - directory /data/support/tftp_root/

   When this field is empty the system creates default configuration file

NETFLOW

   Searching of requested data has been optimized. In the past searching was slower while data grew and system was overloaded. Now the system works only with data for defined period.

   Page for export of NETflow data has been adapted. In the case when it is set different language than CZ, description of columns in exported file are in English.

RADIUS

   Stopped client is automatically sets to profile "Reject" and this client is not able to connect to the internet.

   When the client has set an IP address, system use attribute "Framed-IP-Address" which check right arrangement of this IP address. Static IP address can be set at the client's service, choosing the router where he is connected. After that is possible to fill his static IP address.

   System can connects clients trough PPPoE. For each client there is created a PPPoE tunnel to the server and verification via Radius. Now system supports connecting clients by Hotspot system and through PPPoE tunnels.

BILLING

   When the provider use Accounting slips on the invoces, so there is possible to change codes of pre-counting in the Tab "Billing / Settings / Universal".

New variables:

       accounting_code_for_demand - outstanding debt (311)

       accounting_code_for_service - service (602)

       accounting_code_for_vat - VAT (343)

       accounting_description_event - description (in the past - service sale)

After update system sets codes from parenthesises.

   there is option to write a description for created credit note.

   Payment schedule can be sent by email (users' emails). This action is logged in client's card history.

SCHEDULING

   while creating or closing a task there is possibility to mark checkbox to send info email to customers. Email contains task ID, date and description.

   in the tab "Settings / Sys. settings / scheduling" the item "planning_allow_change_technician" there is option to change technician who will solve the task

   in the task there is a new field "Internal description". This information can be displayed only in detail of the plan and it isn't send or print anywhere else.

   while editing an administrator there is option to mark "Manage owns and assigned plans". Technician with this permission is allowed to create tasks to all technicians but he will see only own tasks and tasks created by himself.

REMINDERS

   added a new filter "Status" to sort customers. There is also new option to change user's state. All these changes are logged in the client's card.

HUNGARY LOCALIZATION

   possibility to change pre-accounting codes.

   corrected export of invoices in CSV format. When the HU localization is choosen, so the system will use different CSV template according to requests of Hungarian ISP.

   VoIP service is separated to several rows in the invoice like "Flat amount of VoIP", "Local calls", "Mobile calls", "International calls".

BACKUPING THE SYSTEM

   system now backups whole system daily with directories /var/lib/mysql/ where are binary saves of SQL database. In the case when the backup is damaged there is a chance to reload it from these binary backups.

--- End ofChangelog_3.44"

Contents

   1 3.43 - 26.4.2010

       1.1 HELPDESK

       1.2 BUGS

       1.3 NEWS

       1.4 BACKUPING CONFIGURATION OF MIKROTIK ROUTER

       1.5 BILLING

       1.6 BILLING - PAYMENT SCHEDULE

       1.7 GOOGLE MAPS

       1.8 SCHEDULING

       1.9 HUNGARY LOCALIZATION

3.43 - 26.4.2010

HELPDESK

   new helpdesk system released. All technical questions please write to the address This email address is being protected from spambots. You need JavaScript enabled to view it. and all business questions please write to This email address is being protected from spambots. You need JavaScript enabled to view it.. Old addresses still exist but hey are redirected to this helpdesk system ( This email address is being protected from spambots. You need JavaScript enabled to view it., This email address is being protected from spambots. You need JavaScript enabled to view it., This email address is being protected from spambots. You need JavaScript enabled to view it. ).

   Other addresses esist as well be there is no reply quaranteed.

BUGS

   fixed some minor bugs reported by users

   fixed bug about permission. In the past the administrator with permission "only read" for Billing, couldn't display an invoice in client's card.

   administrator with restricted permissions (in the Tab "Settings / Administrators") can see only that routers (in the Tab "Routers / Availability","Routers / Mikrotik status" and "Routers / Radius") which have set permissions to "read" or "write".

   fixed bug about check. In the past a client with payment method "check" didn't see it in his user interface.

   In some cases (64bit installations) there were a problem with automatic sending remiders because there were sat low parameters for maximum loading of memory for PHP. This limit is now set up to sending reminders for large number of clients and it works without problem.

NEWS

   when a client is connected through PPPoE, system will show his username and password to PPPoE tunnel while printing settings of this client in client's card.

   in the Tab "Users / Contacts" there ate two new links "Returned contract" and "Unreturned contract". This functions display all clients with returned or unreturned contracts according to information in client's card where is a checkbox for this purpose and there you can write a date when the contract was returned.

   Info letter with settings of user interface ("Others / Inf. letter") is now possible to send according to the Invoice group.

   In client's card while editing there is possiblity to mark checkbox "Don't send mass email". Clients can be filtered accordint to this option in the Tab "Users / Contacts".

   All deleted services by administrator are logged in the client's card "Active services / Show deleted services". There are logged information like Administrator's name and date of deleting.

   added two new variables in the Tab "Settings / Contracts" $FAKTUROVAL_POSKYTOVATEL$" means Invoiced by the provider and "$TELEFON_POSKYTOVATEL$" means Provider's phone.

BACKUPING CONFIGURATION OF MIKROTIK ROUTER

   system now starts single proces for backuping of each router. In the past system backuped router one by one and in the case when connection from side of Mikrotik was failed, script didn't continue and backups of others routers didn't proceed. Now it is corrected. It means if one connection from Mikrotik fails, other backups are not affected.

BILLING

   added new type of export to the accounting system "MK SOFT". Type of export can be changed in the Tab "Billing / Settings".

   in the Tab "Billing / Bank" there is possibility to display "All payments for defined period" and "Disparated payments for defined period" in the PDF or CSV format. These links are located above table of imported payments.

   when the export of payments is set to ABO format ("Billing / Settings" variable "export_uhrad_do_abo=1") system now shows separated payment methods (SIPO, bank transfer, cash). This can be found in the Tab "Billing / Overviews / Billing" by clicking the Icon "Export of payments"

   new possibility of bank import statement in CSV format for GE Money Bank

   in the Tab "Billing / Overviews / Claims" there is list of outstanding invoices. There you can define period for which you want to display outstanding invoices.

   in the client's card (in the Tab "Billing") there is possibility to display all issued invoices for whole year in PDF format. It is located above table of issued invoices for client.

   in client's card there is now option to send single reminder for an outstanding invoice. This option can be found in the Tab "Billing" in the client's card by clicking to detail of invoice. This option is usable only for an outstanding invoices.

BILLING - PAYMENT SCHEDULE

   system now supports generating and printing payment schedule for client

   it must be activated in the Tab "Billing / Settings / Universal" variable "splatkovy_kalendar"

   for this time system supports only generating and displaying of this payment schedule

   in the Tab "Billing / Overviews / Payment" there is possible to generate payment schedule for all clients in PDF format.

   single payment schedule for each client can be displayed in his client card in the Tab "Billing"

       If you have new ideas or wishes about this function, please contact us at the address This email address is being protected from spambots. You need JavaScript enabled to view it.

GOOGLE MAPS

   while editing data in client's card there is an icon above the map with checkbox "Show on map". If it is checked client will be shown on the map

   if it is possible the system automatically use KMZ format instead KML. KMZ is compressed format using Postcode. Final size of the file is reduced by 90%

   in settings ("Settings / Sys. Settings") there is a new variable "google_maps_forced_uses_http". If you have problem with displaying layers of the map and use HTTPS, so in this case set this variable to value "1". If it won't help please contact our technical support.

   Antennas could be added to devices of the router. These antennas will be shown on the map with signal coverage range.

   System automatically rewrite unfriendly characters as html entities for right displaying of layers of the map.

   Added new icons for routers and devices

   Icon of non-active router has 50% opacity on the map (without red or green light)

SCHEDULING

   While editing a plan there is the Icon "Service list". this document is in PDF format and can be used as documentation of e.g. repair at customer's place. When the customer sign this document it means that he agree with invoicing this repair or other kind of intervention.

HUNGARY LOCALIZATION

   system supports displaying of Hungary check

--- End ofChangelog_3.43"

3.42 - 17.3.2010

REPAIRS

   Considering the problem with CPU loading at servers with ISPadmin we have found a problem with some MK versions. When trying to display detailed information about wireless adapters by command "/interface wireless info getall" via API so communication with MK was got to the unstable state a consumed more of the system memory.

   fixed problems with application of DHCP leases

 If the problem with automatic binary backups of the router still persists so it will be probably problem with connection via SCP and it'll be neccessary to reinstal OpenSSH by command:

   apt-get remove openss-client; apt-get install openssh-client openssh-server ssh

--- End ofChangelog_3.42"

Contents

   1 3.41 - 16.3.2010

       1.1 BUGS

       1.2 NEWS

       1.3 LOCALIZATION

       1.4 WIKIPEDIA

       1.5 EVIDENCE OF WIFI ANTENNAS

       1.6 MIKROTIK

       1.7 RADIUS

       1.8 GOOGLE MAPS

       1.9 INVOICING

       1.10 INVOICING - price calculation

       1.11 Invoicing of reminders

       1.12 SCHEDULING

       1.13 CATV

       1.14 MASS DOCUMENT GENERATION

3.41 - 16.3.2010

BUGS

   fixed some reported bugs

   Contract templates now have 3 new variables $ADRESA_POSKYTOVATEL$ (Provider's address), $PSC_POSKYTOVATEL$ (Provider's Postcode code) and $MESTO_POSKYTOVATEL$ (Provider's city/town). All variables are available in the Tab "Settings / Contracts".

   History in the client card has new item "Stopping user"

   System now can send SMS to more phone numbers when it is filled in client card in the field "Mobile phone". These numbers must be separated by semicolon.

   When the service has set "Invoicing period" as "Don't invoice" system now display price "0" in the overview of services "Customers / Internet", "Customers / VoIP". In the past system has shown service common price there (not on invoice) and in the overview it wasn't clear which service has set "Don't invoice".

   Fixed bug when adding VoIP service system didn't save phone number and it was saved only after editing.

NEWS

   In the tab "Statistics / Logger" Pop-up menu "Sign on users - Administrators" there is the Earth icon and by clicking on this icon system will display details about IP address which was used for logining-in. For this function the system use http://www.geoiptool.com .

   When sending email from client card or by mass sending there is followed order for sender email addresses:

1. Email of technician who is actually logged-in the system,

2. Email added for Invoice group,

3. Administrator email filled in the settings as "admin_email".

   In the tab "Statistics / Logger" there is new item "History of deleted clients" with information which technician has delete client and when.

   SMS (longer then 160 characters) will be separated to more messages and marked with number (e.g. 1/3, 2/3, 3/3).

   In the client card there is the tab "History" and it contains complete history of changes at the client.

LOCALIZATION

   Polish localization has been completed. Our local distributor for Poland is company "RAXEL Telekomunikacja Mazowiecka".

WIKIPEDIA

   On-line manual has been released at the address

   Very useful is the new section FAQ (frequently asked questions) at the address http://oldwiki.ispadmin.eu/index.php?title=FAQ . This section is updated recently. Please read carefully this section before you contact us. Common answers are there right now.

   Icon with link to this Wikipedia is displayed on the top of the page when you are logged in your system

   If you will have any ideas or wishes how we can improve this documentation please contact us This email address is being protected from spambots. You need JavaScript enabled to view it.

EVIDENCE OF WIFI ANTENNAS

   fixed some reported bugs

   for each antenna there is option to set if it has vertical or horizontal polarization. Anntena types can be specified in the Tab "Settings / Code lists / Antennas".

MIKROTIK

   fixed bug about saving of MK routers binary backups. There was a problem (in some MK versions) with connecting and saving via SSH and it was neccessary to fill "Yes" manualy after first login to the system. Now it is automatic.

   In the Tab "Others / Backups / Mikrotik" there is new column "HW" with information about HW with Mikrotik (e.g. RB333).

   Fixed bug about duplicate entries (in some MK versions) after changing Client's MAC address.

   Fixed bug about non-complete applying QT in the some of the newest MK.

e.g. Mikrotik sent value 100k in place of 100000. It is right but system can't recognize it because it is new in the last

versions of Mikrotik ( they didn't say anything ;)

RADIUS

   In the Tab "Customers / Internet". Fulltext search now accept item "User name RADIUS" as well.

   In the "Client card / Radius" there are now informations about all activated RADIUS services and also table of group attributes.

   When the client is stopped the system will disconnect him and block access.

   Each change of RADIUS attribute is immediately synchronized with Radius server and active.

   Attribute synchronization with Radius server

       Item "Mikrotik-Rate-Limit" isn't applicated for each client. The attribute "Mikrotik-Rate-Limit" must be set at tariffs' attributes. If the value isn't set so ISPadmin generate this value from tariff settings in the Tab "Settings / Tariffs / Radius". If this value is set manually in this case ISPadmin apply value as special attribute at the client

       Fixed bugs after update of some parameters

       When the checkbox "Lock user" isn't check in this case system won't apply attribute "NAS-IP-Address"

       Radius server can confirm user by name and password but when it is filled MAC address (as a name) system provides confirmation by MAC address and no password is needed. In this case there must be allowed Client confirmation by MAC address in the system in the Tab "Radius / General / item Wireless.

GOOGLE MAPS

   Layers are generated to the KML file which are smaller and faster for loading.

   Layers are generated considering requests via AJAX

   Range of antennas is possible to set even with decimal places

INVOICING

   In the Tab "Billing / Overviews / Claims" there it is possible to search invoices by date (from / to)

   Added CSV import of "GE Money Bank" bank statement. This is possible to choose in the Tab "Billing / Bank"

   In the Tab "Billing / Bank" there it is possible to print "List of disparated payments for defined period". This link is located on the right side of the page above table with list of imported payments. Period for defined period (month / whole year) can be displayed in PDF format and printed.

   In the Tab "Billing / Overviews / Accounting" there are two new columns "Price with VAT, Price without VAT"

INVOICING - price calculation

   Modification in the price calculation with VAT. System now calculated invoices with and without VAT in different ways (correct way according to accounting systems). Option to set with or without VAT can be fond int the Tab "Billing / Settings" the Item "cena_dph_typ".

If this item is set to "0" value so system create invoices without VAT. Value "1" means price with VAT.

       procedure of price calculation for cena_dph_typ = 0, VAT rate = 20%

       service has set price without VAT ( e.g. VAT 20% )

       price 5000 CZK

       calculation: 5000*1.20 = 6000 CZK, VAT = 1000 CZK

       procedure of price calculation for cena_dph_typ = 1, VAT rate = 20%

       service has set price with VAT = 6000 CZK ( most common )

       6000 * 0.1667 = 4999.80, VAT = 1000.20

       coefficient is calculated: 1- ( 1/ 1,20 ) = -0,1666666666666667

       Czech accounting system use 4 decimal places (e.g. 0,1667)

       price is calculated according to actual VAT what is set in the Tab "Billing / Settings", the item "VAT"

   Because of this modification it is neccessary to check created invoices !!!

Invoicing of reminders

   To generate bulk reminders ( Billing / Reminders) there is possibility to do it by the SMS. The Icon for it is next to the icon for sending reminders by email. All sent reminders are saved in the client's card.

   Standalone reminder can be send in the client's card. This option is located in detail of an invoice which isn't paid and after due date. Email contains text and the invoice as attachment. All non-paid invoices could be attached to the reminder and set up a fee for it before sending.

   Additional email address for copies of sent reminders can be set in the Tab "Billing / Settings / Universal". All reminders sent to clients are in the same time sent to this address as a copy.

SCHEDULING

   In the Scheduling Tab (Daily, Weekly) there is new item "Total number of undischarged tasks till this day". By clicking on the displayed number system show overview of undischarged tasks.

CATV

   system automatically generates configuration files for DOCSIS 2.0 modems with all options what DOCSIS 2.0 has. In the past it was possible to set "use DOCSIS 2.0" only for headend ARRIS C3. Now the system check these possibilities and set configuration file automatically

   added 2 new items into DOCSIS 2.0 configuration files:

       SnmpMibObject enterprises.1429.77.1.3.2.0 Integer 2 ;

       SnmpMibObject enterprises.1429.77.1.4.2.0 Integer 0 ;

   system now supports headend ARRIS C4

MASS DOCUMENT GENERATION

   In the Tab "Settings / Contracts"

   Document generation has been repaired for opening documents in MS Word

   Added a new menu Tab "Others / Mass document / History". There it is possible to display history of document generation

   Each single generated documents are saved in client card in the Tab "Contracts"

--- End ofChangelog_3.41"

3.40 - 3.2.2010

Changelog 3.40

   The fault of API mikrotik corrected on x86 architecture. In the last ISP admin version 3.39 there is a new function for wireless interafce details account. Unfortunately, there has been another mistake spotted regarding Mikrotik on x86 architecture, where during the enquiry through API on Mikrotik, the connection between the ISP admin and the router froze. The connection was not properly ended on the side of the mikrotik and the script that was accounting the data was thus still running. There was a large amount of scripts running (which were not ended) and thus the load of CPU increased immensely.

   This mistake manifests only in the versions of Mikrotik x86 (classical PC). Routerboards are not touched by this mistake.

--- End ofChangelog_3.40"

Contents

   1 3.39 - 31.1.2010

       1.1 CHANGES

       1.2 NEWS

       1.3 MIKROTIK

       1.4 BINARY BACKUPS OF THE MIKROTIK ROUTER

       1.5 RADIUS

       1.6 WIFI AERIAL EVIDENCE

       1.7 GOOGLE MAPS

       1.8 SNMP TEMPLATE

       1.9 BILLING

       1.10 BULK DOCUMENT GENERATING

       1.11 NETFLOW

       1.12 VOIP Import

3.39 - 31.1.2010

CHANGES

   The fault of client ordering in the "Users / Internet" bookmark correction. The clients were wrongly ordered according to the "connected to" column.

   Corrected minor reported faults

NEWS

   Graphic design of the menu buttons editted; these are now better-arranged

   Into the head of every sent e-mail, the "Return-Path:" item will be added; this is set to the e-mail address of the sender ( either a user logged into the ISP admin and/or the e-mail address chosen from offered pop-up menus). Thus in case the e-mail is not delivered, the error notification is sent to this e-mail address.

   In the menu "Settings / Number keyboards / End devices" it was possible to display devices according to individual groups ( routers, AP .. ). Now it is possible to display all the client devices by clicking on the link "All devices"

MIKROTIK

   Mikrotik version 4.x support tested.

   Communication has been tested with stable versions of mikrotik version 2.51, 3.30 and the new 4.5. In all these versions the system works fully. In the version 3.x and 4.x it is possible to use API which provides more detailed information ( the "Routers / Mikrotik status" bookmark) and offers new functions which are not supported in versions 2.x

   API usage for communication with mikrotik is no longer "experimental"but is fully available for the actual operation

   When you suspend user services, all the IP spans presented at the service in the "routed networks" item and not only in the client "main" IP address

   Optimalization of QT notation carried out. In case the change of speed of a superior QT at a shared tariff rate (adding a client, removing a client, FUP activation, etc…) was carried out, then during writing a new rule into QT this superior rule removed itself and was again created. The problem was that when the rule was removed, all the clients under this QT "lost" their parent and turned "red" in MK in QT. The system correctly created a new QT, but found out that all the clients lost the parent so they had to be removed and added again. It meant to remove the old and enter the new rules. If there was a lot of clients in the group ( hundreds of clients ), the whole operation took rather long, and at such a number of clients, recount of the main QT used to happen quite often especially from the FUP activation, and the router was often re-writing the rules. Newly, for the current rule, there is only one change of the chosen parameter carried out ( without its removal ) and thus the whole process is made faster.

   If the "extended statement" is on in the "Routers / Mikrotik status" menu, the new version of firmware routerboard is newly displayed in here as well ( firmware is something like bios ). Then, the last available version of FW is displayed, which is a part of the distribution of mikrotik after update to a newer version. If the current and available version of FW does not correspond ( there is an older version in routerboards ), the new available version will show up in red and it is advisable to update it. Update FW is done from consoles by releasing the "/system routerboard upgrade" command. Thus you will finish the firmware upgrade ( after the routerboard reboot ). It is recommended to keep a current version of firmware because it solves for example random mikrotik "freezing" and other bothersome things. The function for new version detection is available only in case that communication through API is active.

   Information about wireless adaptors count automatically. All the details are possible to be displayed in the "Routers" bookmark by clicking on edit wireless adaptor icon. Here all the available information, such as frequency, type, card chipset, set coding, is displayed.

   We are planning graphical display of the frequency range utilization on the transmitters.

BINARY BACKUPS OF THE MIKROTIK ROUTER

   The system newly saves also binary backups of the Mikrotik router configuration, which are rather easily used for the system recovery

   These backups are to be found in the "Others / Backups / Routers" menu. There is a new column in the routers details called "Binary backup", and it displays size of a backup file in case of a backup, and by clicking on a certain icon it is possible to save the backup onto a local disc. This backup is possible to be "drawn" from the local disc through the winbox into the "Files" bookmark. By chosing the backup in the winbox and clicking on the "restore" button, the complete router configuration wil appear.

   Saving the binary backup after update fully works ONLY on 64bit versions of the system. For the older 32bit systems it is necessary to install a perl library "Net::SCP::Expect" including all the subordinations. In the contrary case, the binary backup is not saved.

RADIUS

   The given IP address for the router as well as all the IP addresses set on the router on individual interfaces are now added into allowed router IP addresses, which may communicate with RADIUS server ( NAS IP address ); this information is automatically detected by loading of "routed networks". In some cases a communication problem used to arise because Mikrotik router communicated from a differen IP address ( an IP address set on a different interface ) than IP address for the router in the item of "IP address". In this case radius server rejected the connnection with the router and the client could not verify. Now, all the IP addresses set on a mikrotik router are added into "allowed" IP addresses for the communication with the radius server, and thus the problem should be solved.

   This overview of connection "Router / Radius / Log Live" shows new column "Connection Type", which is given information that the client connect via Ethernet, Wifi, etc ...

   In the preview of the connection in the menu "Routers / Radius / Log verification" there is an icon for disconnection for every active client (ie. a client connected). By clicking on this icon, the system will attempt to disconnect the communication the Mikrotik router. Disconnection is, however, only possible when "API" is active on the router and the communication with the router works fully. API is possible to be activated only on Mikrotik version 3.x and 4.x. Disconnection of the client is not supported in the 2.x version.

   In case of disconnection, the client is removed firstly from cookies ( /ip hotspot cookie ) and then is disconnected from active clients ( /ip hotspot active ). Thus a re-login is forced, or aslo client disconnection during service suspension.

   In case of service suspension, the client`s access is blocked ( removal from radius, password for verification ) and the system will consequently try to disconnect the client ( by the way described in previous step )

   When changing the IP address of the router or when changing the password for communication with the radius, the radius will reboot itself automatically to load all the current information about the routers set.

   If the client has the service radius activated, there appears a new bookmark of in the client card. All the detailed information about the settings of tariff rate (individual attributes) are listed here, as well as a complete log for the client`s login. If the client is currently logged, the information about his activity is displayed here, and by clicking on a respective icon you can disconnect the client.

WIFI AERIAL EVIDENCE

   Newly it is possible to file used aerials on the transmitters including flare angels, range of reach… These data result in drawing a network topology in

   In the menu "Settings / Code lists / Aerials" it is possible to add individual aerials. You will enter the title (eg. UNI24), the frequency for which an aerial is used, the flare angel, theoretical reach of the aerial, and the aerial gain.

   In the bookmark for "Routers" you can add individual aerials to every interface. The aerials can be added in detail editing where the button "Add an aerial" is. Pre-set aerial types may be selected from a code list. After the selection, the parametres such as reach, flare angel, etc. will be pre-set. * * These values can be edited. Every interface can get any number of aerials.

GOOGLE MAPS

   Since Google has made some API changes on their maps, displaying of the network topology stopped working. Now, there are changes made, which ensure re-display.

   If the router has set the GPS coordinates and individual interfaces have aerials assigned, then the maps will show theoretical signal coverage according to set parametres ( the reach, flare angel, azimuth or the direction of the aerial). Displaying the reach is only theoretical because field obstacles such as buildings and hills are not taken into account. Individual frequency range of transmitting aerials ( 2,4, 5.8 and 3,5 GHz ) are distinguished with colour. 5.8 GHz is displayed as yellow, 3.5 GHz is blue and 2.4GHz is green. If the router is offline, the signal coverage turns red to show at least approximately, disabled locations.

   When displaying maps in "Others / Maps", you can display the terrain profiles on a route shown. When you doubleclick, the initial point may be displayed, and when you doubleclick the target point will be shown. It is also possible to enter the altitude (eg. pole height, or a building height on which the aerial is located) for the initial and the target points. The profile will alter according to this altitude. The initial and target points may be drawn on the map by grabbing the mouse. After releasing the point, the profile will be counted again and will be newly displayed.

   In maps, you can set a particular map layer by using checkbox. The settings will now retain even after logout, so it is not necessary to re-set all the layers again when loging in.

SNMP TEMPLATE

   For every template it is possible to select an icon from the offered set in the OID settings OID ( "Others / Settings / SNMP OID" ); the icon will be assigned to this template. These icons will show in the bookmarks of routers next to the name of device. The icons will in the future serve for graphical preview of SNMP device.

   In the menu "Settings / Code lists / End devices", there is an icon of a SNMP template in the preview of device, and the name of the template which us used by the device is listed here, as well as the SNMP version.

   Final proof of SNMP data reading done; so data reading out of all devices should be possible.

   In case of debugging, you can start data reading out of the device manually by using the command " /usr/local/script/ispadmin/get_data_from_snmp.pl debug ". After releasing this, you will be shown the read values and details on the consoles. In case of a communication problem, send us the debug report which will contribute to perfect functionality of the SNMP communication with all the devices.

   In case a value of STRING type is got in the SNMP template, the system used to convert it into a number, which was not successful and did not result in drawing the final graph. Now the got values are identified automatically, and in case of a value of STRING type, this text will appear directly into the graph caption as a description. Thus it is possible to display for example a description of the device, the connection frequency, etc…. These values appear only in the graph caption and are not drawn in the graph itself because this is not possible with text strings.

BILLING

   Support for the billing system MONEY S5 implemented. Now you can export into this billing system. Export is carried out as usually in the menu of "Billing / Invoices", where an appropriate icon is placed for export in the invoice preview for every month in the invoice display. Export must be firstly set in the menu "Billing / Settings / Export". Export into MONEY S5 is the type "10".

BULK DOCUMENT GENERATING

   In this version, bulk document generating using the saved templates is possible.

   Firstly, it is necessary to save a template of the document in the RTF formate in the menu of "Settings / Contracts"

   A bulk document can be generated in the "Others / Bulk document". Here it is possible to select a template of the document from the menu and also the group of clients for which the document is going to be generated. Here you can select the type of service, router, tariff rate, group, etc….

   You can displays the generated documents in the menu of "Others / Bulk document" by clicking on the item "Generated documents". You can also remove the documents here.

NETFLOW

   The NetFlow check test added. The Netflow run on the server checked regularly ( and thus the data are collected ). The current state may be displayed by clicking on "NetFlow" bookmarks. NetFlow status is graphically displayed here ( red or green point ).

   In case, NetFlow is not running on the server, a warning sign appears after login and the problem has to be solved.

   In the menu of "Others / Bookmarks / NetFlow", you can display the curent size of stored data according to particular year, day up to individual files. If the data size is larger, the process might take some longer time.

VOIP Import

   In the menu of "Others / VoIP import / Previews" during the import of a new statement choice, if the imported prices are with or without VAT. The total price calculation will be done and saved into the database.

--- End ofChangelog_3.39"

CONTACT

NET service solution, s.r.o.
Žerotínova 3056/81a
787 01 Šumperk
Czech Republic